Sharp AR-5726 AR-5731 SM PC PDF

SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZAR5731/S1E
DIGITAL
MULTIFUNCTIONAL
SYSTEM
MODEL
AR-5726/5731
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
[5] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
[6] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[8] MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[9] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[10] ELECTRICAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Parts marked with are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
This document has been published to be used

for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING
[5] ADJUSTMENTS
1. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
1. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
2. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
2. Details of adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
3. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
1. Line of machines and options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
1. Basic function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. Supply system table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
[6] SIMULATION
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
2. Simulation code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3
3. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6
[7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE
1. Trouble code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
2. Details of trouble code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2
[8] MAINTENANCE
3. Developer/Drum life end definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3
1. Maintenance list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
4. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3
2. Details of Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 3
5. Environment conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3
3. Other related items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 31
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE

1. External view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
2. Internal structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
3. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3
4. RSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
5. Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5
6. Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5
7. Solenoid/Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6
8. Drive motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6
9. Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7
10. Fan/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7
11. PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8
12. Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8
[9] FIRMWARE UPDATE

1. Firmware update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
[10] ELECTRICAL SECTION
1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
2. Actual wiring chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
3. Signal list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9
NOTE FOR SERVICING

This Service Manual uses some photographs to assure safe operation.
Please understand the meanings of photographs before servicing.
WARNING: If this WARNING should be ignored, a serious danger
to life or a serious injury may result.
CAUTION: If this CAUTION should be ignored, injury or damage
to property could result.
2. Precautions for servicing

1) When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, the
network cable, and the telephone line from the machine, except
when performing the communication test, etc.
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
2) There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use extreme
care when servicing.
1. Warning for servicing

1) Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that
meets the specified voltage and current requirements.
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric shock.
2) If there is any abnormality such as smoke or an abnormal smell,
interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
3) Be sure the machine is properly grounded. Failure to ground the
machine properly may result in an electric shock or fire.
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening, grounding must be made.
4) When connecting the ground wire, never connect it to the following
points as it may cause an explosion, fire, or an electric shock:
Gas tube
Lightning conductor
A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
grounding object by the authorities.
Grounding wire for telephone line
5) Do not damage, break, or stress the power cord. Do not put heavy
objects on the power cord. Do not bend or pull the cord forcefully. It
may cause a fire or electric shock.
6) Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
7) Do not put a receptacle with water in it or a metal piece which may
drop inside the machine.
8) Do not touch the power plug, insert a telephone jack, perform service or operate the machine with wet or oil hands. It may cause an
electric shock.
3) There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may

cause an electric shock . Be careful when servicing.
4) Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path.
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams.
5) When servicing the machine while operating, be careful not to
make contact with chains, belts, gear, and any other moving parts.
6) Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled.
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch inside
the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or an injury.
7) When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink excessively. Do not get them in the eyes.
If toner, developer, or ink enters you eyes, wash it away with water
immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary.
8) The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to damage fingers when servicing.
9) Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise, toner
may pop and burn you.
10) When replacing the lithium battery on the PWB, use only the specified battery. If a battery of different specification is used, it may not
be compatible and cause breakdown or malfunction of the
machine.
11) When carrying an electric unit or a PWB, use an anti-static (electricity) bag. Failure to do so may cause component failure or
machine malfunction.
3. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU

When repairing or replacing, be sure to observe the following items.
1) When repairing or replacing the LSU, be sure to disconnect the
power plug from the power outlet.
2) When repairing or replacing the LSU, follow the procedures
described in this Service Manual.
3) When checking the operations after repairing the LSU, keep all the
parts including the cover installed and perform the operation
check.
4) Do not modify the LSU.
5) When visually checking the inside of the machine for the operation
check, be careful not to allow laser beams to enter the eyes.
If the above precaution is neglected or an undesignated work is performed, safety may not be assured.
AR-5726/5731 NOTE FOR SERVICING - i
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE

1. Line of machines and options
Document cover
[MX-VR10]
Reversing single pass feeder

[MX-RP10]
Job separator tray

[MX-TR11]
Staple cartridge
[MX-SCX1]
Finisher
[MX-FN13]
Installation of the
MX-FN13 is required.
Copier/Printer (SPLC) model

[AR-5726/5731]
Exit tray unit

[MX-TE10]
Machine stand
(Large)
[MX-DS11]
Machine stand
(Small)
[MX-DS12]
Paper feed unit

(500 Sheets)
[MX-DE10]
FAX expantion kit
Expantion memory board
FAX memory (8MB)
[AR-FX7]
[AR-SM5](256MB)
[AR-SM6](512MB)
[AR-MM9]
AR-5726/5731 PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 - 1
Paper feed unit

(500x2 Sheets)
[MX-DE11]
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
(8) Engine speed (ppm)
1. Basic function
31-sheet
model
A3
15
17
B4/8.5 x 13
17
20
A4/B5/A5/8.5 x 11/
5.5 x 8.5/16K
26
31
A4R/8.5 x 11R/16KR
18
24
B5R
21
11 x 17
14
17
8.5 x 14
16
20
14
17
Paper size
Tray 1-4
A. Base engine
(1) Type
Type
26-sheet
model
Tray
Desktop
(2) Engine composition

Photoconductor kind
OPC drum (Drum dia. 30mm)
Copying method
Electronic photo (Laser)
Developing system
Dry, 2-component magnetic brush

development
Charging system
Sawtooth charging
Transfer system
Transfer roller system
Cleaning system
Contact blade system
Fusing system
Heat roller
Toner supply method
Toner supply by front cover open
Waste toner disposal
Toner cartridge collection
8K
Manual paper
feed
19
A3
8.5 x 13
17
20
B4
16
19
A4/B5/A5/8.5 x 11/
5.5 x 8.5/16K
23
27
A4R/8.5 x 11R
19
22
16KR
(3) Dimensions / Weight

External dimensions
(W x D x H)
OC model: 623 x 628 x 668mm

RSPF model: 623 x 628 x 788mm
Occupied
dimensions (W x D)
(when the manual
paper feed tray is
extended)
898 x 628mm
Weight
About 46kg
23
B5R
21
11 x 17
14
24
16
8.5 x 14
16
19
(9) Power source
(4) Warmup
Voltage/Current
220 - 240V 8A
Frequency
50/60Hz
Power source code
Inlet type
Power switch
1 power source
(10) Power consumption
Warm-up time
23 sec or less (26-sheet model)

25 sec or less (31-sheet model)
Pre-heat
Yes
Jam recovery time
About 10sec, excluding fusing warmup, toner

control, etc.
Conditions: Leaving for 60 sec after door open, standard conditions,

polygon stop.
Maximum rated
power consumption
1.45kw
Shift time to sleep

mode
Default (1 minute)
(11) Memory
Local Memory
(5) First copy time

Platen
26-sheet model
31-sheet model
4.8 sec
4.5 sec
RSPF
9.3 sec or less
Standard
32MB
Expansion
512MB x 2
Max.
1056MB
B. Controller board
(1) Controller board
SPLC board
Measuring conditions: When paper of A4 or 8.5 x 11 is fed from the
machine tray, with the polygon rotating.
Interface
Ethernet
No
USB 2.0 Device
(6) Engine resolution
Full Speed 1slot
600 x 600dpi
Memory
No
Smoothing (Print)
1200dpi (equivalent) x 600dpi
Memory expansion slot
---
Gradation
Writing: Binary
Writing resolution
C. Operation panel
(7) Printable range

Max. print size
Void area image loss
Type
AB series: 416 x 293mm
(600dpi: 9826dot x 6920dot)
Inch series: 428 x 275mm
(600dpi: 10110dot x 6496dot)
Front/Rear: Less than 4mm
Right/Left total: Less than 6mm at actual
(100%) size
Dot matrix LCD, touch panel
Size
Monochrome H-VGA 8.1
Display dot number
640 x 240 (H-VGA)
LCD drive display area
192 x 72mm
LCD backlight
Fluorescent lamp backlight system
LCD contrast adjustment
Yes
AR-5726/5731 SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 1
(3) Automatic document feeder
D. Scanner section
Type
(1) Resolution/Gradation
Reading
resolution
(dpi)
Transmission
resolusion
(dpi)
Copy mode
Platen
400 x 600dpi
RSPF
400 x 600dpi
Scan speed
When in single copy
When in duplex copy
Copy
31-sheet model:
27 sheets/min
(400 x 600dpi)
26-sheet model:
26 sheets/min
(400 x 600dpi)
31-sheet model:
13.6 side/min
(400 x 600dpi)
26-sheet model:
13.6 side/min
(400 x 600dpi)
Fax
40 sheets/min
(Normal text, A4R)
17 sheets/min
(Normal text, A4R)
Document set
direction
Face-up reference
Document standard
position
Center reference
Document transport
system
Sheet through system
Document size
AB series: A3 - A5
Inch series: 11 x 17 - 5.5 x 8.5
FAX transmission mode

Select mode
Normal
text
Fine
text
Super
fine
text
Ultra
fine
text
Input resolution:
OC
203.2
x
293.4
203.2
x
293.4
203.2
x
391.2
406.4
x
586.7
Input resolution:
RSPF
203.2
x
293.4
203.2
x
293.4
203.2
x
391.2
406.4
x
586.7
Transmission
resolution
203.2
x
97.8
203.2
x
195.6
203.2
x
391
406.4
x
391
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Half tone
RSPF
(Automatic duplex document feeder unit)
Reading
gradation
256 gradations
Document weight
Single face: 35 - 128g/m2, 9 - 34 lbs,

Duplex: 52 - 105g/m2, 13.9 - 28 lbs
Exposure
lamp
Electrodeless xenon lamp
100 sheets (90g/m2)

Paper thickness of 13mm or less can be set.
Output
gradation
Binary
Max. loading
capacity of
documents
Transport disable
document
OHP, perforated documents, photo,

catalogue, second original sheet, tracing
paper, carbon paper, heat-sensitive paper,
wrinkled paper, folded or broken paper,
pasted or cut-away paper, documents of
many perforated holes (2-hole, 3-hole
documents can be used), document printed
by an ink ribbon
Detection
Yes
Detection size
Inch
series
Automatic setting
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4
Manual setting
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 (216 x
330), 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R,
5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4, A4R
AB
series
Automatic setting
11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5
Manual setting
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 (216 x
330), 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, A3, B4,
A4, A4R, A5
(2) Document table

Type
Document table fixed type (Flat bed)
Scanning area
297 x 431.8mm
Original standard
position
Left bottom reference
Detection
Yes
Detection size
Inch
series
Automatic setting
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
Manual setting
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 (216 x
330), 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R,
5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4, A4R
AB
series
Automatic setting
A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5
Manual setting
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 (216 x
330), 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, A3, B4,
A4, A4R, A5
Multi copy
S-S, S-D, D-D, D-S
Mixed paper feed
Enable (Same width only)
E. Paper feed section

Type
Paper feed tray + Multi manual paper feed (Expanded up to 4 trays by installing options.)
Paper feed method
Paper is fed from the above by the front loading system.
Details of paper feed section

Paper capacity
Standard paper
(80g/m2)
Paper size
Tray1
Tray2
500 sheets
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R,

A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14,
8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5x11R,
5.5 x 8.5, 8K, 16K, 16KR
Paper size detection
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5R,

11 x 17, 8.5 x 14 (216 x 356),
8.5 x 13 (216 x 330),
8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 8K, 16KR
No
Manual paper feed tray

100 sheets
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, A5,
B6R, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14 (216 x 356),
8.5 x 13 (216 x 330), 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5,
8K, 16K, 16KR, A6R, Envelope*1
Yes
Allowable paper type and weight for paper

feed
56 - 105g/m2/15 - 28lbs Bond
Multi paper feed:

Standard paper (56 - 128g/m2)
Special paper, heavy paper (max.
200g/m2)
Single paper feed:
Standard paper, special paper,
second original, heavy paper (max.
200g/m2), 56- 200g/m2 (14 - 54lbs)
Paper type
Standard paper (56 - 80g/m2)

Normal paper (60 - 105g/m2)
Letterhead
Color paper
Standard paper: 100 sheets

(56 - 80g/m2)
Recycled paper/coarse paper:
100 sheets
Heavy paper (max. 200g/m2):
30 sheets
OHP/Label sheet/gift wrapping
paper: 40 sheets
Label sheet: 40 sheets
Envelope (AB series: 10 sheets,
Inch series: 5 sheets)
Paper size setting when

shipping
Paper remaining detection
Inch series
8.5 x 11
---
AB series
A4
---
No (paper presence only)
1: Supported envelope kinds: Commercial10 (4 - 1/8 x 9 - 1/2), International DL (110mm x 220mm), International C5 (162mm x 229mm)
F. Paper exit section
H. Printer function
(1) Center tray of main unit
(1) Platform
Paper exit position/

system
Main unit top surface face-down paper

exit
Paper exit capacity
500 sheets (A4, 8.5 x 11, 80g/m2 paper)
Paper exit paper size/

kind
All kinds of paper which can be fed
Shifter function
Yes
Paper remaining
detection for paper exit
Yes
IBM PC/AT
Macintosh
(2) Support OS
OS
Windows
XP
Server 2003
No
Server 2003 x64
(1) Copy magnification ratio
Zoom
Yes
XP x64
G. Copy functions
Copy
magnification
ratio
SPLC
2000
Vista
AB
series
25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%,

115%, 122%, 141%, 200%, 400%
Inch
series
25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%, 121%,

129%, 200%, 400%
25 - 400%
(Restriction by the document feeder unit: 50 - 200%)
Yes
Vista x64
Server 2008
Server 2008 x64
Mac
9.0 - 9.2.2
No
X 10.2.8
X 10.3.9
(2) Density/copy image quality process

Exposure mode
Binary: Automatic, Text, Text/Photo, Photo
Number of manual
steps
5 steps
X 10.4.11
X 10.5 - 10.5.6
I. Environmental conditions
(3) Duplex
(Humidity)
System
Switchback system
Paper size
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11 x 17,

8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R
Type and weight of

paper which can be
passed
56 - 105g/m2/15 - 21.3 lbs Bond

Duplex print from manual paper feed can be
made. (Except for heavy paper, OHP sheet,
and other special paper)
85%
60%
20%
When duplex printing is continued in a certain level of temperature,
the printing speed may be reduced in order to prevent an abnormal

temperature rise in the machine.
10 C
30 C
35 C
(Temperature)
(4) Copy functions

Automatic paper selection
Standard environmental
conditions
Automatic magnification ratio selection
Usage environmental
conditions
Vertical/horizontal independent magnification ratio

Paper type selection
Auto tray switching
Rotation copy
Electronic sort
Job reservation (only during warm-up)
Program call-out/registration (10 items)
Preheat function
Auto power shut off function
User management (100 items)
Mixed documents feed (MIX only)
Binding margin (Left/Right/Upper)
Edge erase/Center erase (Center/Edge/Center + Edge)
1 set 2 copy
Cover paper/Insert paper (Cover/Back cover only)
Multi shot (2 in 1/4 in 1) (Centering available)
Card shot (Centering available)
Pamphlet mode (Centering available)
Duplex copy direction switching
Large volume document mode
Black/white reverse (except for UK)
Stream feeding mode (ON/OFF switch by the system setting)
Temperature
Humidity
Temperature
Humidity
Atmospheric
pressure
20 - 25C
65 5%RH
10 - 35C
20 - 85%RH
590 - 1013 hPa
(height: 0 - 2000m)
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS

1. Supply system table
A. East Europe/Russia
No.
Item
Content
1 Toner cartridge
Toner cartridge (With IC chip)
(black)
(Toner; Net 700g)
2 Developer (black) Developer
(Developer; Net 300g)
3 Drum
Drum
1
1
1
Life
33K
26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
Model name
Remarks
MX-312GT Life setting by A4 (8.5"11") 6% document
Default: Toner save mode
MX-312GV
MX-312GR
B. Asia Subsidiaries
No.
Item
Content
1 Toner cartridge
(black)
(Toner; Net 700g)
3 Drum
Drum
1
1
1
Life
33K
26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
Model name
Remarks
MX-312AT Life setting by A4 (8.5"11") 6% document
MX-312AV
MX-312AR
C. SMEF/Agent
No.
Item
Content
1 Toner cartridge
(black)
(Toner; Net 700g)
3 Drum
Drum
1
1
1
Life
33K
26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
Model name
Remarks
MX-312FT Life setting by A4 (8.5"11") 6% document
MX-312FV
MX-312FR
AR-5726/5731 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 1
2. Maintenance parts list

A. East Europe/Russia/SMEF
No.
1
Item
Content
Life
Upper heat roller kit Upper heat roller

Fuser gear
Upper heat roller bearing
Upper cleaning pad
Fusing separation pawl (upper)
Thermistor cleaning pad
Lower heat roller kit Lower heat roller
Fusing separation pawl (lower)
Fuser bearing (lower)
150K PM kit
Drum separation pawl unit
Transfer roller unit
DV blade
DV side sheet F
DV side sheet R
Toner filter unit
MC unit
MC unit
Cleaner blade
Cleaner blade
Drum frame unit
Drum frame unit
7
8

Staple cartridge

Staple cartridge
150K
1
1
2
1
4
2
1
300K
4
2
2
150K
1
1
1
1
1
10 26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
10 26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
1 26cpm: 225K
31cpm: 300K
1
3
Model
name
AR-310UH
Remarks
MX-311LH
MX-311KA
(10) MX-311MC
(10)
(10) MX-311CB
(10)
MX-311DU The life of the toner reception seat attached to
the drum frame is 300K, and it can be used up
to 3 times. (Supplied as a drum frame unit.)
150K
MX-311TX
5000 staples 3
MX-SCX1
The other maintenance parts than the above are supplied as service parts.
B. Asia Subsidiaries/Agent
No.
Item
Content
Life
Model
name
Remarks
Upper heat roller kit Upper heat roller

Fuser gear
Upper cleaning pad
1
1
2
1
4
2
150K
AR-310UH
Lower heat roller kit Lower heat roller

Fuser bearing (lower)
1
4
2
300K
MX-311LH
150K PM kit
Drum separation pawl unit

DV blade
DV side sheet F
DV side sheet R
Toner filter unit
2
1
1
1
1
1
150K
MX-311KA
MC unit
MC unit
10 26cpm: 75K (10) MX-311MC

31cpm: 100K (10)
Cleaner blade
Cleaner blade
10 26cpm: 75K (10) MX-311CB

31cpm: 100K (10)
Drum frame unit
Drum frame unit
1 26cpm: 225K
31cpm: 300K
MX-311DU The life of the toner reception seat attached to

the drum frame is 300K, and it can be used up
to 3 times. (Supplied as a drum frame unit.)
Staple cartridge
Staple cartridge
MX-SCX1
5000 staples 3
The other maintenance parts than the above are supplied as service parts.
3. Developer/Drum life end definition

When the developer/drum counter reaches the specified level.
When the developer/drum rpm reaches the specified level.
When either of the above reached the specified level, it is judged as life end.
In an actual case, when correction or warm-up operation is performed as well as output operation, the developer and the drum rotates.
Therefore, the developer/drum consuming level cannot be determined only by the copy/print quantity. When, therefore, the rpm reaches the specified
level, it is judged as life end.
To check the drum and developer life, use SIM22-1.
Number of rotations
(Rotations)
Developer/drum counter
Developer/drum
26cpm model
31cpm model
75K
100K
550K
4. Production number identification

<Toner cartridge>
<Drum>
The label on the toner cartridge shows the date of production.
The laser print indicates the model conformity code and the date (year,
month, day) of production.
Label position
Internal product name

Incompatibility
Destination
Version No.
Production year/month/day (6 digits)
Serial No. in production day (5 digits)
Production place (1 digits)
Alphabet
Indicates the model conformity code. L for this model.
Number
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the month of packing.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
4, 5 Number
Indicates the day of the month of packing.
<Developer>
5. Environment conditions
(Humidity)
85%
60%
8
20%
The lot number is of 8 digits. Each digit indicates the content as follows.
The number is printed on the right under side of the back surface of the
developer bag.
1
Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
Number
Indicates the production year.
3, 4 Number
Indicates the production month.
5, 6 Number
Indicates the production day.
7
Hyphen
Number
Indicates the production lot.
10 C
30 C
35 C
(Temperature)
Standard environmental
conditions
Usage environmental
conditions
Storage period
Temperature
20 - 25C
Humidity
65 5%RH
Temperature
10 - 35C
Humidity
20 - 85%RH
Atmospheric
590 - 1013 hPa
pressure
(height: 0 - 2000m)
Toner/Developer: 24 months from the
manufactured month (Production lot)
under unsealed state
Drum: 36 months from the manufactured
month under unsealed state
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE

1. External view
1
7
16
4
5
12
11
9
17
13
10
14
19
18
20
21
15
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Name
Document feeder tray
Original guides
Document feeder cover
Reversing tray
Exit area
Document transport cover
Document transport cover knob
Document glass
Power switch
Handles
Operation panel
Job separator tray (Upper tray) (optional)
Center tray
Front cover
Paper trays
Upper right side cover
17
18
19
20
21
Side cover
Side cover handle
Bypass tray paper guides
Bypass tray
Bypass tray extension
Function/Operation
Place the original(s) that you wish to scan face up here.
Adjust to the size of the originals.
Open to remove misfed originals.
Pull out to remove misfed originals.
Originals exit the machine here after copying.
Open to remove misfed originals.
Pull to open the document transport cover.
Place an original that you wish to scan face down here.
Press to turn the machine power on and off.
Use to move the machine.
Contains operation keys and the touch panel.
Print jobs and received faxes are delivered to this tray.
Finished copies are delivered to the center tray.
Open to remove paper misfeeds and perform machine maintenance.
Each tray holds 500 sheets of copy paper.
Open to remove misfeeds when an optional job separator tray kit or a optional finisher is
installed.
Open to remove misfeeds.
Pull to open the side cover.
Adjust to the width of the paper.
Regular paper and special paper (such as transparency film) can be fed from the bypass tray.
Pull out the bypass tray extension before placing paper in the bypass tray.
AR-5726/5731 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 - 1
2. Internal structure
4
5
No.
1
2
3
4
Name
Toner cartridge lock release lever
Toner cartridge
Roller rotating knob
Photoconductive drum
Function/Operation
Use to unlock the toner cartridge.
Contains toner.
Turn to remove misfed paper.
Copy images are formed on the photoconductive drum.
Fusing unit release levers
To remove a paper misfeed in the fusing unit, push up on these

levers and remove the paper.
Fusing unit paper guide
Open to remove misfed paper.
Note
Do not touch the photoconductive

drum (green portion). Doing so
may damage the drum and cause
smudges on copies.
The fusing unit is hot.
Do not touch the fusing unit when
removing misfed paper.
Doing so may cause a burn or
injury.
3. Operation panel
COPY
ON LINE
DATA
PRINT
LINE
DATA
FAX
JOB STATUS
SYSTEM SETTINGS
LOGOUT
No.
1
Name
Touch panel
Mode select keys and indicators

[COPY] key
[PRINT] key/ONLINE indicator/
DATA indicator
[FAX] key/LINE indicator/

DATA indicator
3
4
[JOB STATUS] key

[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key
5
6
Numeric keys
[LOGOUT] key (
[#/P] key (
8
9
10
[CLEAR] key ( )
[CLEAR ALL] key (
[START] key ( )
11
[INTERRUPT] key (
Function/Operation
The machine status, messages and touch keys are displayed on the panel.
The display will show the status of printing, copying or network scanning
according to the mode that is selected. For details see the next page.
Use to change modes and the corresponding display on the touch panel.
Press to select copy mode.
[PRINT] key: Press to select print mode.
ONLINE indicator: Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
DATA indicator: A print job is in memory. The indicator lights steadily while
the job is held in memory, and blinks while the job is printed.
[FAX] key: Press to select fax mode when the fax option is installed.
LINE indicator : This lights up while faxes are being sent or received.
DATA indicator: Blinks when a fax has been received to memory and lights
steadily when a fax is waiting in memory for transmission.
Press to display the current job status.
Use to adjust various settings of the machine including the contrast of the touch
panel and administrator settings.
Use to enter numeric values for various settings.
When auditing mode is enabled, press this key after finishing a job to return the
machine to account number entry standby.
Use this key to execute a job program in copy mode.
The key is also used to dial in fax mode.
Press to clear a copy number setting or cancel a job.
Resets the settings to the initial settings.
Press in copy mode, scanner mode, or fax mode to begin copying, network
scanning, or faxing.
This key blinks when auto power shut mode has activated. Press the key to
return to normal operation.
Use to perform an interrupt copy job.
10
11
Note
When the fax option is

installed.
4. RSPF
A. External view
1
2
3
5
4
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Name
Document set tray
Document guide
Document feed section cover
Document transport section cover
Document exit section
B. Internal structure
11
10
9
8
7
3
5
6
14
12
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Code
EMPS
FGOD
DFCL
DFD
RSOL
CLH
DTM
GSOL
DLS1
DLS2
OPCLS
RDD
SWD
Name
Document set sensor
Open/close sensor
Paper feed clutch
Paper entry sensor
Pressure release solenoid
Transport clutch
SPF motor
Gate solenoid
Interface PWB
Document length detection SW (Short)
Document length detection SW (Long)
Book sensor
Paper exit sensor
Document width sensor
13
1
Type
Photo transmission
Photo transmission
Photo transmission
Stepping motor
Photo transmission
Photo transmission
Photo transmission
Photo transmission
Volume
Function/Operation
Detects presence of documents.
Detects open/close of the paper feed unit.
Drives document feed on the tray, transport, and paper exit roller.
Detects the document length on the tray.

Detects the document length on the tray.
Detects the SPF float.
Detects the document width on the tray.
5. Sensor
No.
18
19
2
3
25
20
5
21
22
6
7
23
24
25
Name
2nd tray paper upper
limit detection sensor
2nd tray paper empty
sensor
1st tray paper pass
sensor
1st tray paper upper
limit detection sensor
1st tray paper empty
sensor
Toner sensor
Center tray paper
YES/NO sensor
Document size sensor
9
26
10
11
12
13
24
23
22
21
Reverse pass paper

detection sensor
Code
LUD2
Function and operation

2nd tray paper upper limit
detection
PED2 2nd tray paper empty
detection
PPD1H 1st tray paper pass
LUD1
1st tray paper upper limit

detection
PED1 1st tray paper empty
detection
Toner density detection
LOEMP Center tray paper YES/NO
detection
DSIN0 Document size detection
(Inch series: PD1, 2)
(AB series: PD1 3)
DUP2 Reverse pass detection
6. Switch
20
19
18
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Name
Mirror home position
sensor
Document cover
sensor
Document size
sensor
2nd paper exit sensor
(Option)
2nd paper exit full
detection sensor
(Option)
1st paper exit sensor
Shifter home position
sensor (Except North
America)
Paper exit sensor
(DUP side)
Thermistor
1st tray (paper tray)
detection
Manual feed paper
entry sensor
Manual paper feed

tray empty sensor 2
Manual paper feed
tray empty sensor 1
Manual feed length
detection sensor 1
Manual feed length
detection sensor 2
Manual feed paper
empty sensor
2nd tray paper pass
sensor
17
26 16
Code
MHPS
OCSW
DSIN3
POD2
TOPF
15 14

Mirror (scanner) home
position detection
Document cover open/close
detection
Document size detection
(Inch series: PD3, 4)
(AB series: PD4, 5)
2nd paper exit detection
2nd paper exit section full

detection
POD1 1st paper exit detection

SFTHP Shifter home position sensor
detection
PPD2
CD1
PPD1L
MPLS2
MPLS1
MPLD1
MPLD2
MPED
PFD2
Paper exit detection

Fusing temperature
detection
1st tray (paper tray) empty
detection
Sensor of paper entry from
the manual paper feed tray,
the 2nd/multi-tray desk, or
the DUP
Manual feed tray position
detection
Manual feed tray position
detection
Manual feed paper length
detection
detection
Manual feed paper empty
detection
2nd tray paper pass
3
No.
1
2
Name
Right cabinet door
switch (Option)
Door switch
2nd right door switch
Main switch
Code
DSWR0 Right cabinet door open/
close detection
DSWR1 Front door and side door
open/close detection
DSWR2 Side door open/close
detection
PSSW Main power switch
7. Solenoid/Clutch
8. Drive motor
1
2
1
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
9
9
8
7
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Name
Paper exit gate
switching solenoid
(Option)
PS clutch
Paper feed clutch
Manual paper feed
solenoid
Paper feed transfer
clutch
2nd tray paper feed
clutch
2nd tray paper feed
solenoid
Paper feed solenoid
Separation pawl
solenoid
Code
OGS

Paper exit gate switcher
RRC
CPFS1
MPFS
Main unit paper feed

Paper feed roller drive
Manual paper feed
solenoid
Paper feed transfer clutch
TRC2
CPFS2
CPFC2
CPFC1
PSPS
Solenoid for the paper feed

from the tray
Solenoid for the paper feed
from the tray
Separation pawl operation
solenoid
8
No.
1
2
Name
Mirror motor
Shifter motor
(Except North
America)
Duplex motor
DUP-2 motor
6
7
8
9
Main motor
Tray lift-up motor
Tray lift-up motor
Toner motor
Code
MIRM
SFTM

Optical mirror base drive
Shifter drive
DPXM
Duplex paper switching

and exit motor
Reverse pass for paper
transport
Main drive
Tray paper lift-up
Tray paper lift-up
Toner supply
MM
LUM1
LUM2
TM
9. Lamp
10. Fan/Filter
1
6
7
2
3
1
5
6
1
4
No.
1
2
Name
Copy lamp
Heater lamp

Image radiation lamp
Fusing heat lamp
No.
1
2
3
4
Name
Cooling fan
Exhaust fan motor
Intake fan motor
Fusing paper exit fan
Code
VFM
DCFM
DCFM2
VFM2
5
6
7
Fusing paper exit fan

Ozon filter
Ozon filter
VFM2

Cools the inside of the unit.
(31 sheet model)
11. PWB
12. Roller
1
1
3
12
11
5
6
7
8
10
5
9
10
11
12
14 13
9
7
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Name
Inverter PWB
CCD PWB
Option connector PWB
IMC PWB
MCU PWB
Mother board
Tray interface PWB
DC power supply PWB
High voltage PWB
KEY PWB
OPU PWB
SPLC PWB

Copy lamp control
For image scanning (read)
Image process
Main unit control
Connection with FAX PWB
2nd tray control
DC voltage control
High voltage control
Operation panel control
Output image signal
No.
1
2
3
Name
Paper exit roller
Transport roller
Upper heat roller
Lower heat roller
5
6
7
DUP transport follower

roller
DUP transport roller
Transport roller
Resist roller
Manual paper feed roller
10
11
12
Manual feed transport

roller
1st tray pick-up roller
1st tray paper feed roller
13
14
2nd tray pick-up roller

2nd tray paper feed roller

Paper exit roller
Paper transport roller
Fuses toner on paper.
(with the Teflon roller)
Fuses toner on paper.
(with the silicone rubber roller)
Duplex paper transport
Duplex paper transport
Transfer images on the drum onto
paper.
Synchronize the paper lead edge
with the image lead edge.
Picks up papers in manual paper
feed port.
Transports paper from the manual
paper feed port.
Picks up paper from the tray.
Transports the picked up paper to
RESIST section.
Picks up paper from the tray.
Transports the picked up paper to
RESIST section.
[5] ADJUSTMENTS
1. Adjustment item list
A
Section
Process section
Mechanism section
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
Image density
(exposure) adjustment
(15)
(1)
Adjustment item
Developing doctor gap adjustment
MG roller main pole position adjustment
Developing bias voltage adjustment
Grid bias voltage adjustment
Print start position adjustment
RSPF image lead edge position adjustment
Rear edge void adjustment
Paper off center adjustment
Left edge void area adjustment
Main scanning direction (FR direction) distortion
balance adjustment
Sub scanning direction (scanning direction)
distortion adjustment
Main scanning direction (FR direction) distortion
balance adjustment
Main scanning direction (FR direction)
magnification ratio adjustment
Sub scanning direction (scanning direction)
Adjustment procedure/SIM No.

Developing doctor gap adjustment
MG roller main pole position adjustment
SIM8-1
SIM8-2
SIM50-5
SIM50-6
SIM50-1
SIM50-10
SIM50-1-8
No. 2/3 mirror base unit installing position
adjustment
Copy lamp unit installing position adjustment
Winding pulley position adjustment
Rail height adjustment
SIM48-1-1
a
b
Off center adjustment (RSPF mode)

OC (RSPF) open/close detection position
adjustment
Original sensor adjustment
RSPF white correction pixel position adjustment
(required in an RSPF model when replacing the
lens unit)
RSPF scan position auto adjustment
Copy mode
OC mode in copying (SIM 48-1-2)

RSPF sub scanning direction magnification ratio
(SIM48-1-3, 48-1-4)
SIM50-12
SIM41-3
SIM41-2, 41-4 (41-1)
SIM63-7
SIM53-8
SIM46-2
2. Details of adjustment
A. Process section
2) Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw A.
(1) Developing doctor gap adjustment
3) Insert a thickness gauge of 1.5mm to the positions of three screws

on the developing docter as shown.
1) Remove the doctor cover.
R
A
C
A
F
A
4) Tighten the developing doctor fixing screw.
5) Check the clearance of the developing doctor. If it is within the
specified range, then fix the doctor fixing screw with screw lock.
When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the
developing doctor and the MG roller.

<Adjustment specification>
Developing doctor gap
+0.1mm
F/C/R: 1.5 -0.15mm
AR-5726/5731 ADJUSTMENTS 5 - 1
(2) MG roller main pole position adjustment
(4) Grid bias voltage adjustment (SIM 8-2)
1) Put the developing unit on a flat surface.
1) Execute SIM 8-2.
2) Tie a needle or pin on a string.

3) Hold the string and bring the needle close to the MG roller horizontally. (Do not use paper clip, which is too heavy to make a correct
adjustment.) (Put the developing unit horizontally for this adjustment.)
SIMULATION 8-2
4) Do not bring the needle into contact with the MG roller, but bring it
to a position 2 or 3mm apart from the MG roller. Mark the point on
the MG roller which is on the extension line from the needle tip.
5) Measure the distance from the marking position to the top of the
doctor plate of the developing unit to insure that it is 9.1mm.
If the distance is not within the specified range, loosen the fixing
screw A of the main pole adjustment plate, and move the adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust.
2) Touch the exposure mode to be changed.

The current set value is displayed.
3) Enter the set value with the 10-key.
4) Press the [START] key.
Output is made with the entered value for 30sec, and the display
returns to the original state.
Item
Content
A
9.1mm
SIMULATION 8-1
8-1
SIMULATION
DV BIAS COPY SETTING. INPUT VALUE 200-550, AND PRESS
START.
1: AE
426
426
2: TEXT
450
1/1
3: TEXT/PHOTO
450
4: PHOTO
450
5: SUPER/PHOTO
400
6: TONER SAVE
376
2) Touch the exposure mode to be changed.

AE (145mm/s)
590
TEXT (145)
Character
(145mm/s)
590
TEXT/PHOTO
(145)
Character/Photo
(145mm/s)
590
PHOTO (145)
Photo (145mm/s)
590
TONER SAVE
(145)
Toner save
(145mm/s)
AE (122)
AE (122mm/s)
TEXT (122)
Character
(122mm/s)
590
TEXT/PHOTO
(122)
Character/Photo
(122mm/s)
590
PHOTO (122)
Photo (122mm/s)
590
10
TONER SAVE
(122)
Toner save
(122mm/s)
540
(1) Print start position adjustment
Output is made with the entered value, and the display returns to
the original state.
TEXT (145)
TEXT/PHOTO
(145)
PHOTO (145)
TONER SAVE
(145)
AE (122)
TEXT (122)
3
4
5
8
9
10
TEXT/PHOTO
(122)
PHOTO (122)
TONER SAVE
(122)
1) Execute SIM 50-5.

SIMULATION 50-5
AE (145)
590
B. Mechanism section
540
350750
Min. unit: 10V increment
3) Enter the set value with the 10-key.
Item
Default
AE (145)
(3) Developing bias voltage adjustment (SIM 8-1)

1) Execute SIM 8-1.
Setting
range
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(PRINT). INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS
Content
AE (145mm/s)
Character
(145mm/s)
Character/Photo
(145mm/s)
Photo (145mm/s)
Toner save
(145mm/s)
AE (122mm/s)
Character
(122mm/s)
Character/Photo
(122mm/s)
Photo (122mm/s)
Toner save
(122mm/s)
Setting
range
Default
450
450
START.
1: TRAY1
53
53
2: OPTION
53
1/1
3: MANUAL
53
4: DUPLEX
53
450
450
200650
400
450
2) Touch the item to be adjusted.

The item and the currently set value are highlighted.
3) Press the [P] key.
The display is shifted to the copy menu.
450
4) Select the paper feed tray, the print density, and the duplex mode.
Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key.
450

Copying is started.
450
400

1
2
3
4
Item
TRAY1
OPTION
MANUAL
DUPLEX
Content
Setting range
0-99
1st tray
Option tray
Manual feed
Back print
Default
(2) RSPF image lead edge position adjustment

1) Set a scale on the OC table as shown below.
53
1-99
6) Measure the distance H between the paper lead edge and the
image print start position. Set the image print start position set
value again.
1 step of the set value corresponds to about 0.127mm shift.
Calculate the set value from the formula below.
99 H/0.127 (mm) = Image print start position set value
<H: Print start position measurement value (mm)>
Note: Since the printed copy is used as a test chart, put the scale in
paralleled with the edge lines.
2) Make a copy, then use the copy output as an original to make an
RSPF copy again.
0mm
0mm
3) Check the copy output. If necessary, perform the following adjustment procedures.

10
5) Set the RSPF lead edge position set value so that the same image
is obtained as that obtained in the previous OC image lead edge
position adjustment.
Fit the print edge with the paper edge, and perform the lead
edge adjustment.
Example:99 5/0.127 = 99 39.4 = about 59
Note: FIf the set value is not obtained from the above formula, perform the fine adjustment.
7) Execute SIM 50-1-2 to adjust the main tray lead edge void.
1 step of the set value corresponds to about 0.127mm shift.
Calculate the set value from the formula below.
Adjustment
mode
RSPF
image lead
edge
position
SIM
Set value
Spec value
50-6
1 step:
0.127mm
shift
Lead edge void:

1 4mm
Image loss: 3mm or less
Setting
range
1 99
(3) Rear edge void adjustment

1) Set a scale as shown in the figure below.
A4 (8.5" x 11")
B/0.127 (mm) = Lead edge void adjustment value

<B: Lead edge void (mm)>
2.5mm
5
2.5mm
10
Paper rear edge
2) Set the document size to A4 (8.5" x 11"), and make a copy at

100%.
Example: When setting the lead edge void to 2.5mm:

2.5 /0.127 = about 20
3) If an adjustment is required, follow the procedures below.
Adjustment
mode
Main tray lead
edge void
Print start
position
SIM
50-1
-2
50-5
Void amount (Standard value: 4mm or less)
Set value
B/0.127
99 H/0.127
Spec value
Setting
range
Lead edge void:

1 4mm
Image loss: 3mm
or less
1 99
[H: Print start position measurement value (mm),

B: Lead edge void (mm)]
Scale image
Paper rear edge
4) Execute SIM 50-1 and set the density mode to DEN-B. The currently set adjustment value is displayed.
5) Enter the set value and press the start key.
The correction value is stored and a copy is made.
Adjustment
mode
Rear edge
void
SIM
50-1-6
Set value
1 step: 0.127mm
shift
Spec
value
4mm or
less
Setting
range
1 99
(4) Paper off center adjustment
(5) Left edge void area adjustment
1) Set a test chart (UKOG-0089CSZZ) on the document table.

2) Select a paper feed port and make a copy.
Note: Before performing this adjustment, be sure to check that the

paper off center adjustment (SIM 50-10) is completed.

SIMULATION 50-1
SIMULATION 50-10
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 1-99, AND PRESS START.
PRINT OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 1-99, AND

PRESS START.
1: BYPASS
50
50
2: TRAY1
50
1/1
3: TRAY2
50
4: TRAY3
50
5: TRAY4
50
6: DUPLEX
50
Second
print surface
off-center
Set value
50-10
-2
Add 1: 0.127mm
shift to R side.
50-10
-6
Reduce 1:
0.127mm shift to L
side.
5: DEN-A -DUPLEX
18
6: DEN-B
7: DEN-B-DUP
50
8: SIDE VOID
18
9: SIDE VOID-DUP
18
10: LOSS(OC)
43
1/1
4) Place a chart with a clear lead edge (or a ruler) on the OC document table.
5) Use SIM 50-1 (Item 1) to execute test print. Check the print out and
adjust so that the lead edge image is printed. (1 99: About
0.127mm/Step)
Setting range
Default
6) Reset the adjustment values of SIM 50-5 (Items 1, 2, 3, 4) to the

original values, and execute test print. Check the print out and
adjust so that the lead edge image is printed on the lead edge of
paper. (1 99: About 0.127mm/Step).
1-99
50
7) Adjust SIM 50-1 (Items 2, 3, 4, 5) so that the lead edge void on the
print out is the specified value. (1 99: About 0.127mm/Step)
8) Similar to procedure 7, adjust SIM 50-1 (Item 6, 7) so that the rear
edge void is the specified value. (1 99: About 0.127mm/Step)
SIM
18
3) Set SIM 50-1 (Items 2, 3, 4, 5) to 1. (By setting to 1, there is no

void.)

Copying is started.
Adjustment
mode
Paper off
center
18
4: DEN-A -OPTION
2) Note down the adjustment value of SIM 50-5 (Items 1, 2, 3, 4), and
change the value to 99.
6) Select the paper feed tray and the print density.

Content
Manual paper feed
1st tray
2nd tray
3rd tray
4th tray
Back print
2: DEN-A
18
OK

Item
BYPASS
TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
DUPLEX
43
3: DEN-A -MANUAL
OK
4) Touch the item to be adjusted.

1
2
3
4
5
6
1: RRC-A
Spec value
Single:
Center
2.0mm
Duplex:
Center
2.5mm
Setting
range
1 99
9) Similar to procedure 7, adjust SIM 50-1 (Item 8, 9) so that the left

edge void is the specified value. (1 99: About 0.127mm/Step)
10) Make an enlargement copy (400%), and check that there is no
shade of the cabinet printed at the lead edge.
11) If there is a shade printed at the lead edge in procedure 9, adjust
SIM 50-1 (Item 10). (1 5: About 0.677mm)
* If there is no problem, set to 3.
Item
Content
RRC-A
DEN-A
DEN-A-MANUAL
DEN-A-OPTION
DEN-A-DUPLEX
6
7
DEN-B
DEN-B-DUP
SIDE VOID
SIDE VOID-DUP
10 LOSS(OC)
Original scan start position

adjustment
Lead edge position
adjustment value (OC)
Lead edge cancel
adjustment (Main tray)
Lead edge cancel
adjustment
(Manual feed tray)
Lead edge cancel
adjustment (Option tray)
Lead edge cancel
adjustment
(back of the machine)
(Duplex)
Left edge void adjustment
(First print surface)
(Duplex)
Image loss amount
adjustment (Lead edge
image loss set value) (OC)
Setting
Default
range
1-99
43
1-99
18
1-99
18
1-99
18
1-99
18
1-99
1-99
30
50
1-99
18
1-99
18
1-5
Adjustment
mode
Left edge void
SIM
50-1
-8
Set value
1 step: 0.127mm
shift
Spec
value
0.5 4mm
Setting
range
1 99
(6) Main scanning direction (FR direction) distortion

balance adjustment
1) Remove the OC glass, the right cabinet and the upper right side
cover.
5) Without moving the scanner drive pulley shaft, manually turn the
scanner drive pulley until the positioning plate is brought into contact with No. 2/3 mirror base unit, then fix the scanner drive pulley.
1
3
1
1
2
6
4
6) Put No. 2/3 mirror base unit on the positioning plate again, push
the projections on the front frame side and the rear frame side of
the copy lamp unit to the corner frame, and tighten the wire fixing
screw.
4
2) Loosen the copy lamp unit wire fixing screw.
Wire fixing screw

3) Manually turn the mirror base drive pulley and bring No. 2/3 mirror
base unit into contact with the positioning plate.
At that time, if the front frame side and the rear frame side of No. 2/
3 mirror base unit are brought into contact with the positioning
plate at the same time, the mirror base unit parallelism is proper.
If one of them is in contact with the positioning plate, perform the
adjustment of 4).
(7) Sub scanning direction (scanning direction) distortion

adjustment (Winding pulley position adjustment)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
When the mirror base drive wire is replaced.
When the lamp unit, or No. 2/3 mirror holder is replaced.
When a copy as shown is made.
Lb
La
Paper exit
direction
Original
4) Loosen the set screw of the scanner drive pulley which is not in
contact with No. 2/3 mirror base unit positioning plate.
Copy
1) Set A3 (11" x 17") white paper on the original table as shown

below.
La = Lb
6) Execute the main scanning direction (FR) distortion balance
adjustment previously described in 2) again.
(8) Main scanning direction (FR direction) distortion

balance adjustment (Rail height adjustment)
When there is no skew copy in the mirror base scanning direction and
there is no horizontal error (right angle to the scanning direction), the
adjustment can be made by adjusting the No. 2/3 mirror base unit rail
height.
Place a little clearance from

the rear side original guide.
Before performing this adjustment, be sure to perform the horizontal

image distortion adjustment in the laser scanner section.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
When the mirror base wire is replaced.
When the copy lamp unit and no. 2/3 mirror unit are replaced.
When the mirror unit rail is replaced and moved.
When a following copy is made.
Glass holding plate
A3 (11" x 17") white paper
Original
Copy A
Copy B
Fit the paper edge and

the glass holding plate edge.
2) Open the original cover and make a normal (100%) copy.

3) Measure the width of the black background at the lead edge and at
the rear edge.
1) Make an original for the adjustment.

Make test sheet by drawing parallel lines at 10mm from the both
ends of A3 (11" x 17") white paper as shown below. (These lines
must be correctly parallel to each other.)
Parallel line
Parallel line
10mm
10mm
10mm
10mm
Paper exit direction

La: Lead edge black background width
Lb: Rear edge black background width
White paper
If the width (La) of the black background at the lead edge is equal
that (Lb) at the rear edge, there is no need to execute the following
procedures of 4) 7).
4) Loosen the mirror base drive pulley fixing screw on the front frame
side or on the rear frame side.
When La < Lb
Turn the mirror base drive pulley on the front frame side in the
arrow direction A. (Do not move the mirror base drive pulley shaft.)
2) Make a normal (100%) copy of the test sheet on A3 (11" x 17")

paper. (Fit the paper edge and the glass holding plate edge.)
3) Measure the distances (La, Lb, Lc, Ld) at the four corners as
shown below.
La
Lc
When La > Lb
Turn the mirror base drive pulley on the rear frame side in the
arrow direction A. (Do not move the mirror base drive pulley shaft.)
Paper exit
direction
Rear side
A
Lb
Ld
When La = Lb and Lc = Ld, no need to perform the procedures 4)

and 5).
Front side
5) Tighten the fixing screw of the mirror base drive pulley.
4) Move the mirror base B rail position up and down (in the arrow
direction) to adjust.
Note: A judgment must be made with 200mm width, and must not be
made with 100mm width.
Adjustment
mode
Main scanning
direction
magnification
ratio
Spec value
At normal:
1.0%
SIM
481-1
Set value
Add 1: 0.1%
increase
Reduce 1: 0.1%
decrease
Setting
range
1 99
(10) Sub scanning direction (scanning direction)

(SIM 48-1-2, SIM 48-1-3)
a. OC mode in copying
Note: Execute the procedure after completion of SIM 48-1-1.
1) Put a scale on the original table as shown below, and make a normal (100%) copy.
When La > Lb
Shift the mirror base B rail upward by the half of the difference of
LaLb.
When La < Lb
Shift the mirror base B rail downward by the half of the difference
of LbLa.
Example: When La = 12mm and Lb = 9mm, shift the mirror base
B rail upward by 1.5mm.
When Lc >Ld
Shift the mirror base B rail downward by the half of the difference
of LcLd.
When Lc < Ld
When Lc < Ld, move the mirror base B on the paper feed side
upward.
When moving the mirror base rail, hold the mirror base rail with
your hand.
La = Lb, Lc = Ld
5) After completion of adjustment, manually turn the mirror base drive
pulley, scan the mirror base A and mirror base B fully, and check
that the mirror bases are not in contact with each other.
2) Compare the scale image and the actual scale.

If necessary, perform the following adjustment procedures.
3) Execute SIM 48-1-2.
The set value is stored and a copy is made.
Adjustment
mode
Sub scanning
direction
magnification
ratio (OC mode)
Spec value
SIM
Set value
At normal:
1.0%
48-12
Add 1:
0.05% increase
Reduce 1:
0.05% decrease
Setting
range
1 99
b. RSPF mode in copying
contact with the frame or the original glass. Be careful to avoid this.

CCD unit is properly installed and that OC mode adjustment in
copying has been completed.
(9) Main scanning direction (FR direction) magnification

ratio adjustment (SIM 48-1)
1) Put a scale on the original table as shown below, and make a normal (100%) copy to make a test chart.
If the mirror base rail is moved extremely, the mirror base may be in

CCD unit is properly installed.
1) Put a scale on the original table as shown below.
Note: Since the printed copy is used as a test chart, put the scale in
parallel with the front side edge of the glass.
2) Set the test chart on the RSPF and make a normal (100%) copy.
3) After warm-up, shading is performed and the current set value of
the main scanning direction magnification ratio is displayed on the
display section in 2 digits.
4) Manual correction mode (SIM48-1-1)
Enter the set value and press the start key.
3) Compare the scale image and the actual image.

If necessary, perform the following adjustment procedures.
5) After warm-up, shading is performed.
The current front surface sub scanning direction magnification ratio
correction value is displayed in two digits on the display section.
The correction value is stored and a copy is made.



The current back surface sub scanning direction magnification ratio
is displayed in two digits on the display section.
3) If the distance is outside the specified range, adjust the open/close

sensor attachment plate position as shown below.
OC (SPF) open/close position A: 125 225mm

Distance < 125mm: Shift toward A.

Distance > 225mm: Shift toward B.
Adjustment mode
Sub scanning
direction
magnification ratio
(RSPF mode)
Spec
value
At normal:
1.0%
SIM
Set value
48-1-3
48-1-4
Add 1:
0.05% increase
Setting
range
1 99
Reduce 1:
0.05% decrease
(11) Off center adjustment (RSPF mode)

paper off center is properly adjusted.
1) Place the center position adjustment test chart (sheet with a
straight line in the scan direction at the center) on the RSPF.
2) Make a normal copy from the manual paper feed tray, and check
the printed copy with the test chart.
If any adjustment is required, perform the following procedure.
(13) Original sensor adjustment (SIM 41-2, 41-4)

1) Set A3 (11" x 17") paper on the OC table.
(Keep the SPF (OC cover) open.)

the off center adjustment is displayed on the display section in 2
digits.

4) Check the reaction with SIM 41-1.
Adjustment
mode
Original off
center mode
(RSPF
mode)
Spec value
SIM
Set value
Single: Center
3.0mm
Duplex: Center
3.5mm
50-12
Add 1: 0.1mm
shift to R side
Reduce 1: 0.1mm
shift to L side
Setting
range
1 99
(12) OC (RSPF) open/close detection position adjustment

2) Gradually close the OC (RSPF) from the full open position, and
measure distance A when the display on the operation panel
changes. (See the figure below.)
3) Keep A=125mm, and execute SIM 41-4. (Do not put paper on the
table.)
(14) RSPF white correction pixel position adjustment

(required in an RSPF model when replacing the lens
unit) (SIM63-7)
1) Fully open the RSPF.
3) When the operation panel displays "COMPLETE," the adjustment
is completed.
4) If the operation panel displays "ERROR," perform the following
measures.
When the display is 0:
Check that the SPF is open.
Check that the lamp is ON. (If the lamp is OFF, check the MCU connector.)
Check that the CCD harness is properly inserted into the MCU connector.
When the display is 281 or above:
1) Remove the table glass.
2) Remove the dark box.
Distance A = Table glass top - OC (RSPF) handle rib
3) Slide the lens unit toward the front side and attach it, then execute SIM.
When the display is 143 or below:
1) Remove the table glass.
2) Remove the dark box.
3) Slide the lens unit toward the rear side and attach it, then execute
SIM.
When the lens unit is moved, execute the OC main scanning magni-
fication ratio auto adjustment, SIM 48-1-1.

This adjustment is basically O.K. with SIM 63-7.
(15) RSPF scan position auto adjustment
C. Image density (exposure) adjustment
[Function]
(1) Copy mode (SIM46-2)
Used to adjust the RSPF scan position automatically.
1) Set a test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) on the OC table as shown

below.
[Operation]
1) With the RSPF or the OC cover open, place a white paper background on the OC glass. (In the RSPF standard model, the RSPF
glass surface is included.)
Rear
2) Enter SIM53-08, and press [START] button.

Outline of SIM: The optical unit is shifted to recognize the boundary between the OC glass and the RSPF glass cover.
With the same position as the reference, the RSPF scan position is
automatically adjusted.
<Note>
After completion of the RSPF scan position auto adjustment, the
RSPF lead edge adjustment must be executed. (Both surfaces)
There must be no other sheet than the black chart on the glass surface.
Especially when in RSPF scan, the center area is scanned in the
main scan direction. Be careful to prevent external light from entering the scan area.
3) Check that the lead edge is not shifted. (Both surfaces)
(If the original lead edge adjustment has been made properly, even
when the scan position is shifted, it is followed automatically.)
Front
2) Place three or more sheets of A3 (11" x 17") paper on the test

chart.
the density (exposure) level is displayed on the display section in 2
digits.
For mode selection, use the [10-key].
Place only the white

paper on the OC glass.
For the RSPF standard-provision

machine, check that the white
paper covers the SPF glass.
5) Change the set value with the [10-key] to adjust the copy image
density.
6) Make a copy and check that the specification below is satisfied.
Note: Place originals in the rear reference, and the test chart in the
front reference when adjusting the exposure.
Exposure
level
Sharp Gray
Chart output
AUTO
"3" is copied.
TEXT
3.0
"3" is copied.
TEXT/PHOTO
3.0
"3" is copied.
PHOTO
3.0
"2" is copied.
AE
(TONER SAVE)
"3" is copied.
TEXT
(TONER SAVE)
3.0
"3" is copied.
TEXT PHOTO
(TONER SAVE)
3.0
"3" is copied.
Density mode
Placing the white paper
The white chart must cover
this area.
Set value
If too bright,
increase the
quantity displayed
on the copy
quantity display.
If too dark,
decrease the
quantity displayed
on the copy
quantity display.
Setting
range
1 99
[6] SIMULATION
1. General
B. Code-type simulation
A. Outline and purpose
(1) Operating procedures and operations
The simulation has the following functions to grasp the machine operating status, identify the trouble position and causes in an earlier stage,
and make various setups and adjustments speedily for improving the
serviceability of the machine.
* Entering the simulation mode
1) Various adjustments
3) Entering a sub code with the 10-key START key ON
2) Setup of specifications and functions
4) Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
3) Canceling troubles
5) The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected item.
1) #/P key (program) ON Asterisk (*) key ON CLEAR key ON

Asterisk (*) key ON Ready for input of a main code of simulation
2) Entering a main code with the 10-key START key ON
4) Operation check
Press START key to start the simulation operation.
5) Various counters check, setup, and clear
To cancel the current simulation mode or to change the main code

and the sub code, press the SYSTEM SETTINGS key.
6) Machine operating status (operation history) data check, clear

7) Transfer of various data (adjustments, setup, operations, counters)
* Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode
The operating procedures and the displays differ depending on the

form of the operation panel of the machine.
1) Press CLEAR ALL key.
(2) How to change the simulation adjustment value set by

the touch panel in the adjustment value entry process
a. Target SIM list
3-7, 8-1, 8-2, 8-3, 8-10, 8-11, 8-12, 9-5, 43-1, 44-34, 46-2, 46-9, 46-10,
46-11, 46-18, 46-20, 46-30, 46-31, 48-1, 48-2, 50-1, 50-5, 50-6, 50-10,
50-12, 51-1, 51-2, 51-9, 53-7
b. Touch panel operating procedure

In the adjustment value setup menu, the selected item is highlighted.
Change is made to the highlighted simulation adjustment value.
If all the list of the adjustment items is not shown on one page, touch
[] and [] button to shift the page.
To change an adjustment value, touch the select the item to change
the adjustment value. (The selected item is highlighted.) Enter the
adjustment value and perform one of the following procedures, and
the display of the adjustment value of the selected item is renewed
as well as the adjustment value.
1) Touch [OK] button.
2) Touch another selected item to change the selection state.
3) If all the list of the adjustment items cover two or more pages,
touch [] and [] button to shift the page.
4) Press [START] key.
* For simulations which allow confirmation print, copying is started
after changing the adjustment value.
(46-2, 46-9, 46-10, 46-11, 46-18, 48-1, 48-2, 50-1, 50-5, 50-6, 50-10,
50-12, 51-2, the bold-faced items in the above list.)
* If the entry value is outside the adjustable range, an error buzzer
sounds and the adjustment value is not renewed. Page shift is not
made, either.
AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 1
START (Normal mode)

L1
Press the #/P key.
In the cause of SIM which is set by touch panel, the

changed content can be stored by the following key, touch.
[OK] key
Other item selection
key
Press the START key.
Press the asterisk (*) key.

1
Press the clear key.
The changed content

is stored.
Press the asterisk (*) key.

Do you
want to end the
simulation ?
Standby for entry of

SIM code.
YES
Press the clear all key.

NO
Enter the main code of

SIM with the 10-key.
The simulation mode

is canceled.
The main code of SIM

is displayed.
Returns to START
(Normal mode).
Do you want
to perform another
simulation ?
NO
2
YES
Is there a sub code ?
NO
Press the SYSTEM

SETTINGS key
YES
Standby for entry of

SIM sub code.
YES
Is it the same
simulation ?
Enter the sub code of

SIM with the 10-key.
3
NO
Press the SYSTEM

SETTINGS key
Is there a item
selection?
NO
YES
Select the mode and the

item with the key
and the item key.
YES
Operation check ?
NO
Operation is made according

to the selected mode and item.
Operating conditions
check ?
YES
If "Operation condition check"

refer to "Sensor display", this
process is not necessary.

NO

to the selected mode and item.
Data clear ?
YES

Select "YES".
NO
The selected mode and

the item are cleared.
Adjustments
or setting (counter data
change) ?
NO
YES
The display is made according

to the selected mode and the item.
Do you
want to change the
content ?
YES

to the select ed mode and the it
(Other modes)
NO
Enter the new setting and

adjustment values.
L1
2. Simulation code list

Code
Main
Sub
1
1
2
1
2
2
3
2
3
10
11
2
4
3
1
5
2
3
1
6
2
7
1
6
8
1
10
8
11
13
14
1
9
4
5
10
Code
Main
Sub
Function
Used to check the operation of the scanner unit

and its control circuit.
Used to check the operation of sensor and detector
in the scanning (read) section and the related circuit.
Used to check the operation of the RSPF unit and
the related circuit.
Used to check the operation of sensors and detectors
in the RSPF unit and the related circuit.
Used to check the operation of the loads in the
RSPF unit and the control circuits.
in the finisher and the related circuit.
Used to check the operation of the load in the
finisher and the control circuit.
Used to make each adjustment of the finisher.
Used to check the shifter operation.
Reciprocating operations are continuously
performed or the home position is checked.
(The shifter is shifted to the home position or
moved in one way by the specified steps.)
in the option tray and the related circuit.
Used to check the operation of the load in the
option tray and the control circuit.
Used to check the operation of the display (LED),
LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit.
Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and
the control circuit.
Used to check the operation of the copy lamp and
Used to check the operation of the loads (clutches
and solenoids) in the paper transport system and
Used to check the operation of each fan motor and
its control circuit.
Used to set the aging operation conditions.
Used to set the cycle of intermittent aging.
Used to set the display of the warm-up time.
Used to check and adjust the operation of the
developing bias voltage in each copy mode and the
control circuit.
Used to check and adjust the operation of the main
charger grid voltage in each copy mode and the
control circuit.
developing bias voltage in each printer mode and
charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the
control circuit.
developing bias voltage in FAX mode and the
control circuit.
charger grid voltage in FAX mode and the control
circuit.
Used to check and adjust the operation of the load
(motor) in the duplex section and the control circuit.
Duplex motor RPM setting
Used to adjust the timing of switching from normal
rotation to reverse rotation or from reverse rotation
to normal rotation of the duplex motor.
Used to check the operation of the toner motor and
its control circuit.
14
16
17
21
0
0
1
1
3
4
5
22
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
19
2
3
4
24
5
6
7
9
10
15
1
25
2
26
Function
Used to cancel excluding the self-diag U2/PF
troubles.
Used to cancel the self-diag U2 trouble.
Used to cancel the self diag PF trouble.
Used to set the maintenance cycle.
Used to check the counter value of each section.
Used to check the total numbers of misfeed and
troubles. (When the number of misfeed is
considerably great, it is judged as necessary for
repair. The misfeed rate is obtained by dividing this
count value with the total counter value.)
Used to check the misfeed positions and the
number of misfeed at each position.
(When the number of misfeed is considerably
great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.)
Used to check the total trouble (self diag) history.
Used to check the ROM version of each unit
(section).
Used to print each system setting, the account
information, and the machine adjustment values.
Used to display of the administrator password.
Used to display the original, staple counter.
Used to check the number of use of each paper
feed section. (the number of prints)
Used to check the system configuration.
Used to display the FAX send/receive counter
(FAX reception and print counter).
Used to check the misfeed positions and the
number of misfeed at each position.
(When the number of misfeed is considerably
great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.)
Used to display the CRUM type.
Used to display the scanner counter in the network
scanner mode.
Used to clear the misfeed counter, the misfeed
history, the trouble counter, and the trouble history.
(The counters are cleared after completion of
maintenance.)
Used to clear the number of use (the number of
prints) of each paper feed section.
Used to clear the number usage data of the stapler,
RSPF, and scanning.
Used to reset the maintenance counter.
Used to reset the developer counter.
(The developer counter of the DV unit which is
installed is reset.)
Used to clear the copy counter.
Used to clear the OPC drum (membrane decrease)
correction counter. (This simulation is executed
when the OPC drum is replaced.)
Used to clear the printer counter and other
counters.
FAX counter data clear
Used to clear the scanner counter in the network
scanner mode.
Used to check the operation of the main drive
(excluding the scanner section) and to check the
operation of the toner concentration sensor.
(The toner concentration sensor output can be
monitored.)
Used to make the initial setting of toner
concentration when replacing developer.
Used to set whether the job separator is installed
or not. (Since this cannot be detected by hardware
detection, it is set in this simulation.)
Code
Main
Sub
2
3
5
6
12
14
18
22
30
35
26
36
37
38
50
56
57
60
71
72
1
30
2
1
40
2
3
1
2
41
3
4
Function
Used to set whether the automatic detection of
paper size is made or not.
Used to set the specifications of the auditor.
Setting must be made depending on the use
condition of the auditor.
Used to set the count mode of the total counter and
the maintenance counter.
Used to set the specifications depending on the
destination.
Used to input the Software Key for E-MAIL RIC.
Used to input the Software Key for the PS
extension kit.
Used to set enable/disable of toner save operation.
Used to set the specification (language display) for
the destination.
Used to set ON/OFF of the heater lamp slow-up
control conforming to the CE mark control.
Used to set whether the same continuous troubles
are displayed as one trouble or the series of
troubles with SIM 22-4 when the same troubles
occur continuously.
Used to set whether the machine is stopped or not
when the maintenance counter life is expired.
when the developer counter life is expired.
when the drum counter life is expired.
Used to set ON/OFF of the black and white
reversion function.
Gamma life correction setting
Used to set the model code.
Used to set enable/disable of the FAX mode key
when FAX is not installed. (When FAX is installed,
the FAX mode is enabled regardless of this setup.)
In the power save time setting, the pre-heat (preheat mode setting) and the auto power shut off
time can be set to the short time setup (pre-heat: 1
min, auto power shut off: 1 min) and the long time
setup (pre-heat: 15min, auto power shut off:
60min).
The letterhead support is set.
When Letterhead paper setting is selected, the
set value of SIM 26-46 (Image output direction
setting) is set to Setting Enable accordingly.
Used to display the sensor status attached to the
machine.
Used to display the status of the sensors attached
to the standard tray and the manual feed tray. (Use
SIM 4-2 for the option trays.)
The sensor of an uninstalled tray is not displayed.
Used to check the sensor of the machine manual
feed tray.
Used to adjust the manual paper feed tray paper
width detector detection level.
The AD conversion value of manual feed width
detection is displayed.
Used to check the document size detection photo
sensor.
Used to adjust the detection level of the document
size photo sensor.
Used to check the light reception level and the
detection level of the original size detection photo
sensor.
Used to adjust the detection level of OC 20
degrees.
Code
Main
Sub
1
43
10
1
2
3
9
14
44
16
17
34
40
2
9
10
11
12
13
46
14
15
16
18
19
20
30
31
39
1
2
48
3
8
9
1
5
50
6
8
9
Function
Used to set the fusing temperature.
Used to set the paper feed cycle timing when
printing postcards.
Used to make various setups in each mode of
process control.
Drum life correction setting
Used to set the DV count correction.
Used to display the process control correction
information.
Used to display the environment (temperature,
humidity) correction information.
Used to set the toner density control correction
value.
Used to display the toner density control reference
value.
Used to set the transfer current value in each
mode.
Used to set the time from the start of the main
motor rotation (Ready) to the start of toner supply
in previous rotation after turning on the power.
Used to set the exposure level in each exposure
mode.
Used to adjust the shift amount and the inclination
value for each level (1 to 5) of the exposure mode
(Text).
(Text/Photo).
(Photo).
FAX exposure level adjustment
(1 mode automatic adjustment)
(Normal mode individual adjustment)
(Fine text mode individual adjustment)
(Super Fine mode individual adjustment)
(Ultra Fine mode individual adjustment)
Used to adjust inclination for each exposure mode.
Used to set the control method of the exposure
mode.
Used to set the exposure correction value of SPF/
RSPF for OC exposure.
Used to set the AE and the limit value in AE
(Toner save).
(Toner save).
Used to switch the FAX send image quality.
Used to adjust the copy mode magnification ratio
(main scanning direction, sub scanning direction).
Used to adjust the scanner mode magnification
ratio (main/sub scanning direction).
Used to adjust the print mode magnification ratio
correction.
FAX magnification adjustment (read)
FAX magnification adjustment (print)
Used to adjust the copy lead edge position.
Used to adjust the print image position (top margin)
on the print paper in the print mode.
Used to adjust the print image position (top margin)
on print paper in the copy mode. (RSPF)
FAX lead edge adjustment (read)
FAX lead edge adjustment (print)
Code
Main
Sub
10
50
12
1
2
51
8
9
7
53
8
55
9
10
1
61
1
1
63
7
64
1
1
65
2
5
1
2
66
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Code
Main
Sub
Function
Used to adjust the print image center position.
(Adjustment can be made for each paper feed
section.)
(Adjustment can be made for each document mode.)
Used to adjust the OPC drum separation pawl ON time.
Used to adjust the contact pressure of paper onto
the resist roller in each section (copier paper feed
section, duplex paper feed section, RSPF paper
feed section). (When the print image position
varies greatly for the paper or when a lot of paper
jam troubles occur, the adjustment is required.)
Used to set the OPC drum separation pawl
operation inhibit. (ON/OFF)
Used to adjust the OPC drum separation voltage
ON/OFF timing.
Used to adjust the detection level of the RSPF
width. The adjustment method is the 4-point
system. Set the guide to Max. (A3/WLetter)
position, A4R/Letter R position, A5R/Invoice R
position, and Min. position for adjustment.
Used to enter the RSPF width detection
adjustment value.
Used to adjust the RSPF scan position of the
mirror unit automatically. For the RSPF scan
position automatic adjustment, the mirror unit is
shifted to 11mm before the RSPF glass cover
edge, and is operated automatically to scan
images by the unit of 1 step, detecting the position
up to the glass cover automatically.
RSPF read position adjustment
RSPF exp adjustment
Used to set the soft switch.
Used to check the LSU (polygon motor) operation.
Check speed can select 145mm/s or 122mm/s
individually.
Used to check the result of shading correction.
(The shading correction data are displayed.)
Used to adjust the RSPF white correction start
pixel position automatically.
This adjustment is performed after the lens unit is
replaced.
Used to check the operation of the printer function
(auto print operation).
Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display
section) detection position.
Used to check the touch panel (LCD display
section) detection position adjustment result.
Used to check the key inputs of the operation panel.
Used to change and check the FAX-related soft SW.
Used to clear the FAX-related soft SW.
(Except for the FAX adjustment values)
FAX PWB memory check
Signal send mode (Signal send level: Max.)
Signal send mode (Signal send level soft SW setting)
Printing the confidential password
Print the screen memory contents
Image data memory clear
Used to send 300bps signals.
(Signal send level: Max.)
(Signal send level: Set by soft SW)
Used to register the dial numbers.
Used to perform the dial test. (10 PPS send test)
Used to perform the dial test. (DTFM signal send test)
17
18
66
19
20
21
22
24
30
31
32
33
34
37
41
52
Function
Used to check the DTFM signal send operation.
(Signal send level: Set by soft SW.)
Used to write the SRAM data to the Flash ROM.
Used to write the Flash ROM data to the SRAM.
FAX information print
Handset sound volume adjustment (Japan only)
Used to clear the FAST storage data. (SEC only)
Used to set the TEL/LIU.
Receive data check
Signal detection check
Communication time measurement display
Speaker sound volume adjustment
CI signal check
Pseudo-ringer check
3. Details of simulation
2-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
1
1-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Operation test/check
Used to check the operation of the scanner unit and its
control circuit.
Optical (Image scanning)
Operation
Operation/procedure
Enter the number of operations, and set the magnification ratio and the
original size.
1. Select the desired item, and press the [START] key.
2. Enter the set value with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
The scanner unit operates at the speed corresponding to the set value.
The scan counter is displayed during execution.
Set magnification ratio
Document size
Set number of times
25% to 400% (1% increment)

(Default 100%)
Varies depending on the destination.
1 to 999 (0: Continuous operation)
Used to check the operation of sensors and detectors
in the RSPF unit and the related circuit.
RSPF
Operation
Operation/procedure
The operations of sensors and detectors in the RSPF section are displayed.
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
(For the original size, the detection result of the original size displayed
on the copy menu is highlighted.)
EMPS
DLS1
DLS2
FGOD
DFD
RDD
OPCLS
SWD_LEN
SWD_A/D
Original empty sensor

Original length sensor (Small)
Original length sensor (Large)
RSPF paper feed cover open/close sensor
RSPF paper entry sensor
RSPF original exit sensor
Book sensor
Original detection width sensor
(Unit of 0.1mm. Width x 10 is displayed. Example: For
300mm, 3000 is displayed.)
Original detection width sensor A/D value
RSPF width detection size (One of the following is displayed.)

A4/A3, LT/WLT, B5/B4, INV/LTR, A5/A4R, B5R, EXTRA, 8K/16K,
16KR
1-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Used to check the operation of sensor and detector in
the scanning (read) section and the related circuit.
Operation
Operation/procedure
The status of sensors and detectors in the scanner section is displayed. The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
MHPS
Mirror home position sensor
Note: Executable only when the RSPF is installed.

2-3
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Used to check the operation of the loads in the RSPF
unit and the control circuits.
RSPF
Operation
Operation/procedure
Select the load to be checked with the 10-key, and press the [START]
key.
The motor for 10sec, the solenoid ON for 500msec, OFF for 500msec.
(20 times)
2-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Used to check the operation of the RSPF unit and the
related circuit.
RSPF
Operation
Operation/procedure
1
2
3
4
5
6
Item
DTM-F
DTM-R
DFCL
CLH
GSOL
RSOL
Enter the number of operations, and set the magnification ratio and the
original size.
1. Select the desired item, and press the [START] key.
The RSPF unit operates at the speed corresponding to the set value.
The scan counter is displayed during execution.
Set magnification ratio
Document size
Duplex
Set number of times
Content
RSPF motor forward rotation
RSPF motor reverse rotation
RSPF paper feed clutch
RSPF PS clutch
Document exit gate solenoid
Document exit pressure solenoid
50% to 200% (1% increment)

(Default 100%)
Varies depending on the destination.
Selectable only when RSPF is installed.
1 to 999 (0: Continuous operation)
3-10
3
3-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
the finisher and the related circuit.
Finisher
Operation
Purpose
Adjustment
Function
(Purpose)
Used to make each adjustment of the finisher.
Item
Operation
Operation/procedure
1. Select an item to be adjusted with 10-key, and press [START] key.
2. Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [START] key.
Operation/procedure
Used to display the operations of sensors and detectors in the finisher
section.
FDTPD
FSTPD
FAPHPS-R
FAPHPS-F
FDRPS
FPPD1
FDTLLS
FTPS
FPLD
FSSW
FSLD
FSED
FSHPS
FPRD
FPLS
Paper delivery tray paper detector

Staple tray paper detector
Paper alignment plate HP sensor R
Paper alignment plate HP sensor F
Delivery roller position sensor
Paper pass detector
Delivery tray lower limit sensor
Tray position sensor
Paper level detector
Safety switch
Staple lead edge detector
Staple empty detector
Staple HP sensor
Process tray paper rear edge detection
Paper level sensor
Item
FPAM ADJUST
Paper alignment
width adjustment
40-60
50
FDRLM ADJUST
Paper delivery roller

descending position
adjustment
40-60
50
Used to check the shifter operation.
Reciprocating operations are continuously performed
or the home position is checked.
(The shifter is shifted to the home position or moved in
one way by the specified steps.)
Operation
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Operation/procedure
Select item 1, and press the [START] key.
The shifter is reciprocated continuously at the specified interval.
1
2
Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher
and the control circuit.
Finisher
Operation
Operation/procedure
key.
The finisher main motor operates for 10sec, the staple motor 5 times,
the tray lift-up motor one reciprocating operation, other motors max. 20
reciprocating operations from the home position, the solenoid repeats
500msec ON and 500msec OFF 20 times.
Item
F-R
HP CHECK
Content
Reciprocating operation
Home position check
[Selection 2]
1. Select item 2, and press the [START] key.
2. Move the shifter to the home position or in one way by the specified steps with the following keys.
[*] key
[0 key
[#] key
SFTHP
Shifts the position toward R side by the specified steps.

Shifts the position toward HP side by the specified steps.
Shifts to F.
Shifter home position (At detection, highlighted)
The staple operation motor operates only when there is no cartridge

installed.
Item
FTLM
FSM
FPAM-R
FPAM-F
FPDM
FPS
FPTM
FDRLM
FPGS
FARLS
FSL
Default
Purpose
3-3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Installation
range
3-11
Note: Executable only when the finisher is installed.
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Content
Content
Tray lift motor
Staple motor
Paper alignment motor R
Paper alignment motor F
Paper delivery motor
Paddle solenoid
Paper transport motor
Delivery roller lift motor
Paper gate solenoid
Alignment roller lift solenoid
Staple light
4-2
5-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
the option tray and the related circuit.
Paper feed
Operation
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Used to check the operation of the display (LED), LCD
in the operation panel, and control circuit.
Operation (screen/operation)
Operation
Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure
The operating states of the sensor and the detector are displayed.
(Only the installed option trays are displayed. For the standard tray,
use SIM 30-2.)
The LCD is displayed as follows. (All LEDs are ON.)

With the upper half highlighted and the lower half normally displayed,
contrast changes Standard MAX MIN. in every 2sec.

PED2
LUD2
PFD2
CD2
PED3
LUD3
PFD3
CD3
PED4
LUD4
PFD4
CD4
DSWR2
DSWR3
DSWR4
2nd tray paper empty sensor

2nd tray paper upper limit detection sensor
2nd tray paper pass sensor
2nd tray empty sensor
3rd tray paper empty sensor
3rd tray paper upper limit detection sensor
3rd tray paper pass sensor
3rd tray empty sensor
4th tray paper empty sensor
4th tray paper upper limit detection sensor
4th tray paper pass sensor
4th tray empty sensor
2nd tray right door detection sensor
3rd tray right door detection sensor
4th tray right door detection sensor
(6 sec later)
With the upper half normally displayed and the lower half highlighted,
contrast changes Standard MAX MIN. in every 2sec.
Note: Execution is possible only when the option tray is installed.
* When returning to the sub menu selection menu, the display of the
standard contrast is displayed for an instant.
4-3
5-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Used to check the operation of the load in the option
tray and the control circuit.
Paper feed
Operation
Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the
control circuit.
Fusing
Operation
Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure
key.
1. Select the lamp to be checked with the 10-key, and press the
[START] key.
ON/OFF operation of the heater lamp is repeated 5 times in an interval

of 100ms/900ms.
When completing the operation, the cooling fan is rotated at a low speed.
The lift-up motor operates only when the tray is opened. (20 times)
1
2
3
4
Item
LUM2
CPFC2
CPFS2
TRC2
DM
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
LUM3
CPFC3
CPFS3
TRC3
LUM4
CPFC4
CPFS4
Content
2nd tray lift-up motor
2nd tray pick-up solenoid
2nd tray paper feed clutch
2nd tray transport roller clutch
2nd tray paper transport motor
(3rd tray paper transport motor)
3rd tray lift-up motor
3rd tray pick-up solenoid
3rd tray paper feed clutch
3rd tray transport roller clutch
4th tray lift-up motor
4th tray pick-up solenoid
4th tray paper feed clutch
Item Content
1
2
Item
HL1
HL2
Content
Heater lamp 1 (Main) operation
Heater lamp 2 (Sub) operation
5-3
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Used to check the operation of the copy lamp and the
control circuit.
Operation
Operation/procedure
Note: Execution is possible only when the option tray is installed.
When the [START] key is pressed, the copy lamp is lighted for 10sec.
6-1
7-1
Purpose
Used to check the operation of the loads (clutches and
solenoids) in the paper transport system and the
control circuit.
Paper transport (Discharge/Switchback/Transport)
Operation
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Operation/procedure
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item
Setting/Operation test/check
Used to set the aging operation conditions.
Operation
Operation/procedure
1. Select the load to be set with the 10-key.
2. Press the [START] key.
1. Select the load to be checked with the 10-key, and press the
[START] key.
When selected without setup, the selected value is registered and

highlighted. When selected with previous setup, the previous setup is
canceled and it is displayed normally.
(20 times)
Press [CA] key, and the simulation will be terminated and the machine
goes into the aging standby mode with the set content.
When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] is pressed, the operation is interrupted.
This setting is canceled by power OFF.
The lift-up motor operates only when the tray is opened.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Item
LUM1
CPFC1
CPFS1
MPFS
RRC
PSPS
OGS
LUM2
CPFC2
CPFS2
TRC2
LUM3
CPFC3
CPFS3
TRC3
LUM4
CPFC4
CPFS4
ROGS
Content
1st tray lift-up motor
1st tray pick-up solenoid
1st tray paper feed clutch
Manual feed pick-up solenoid
Resist roller clutch
Separation pawl solenoid
Paper exit gate switching solenoid
2nd tray lift-up motor
2nd tray pick-up solenoid
2nd tray paper feed clutch
2nd tray transport roller clutch
3rd tray lift-up motor
3rd tray pick-up solenoid
3rd tray paper feed clutch
3rd tray transport roller clutch
4th tray lift-up motor
4th tray pick-up solenoid
4th tray paper feed clutch
Right paper exit gate solenoid
Item
AGING
MISFEED
FUSING*1
INTERVL
WARMUP
DV CHK.
Content
Aging enable/disable setting
Jam detection enable/disable setting
Fusing operation enable/disable setting
The fusing temperature is not controlled.
The heater is not turned ON.
Intermittent setting (Valid only when set to AGING.)
Warm-up save setting
The machine goes into the ready state only by
shading, disregarding fusing and process control.
After going into the ready state, normal control is
performed.
Developing unit detection enable/disable setting
*1: When the machine exits from the fusing ignoring state, the roller
may be cooled down. Therefore, reset the machine to warm up
again.
When, therefore, the simulation is canceled by pressing the [CA]
key or when the copy mode display is shifted to the initial menu
display in the simulation mode of one page copy, the machine is
reset.
Note: In SIM 7-1, pressing [CA] key terminates the simulation and the
machine enters the aging mode without resetting. Therefore, to
perform 4. Intermittent setup, the intermittent cycle must be set
with SIM 7-6 in advance.
Reset is not performed when the machine enters the aging mode.
The lift-up motor operates only when the tray is opened.

6-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
1
2
Used to check the operation of each fan motor and its
control circuit.
Others
Operation
7-6
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item
Used to set the cycle of intermittent aging.
Operation
Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure
key.
The selected load is operated for 10sec.
1. Enter the interval aging cycle time (sec) with the 10-key pad.
Refer to SIM 7-1.
Item
1
VFM
DCFM&DCFM2
VFM2
VFM&DCFM&DCFM2
&VFM2
Content
Fusing fan operates
Power cooling fan, power cooling fan 2
operations
Fusing exit paper fan operates
Fusing fan, power cooling fan, and
power cooling fan 2 are operated at the
same time.

When the [START] key is pressed in aging, copying is performed continuously. This simulation is used to set the time interval between copy
operations in the unit of second.
This setting is valid when SIM 7-1 (Intermittent setting) is enabled.
Setting range
Default
1-255
3
8-2
7-8
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Purpose
Used to set the display of the warm-up time.
Function
(Purpose)
Operation
Operation/procedure
Section
1. Warm-up starts by the cover open/close.

(Can be performed repeatedly by open/close of the cover.)
2. The warm-up time is counted up and displayed in the unit of sec.
If the [CA] key is pressed at this time, count-up is interrupted to terminate the simulation. (However, warm-up is continued.)
3. After completion of warming up, WARM UP COMPLETED is displayed and the control returns to the initial screen.
Adjustment/Operation test/check
charger grid voltage in each copy mode and the control
circuit.
Image process
(Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Photo conductor
Operation/procedure
1. Touch the exposure mode to be changed.
2. Enter the set value with the 10-key.
Item
8-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
developing bias voltage in each copy mode and the
control circuit.
Image process
Developer/Toner hopper

Output is made with the entered value, and the display returns to the
original state.
Item
1
2
AE (145)
TEXT (145)
TEXT/PHOTO (145)
4
5
6
7
PHOTO (145)
TONER SAVE (145)
AE (122)
TEXT (122)
TEXT/PHOTO (122)
9
10
PHOTO (122)
TONER SAVE (122)
Content
AE (145mm/s)
Character (145mm/s)
Character/Photo
(145mm/s)
Photo (145mm/s)
Toner save (145mm/s)
AE (122mm/s)
Character (122mm/s)
Character/Photo
(122mm/s)
Photo (122mm/s)
Setting
range
Default
450
450
200650
450
450
400
AE (145)
AE (145mm/s)
590
TEXT (145)
Character (145mm/s)
590
TEXT/PHOTO (145)
Character/Photo
(145mm/s)
590
PHOTO (145)
Photo (145mm/s)
590
TONER SAVE (145)
AE (122)
AE (122mm/s)
TEXT (122)
Character (122mm/s)
590
TEXT/PHOTO (122)
Character/Photo
(122mm/s)
590
PHOTO (122)
Photo (122mm/s)
590
10
TONER SAVE (122)
540
350750
540
590

() Linked with the destinations of SIM 26-6.
Linked with the auto exposure mode of SIM 46-19-1.
8-10
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)

developing bias voltage in each printer mode and the
control circuit.
Section
Image process
Operation/procedure
() Linked with the destinations of SIM 26-6.

Linked with the auto exposure mode of SIM 46-19-1.
Default
450
450
400
450
450
Setting
range
Operation/procedure
Content
The minimum increment is 10V.

The result of (Set value) -200/ 10 is stored in the EEPROM.
When reading a value from the EEPROM, the value of (EEP value
*10+200) is used as the set value.
Item
Content
Installa
tion
range
8-13
Purpose
Default
Function
(Purpose)
developing bias voltage in FAX mode and the control
circuit.
Image process
DENS1 (145)
Density1 (145mm/s)
300
DENS2 (145)
Density2 (145mm/s)
370
DENS3 (145)
Density3 (145mm/s)
420
DENS4 (145)
Density4 (145mm/s)
530
Operation/procedure
DENS5 (145)
Density5 (145mm/s)
600
TS (145)
250
DENS1 (122)
Density1 (122mm/s)
300
DENS2 (122)
Density2 (122mm/s)
370
Output is made with the entered value for 30sec. and the display
DENS3 (122)
Density3 (122mm/s)
420
10 DENS4 (122)
Density4 (122mm/s)
530
200650
11 DENS5 (122)
Density5 (122mm/s)
600
12 TS (122)
250

The result of (Set value) -200/ 10 is stored in the EEPROM.
When reading a value from the EEPROM, the value of (EEP value
*10+200) is used as the set value.
Section
Setting range
Default
200-650
450

The result of (Set value-200) / 10 is stored in the EEPROM.
When reading a value from the EEPROM, the value of (EEP value 10
+200) is used as the set value.
Therefore, an even number must be entered. If not, the entered odd
number +1 is displayed after pressing [START] key.
8-14
8-11
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the
control circuit.
Image process
Photo conductor
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
charger grid voltage in FAX mode and the control
circuit.
Image process
Photo conductor
Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure

The current set value is highlighted.
Output is made with the entered value for 30sec. and the display
Setting range
Default
Item
Content
Installa
tion
range
350-750
590
Default
DENS1 (145)
Density 1 (145mm/s)
440
DENS2 (145)
Density 2 (145mm/s)
510
DENS3 (145)
Density 3 (145mm/s)
560
DENS4 (145)
Density 4 (145mm/s)
670
DENS5 (145)
Density 5 (145mm/s)
740
TS (145)
DENS1 (122)
Density 1 (122mm/s)
DENS2 (122)
Density 2 (122mm/s)
510
DENS3 (122)
Density 3 (122mm/s)
560
Operation/procedure
10 DENS4 (122)
Density 4 (122mm/s)
670
1. Select the operation mode with the 10-key.
11 DENS5 (122)
Density 5 (122mm/s)
740
12 TS (122)
390
The operation is performed for 30sec, and the display returns to the
original state.
350750
390
440
9-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Item
1
DMF145
DMF122
DMR145
DMR122
Used to check and adjust the operation of the load
(motor) in the duplex section and the control circuit.
Duplex
Operation
Content
Duplex motor/Duplex 2 motor forward rotation
(145mm/s)
Duplex motor/Duplex 2 motor forward rotation
(122mm/s)
Duplex motor/Duplex 2 motor reverse rotation
(145mm/s)
Duplex motor/Duplex 2 motor reverse rotation
(122mm/s)
9-4
16
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item
Duplex motor RPM setting
Duplex
Operation
16-0
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item
Operation/procedure
Enter the set value with the 10-key.
When the duplex motor setting is made, the duplex 2motor is also set
accordingly.
Setting range
Default
Operation/procedure
2. When 1: YES is selected, U2 trouble is canceled.
(When 2: NO is selected, the simulation is canceled.)
1-13
5
9-5
17
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Adjustment
Used to adjust the timing of switching from normal
rotation to reverse rotation or from reverse rotation to
normal rotation of the duplex motor.
Operation/procedure
1. Touch the item to set.
1
2
3
4
Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)

Used to cancel the self-diag U2 trouble.
Trouble
Error
Item
145mm/s
122mm/s
RIGHT 145mm/s
RIGHT 122mm/s
Installation range
18-76
Item
Operation/Procedure
21
21-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item
Used to check the operation of the toner motor and its
control circuit.
Image process
Operation
Operation/procedure
Press the [START] key and operate the toner motor for 30 sec.
14
Setting
Used to set the maintenance cycle.
Specifications
Counter
Operation/procedure
Content
Item
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
26cpm
5K
10K
20K
25K
50K
75K (Default)
FREE
31cpm
5K
10K
50K
75K
100K
150K (Default) *
FREE
* When selecting 150K, maintenance message is displayed by implementing the following conditions.
14-0
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Cancel (Trouble, etc)

Used to cancel the self diag PF trouble.
Trouble
Error
2. When 1: YES is selected, PF trouble is canceled. (When 2: NO

is selected, the simulation is canceled.)
10-0
Section
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item
Default
18
18
50
50
10
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
17-0
Maintenance count = 150K.
Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)

Used to cancel excluding the self-diag U2/PF troubles.
Trouble
Error
DV count = 100K
DR count = 100K
* When maintenance message is displayed, replace consumption part
reaching the number of sheets of maintenance, then clear the
replaced part's counter only.
Operation/procedure
2. When 1: YES is selected, troubles other than U2 and PF are canceled. (When 2: NO is selected, the simulation is canceled.)
(Jam cause code)
22
22-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check

(display/print)
Used to check the counter value of each section.
Counter
Operation/procedure
Each counter is displayed.
TOTAL
MAINTENANCE
DEVE
DRUM
COPY
PRINTER
IMC
DUPLEX
OTHERS
FAX SEND
FAX RCV
FAX OUTPUT
DEVE RANGE
DRUM RANGE
DEVE ROLL
DRUM ROLL
DEVE LIFE
DRUM LIFE
Total counter
Maintenance counter
Developer counter
Drum counter
Copy counter
Printer counter
IMC counter
Duplex counter
The other counters
FAX Send counter
FAX receive counter
FAX print counter
Developer traveling distance counter
Drum traveling distance counter
Developer rotation counter (K)
Drum rotation counter (K)
Developer life meter (%)
Drum life meter (%)
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Jam contents
1st tray pick-up miss
2nd tray pick-up miss
3rd tray pick-up miss
4th tray pick-up miss
Multi manual feed pick-up miss
Paper-in sensor lead edge jam
Paper-in sensor rear edge jam
Paper-in sensor reverse jam
Duplex sensor lead edge jam
Duplex sensor rear edge jam
PS time out jam
Right paper exit lead edge jam
Right paper exit rear edge jam
Upper tray paper exit lead edge jam
Upper tray paper exit rear edge jam
Lower tray paper exit lead edge jam
Lower tray paper exit rear edge jam
Abnormality between PS papers.
2nd paper pass lead edge jam
2nd paper pass rear edge jam
3rd paper pass lead edge jam
3rd paper pass rear edge jam
4th paper pass lead edge jam
4th paper pass rear edge jam
Duplex short scale error
Finisher entry port sensor not-reached jam
Finisher entry port sensor remaining jam
Finisher paper exit remaining jam
Finisher staple jam
22-4
22-2
Purpose
Item
TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
BPT
PPD1_ND
PPD1_ST
PPD1_DUP
PPD2_ND
PPD2_ST
PPD_PRI
POD3_ND
POD3_ST
POD2_ND
POD2_ST
POD1_ND
POD1_ST
PINT_SHORT
PFD2_ND
PFD2_ST
PFD3_ND
PFD3_ST
PFD4_ND
PFD4_ST
SIZE_SHORT
FPPD1_N
FPPD1_S
FSTPD_S
FSTPLJ

(display/print)
Used to check the total numbers of misfeed and
troubles. (When the number of misfeed is considerably
great, it is judged as necessary for repair. The misfeed
rate is obtained by dividing this count value with the
total counter value.)
Trouble
Operation/procedure
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

(display/print)
Used to check the total trouble (self diag) history.
Trouble
Operation/procedure
The trouble error codes are displayed in the sequence of the latest one
first. Max. 40 items of information are stored. (Older ones are deleted
in sequence.) The machine condition can be estimated by this data.
Each counter data are displayed.

PAPER JAM
SPF JAM
TROUBLE
JAM counter
RSPF JAM counter
Trouble counter
22-5
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
The counter display is in 7 digits.

22-3
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Adjustment/Setting/Check
Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section).
Software
Operation/procedure
(display/print)
Used to check the misfeed positions and the number of
misfeed at each position. (When the number of
misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as
necessary for repair.)
Trouble
Mis-feed
Operation/procedure
The misfeed history is displayed in the sequence of recentness by the
name of sensors and detectors. Max. 40 items of information can be
stored in memory. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.) The trouble
section may be determined by the data.
Used to display the ROM version of each section.

[Display example]
ROM version 1.250 [1.25] (up to 2 decimal places)
The display of the protocol monitor and the soft SW follows this display.
S/N
Machine serial number
MCU
Main Control Unit
IMC
IMC
OPE
Panel + Panel label code
PRINTER
PRINTER
NIC
NIC
FINISHER
FINISHER
FAX
FAX
If it is not installed, - - - - - - - - - - is displayed.

Panel
display
JPN
EFS
EEU
NEU
Destination
Japan
SEC
SECL
SUK
SCA/SCNZ
Distributor
area
SEEG/
SEA/East
Europe,
etc.
SEF/
SEES/
SEIS/SEN,
etc.
CHN
SOCC
TWN
Taiwan
ARB
Saudi
Arabia
FAS
Iran
Panel software support language

Japanese, American English, English
American English, English, French, Spanish,

Brazilian Portuguese
22-7
Purpose
User data output/Check (Display/Print)
Function
(Purpose)
Used to display of the administrator password.
Item
Data
User data
Operation/procedure
Used to display the administrator password.
English, German, Polish, Czech, Hungarian,

Greek, Turkish, Russian, French, Italian,
Slovak
English, German, French, Spanish, Dutch,
Italian, Portuguese, Swedish, Norwegian,
Finnish, Danish
22-8
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

(display/print)
Used to display the original, staple counter.
Counter
Operation/procedure
Simplified Chinese, American English,
English, Japanese
Traditional Chinese (Local support),
American English, English
American English, English, French, Spanish,
Hebrew (Local support), Arabic
English, Arabic, Persian, American English,
French, Spanish
Each counter is displayed.

SPF
SCAN
STAPLE
RSPF counter
Scan counter
Stapler counter
22-9
Purpose
22-6
(display/print)
Used to print each system setting, the account
information, and the machine adjustment values.
Data
Setting/adjustment data
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Operation/Procedure
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

(display/print)
Used to check the number of use of each paper feed
section. (the number of prints)
Paper feed
Counter
Operation/procedure
Used to display each paper feed counter.
(Initial screen)
The currently set value is highlighted beside the adjustment item.
1. Select the adjustment item with the 10-key.
The display is shifted to the copy menu and the set value is stored.
3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density.
BYPASS
TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
Manual feed counter

Tray 1 counter
Tray 2 counter
Tray 3 counter
Tray 4 counter

Copying is started.
After canceling a jam (After picking up, the [C] key is invalid.)
When the other information is repeatedly printed, the display may show
the message, Remove original from original table. However, the
operation is performed normally.
Item
Content
22-10
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

(display/print)
Used to check the system configulation.
Specifications
Option
ALL
All lists group print (Default)
SYSTEM SETTING
System setting information list
Operation/procedure
ACCOUNTING
COUNTERS
List of total number of prints
The detected machine composition is displayed.

(The job separator cannot be detected. Based on SIM 26-1 setting.)
AUDITOR NO.
Department number list
MACHINE SIM
SETTING
Machine simulation setting list
FAX SIM SETTING*1
FAX simulation setting list (Only when

the FAX board is installed. The display
does not go to the print data transfer
display, but to the FAX SIM menu.)
* When the IMC board is not installed, key input is disabled.

* Duplex print cannot be made.
* For the FAX SIM setting list, the display and the operating procedures differ.
Note: When the simulation is canceled, the display returns to the original state but the machine is not reset.
Item
SPEED
DF
OUTPUT
CASETTE1
CASETTE2
IMC MEM
PRINTER
PS3
NIC
SCANNER
FAX
FAX MEM
HAND SET
USB HOST
Display items
26CPM/31CPM
NONE/[1: RSPF]
NONE/[2: Finisher]/[3: Job separator]
NONE/[4: One-step paper feed unit]
NONE/[5: Two-step paper feed unit]
NONE/Expansion memory capacity (MB)
NONE/[6: PRINTER]
NONE/[7: PS3]
NONE/[8: NIC]
NONE/[9: SCANNER]
NONE/[10: FAX]
NONE/Memory capacity (MB)
NONE/[11: Handset]
NONE/USB HOST
Item
ICCARDR/W
Display items
Error code
NONE/MX-ECX2
Name
Sensor name
NONE: When it is not installed, - - - - - - - - - - is displayed.

[ ]: Shows the product code in the list below.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Item
ORG_LONG
Model code
RSPF
Finisher
Job separator
1 tray paper feed unit
2 tray paper feed unit
PRINTER
PS3
NIC
SCANNER
FAX
Handset
MX-RP10
MX-FN13
MX-TR11
MX-DE10 (*1)
MX-DE11 (*1)
MX-PB12
MX-PK10
STANDARD (Only SoftNic)
MX-NSX1
AR-FX7
AR-HN4
*1: The number of installed units is displayed beside the model code.
For the tray, only the option tray is displayed.
22-11
(display/print)
Used to display the FAX send/receive counter
(FAX reception and print counter).
FAX
Counter
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
RSPF long size

error
Operation/procedure
SPF P-OUT
sensor
SPF P-IN
sensor
Paper Reached/
Not Reached to
the sensor
Reached
Reached
22-13
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

(display/print)
Specifications
Operation/Procedure
Item
00
01
02
03
04
05
99
Content
Not fixed.
AR-A
AR-B
AR-C
China
Japan
Conversion completed.
22-19
Used to display the FAX send/receive counter.

FAX SEND PAGE/TIME
FAX RECEIVE PAGE/TIME
FAX OUTPUT
FAX send page and time

FAX receive page and time
FAX output (number of print)

Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

(display/print)
Used to display the scanner counter in the network
scanner mode.
Network scanner
Counter
Operation/procedure
Used to display the scanner counter.
22-12
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

(display/print)
Used to check the misfeed positions and the number of
misfeed at each position.
(When the number of misfeed is considerably great, it
can be judged as necessary for repair.)
RSPF
Trouble
Misfeed
Operation/procedure
Used to display the RSPF jam history data sequentially from the latest
one.
Forty RSPF jam histories are displayed sequentially from the latest.
Error code
Name
Sensor name
RSPF paper in lead

edge jam
RSPF paper in rear
edge jam
SPF P-IN
sensor
SPF P-IN
sensor
RDD_ND
RSPF paper out

lead edge jam
SPF P-IN
sensor
RDD_ST
RSPF paper out

rear edge jam
SPF P-OUT
sensor
JAM_REV
RSPF duplex
reverse jam
SPF P-IN
sensor
ORG_SHORT
RSPF short size

error
SPF P-IN
sensor
DFD_ND
DFD_ST
Paper Reached/
Not Reached to
the sensor
SCANMODE
Scanner mode counter
24
24-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Data clear
Used to clear the misfeed counter, the misfeed history,
the trouble counter, and the trouble history. (The
counters are cleared after completion of maintenance.)
Memory
Counter
Operation/procedure
Not Reached
Jam/trouble counter is cleared individually. (The history of each

counter is deleted when clearing)
Reached
1. Select the counter to be cleared with the 10-key.
Reached,
P_OUT Not
Reached
Reached, P_IN
passed (OFF)
Not Reached
(Paper after
reversing)
Passed (OFF at
JAM)

The confirmation menu is shown.
3. Select 1: YES.
1: YES (Cleared)
2: NO (Not cleared) (Default)
1
2
3
Item
JAM
SPF JAM
TROUBLE
Content
JAM counter/JAM history
RSPF JAM counter/RSPF JAM history
Trouble counter/Trouble history
24-5
24-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Data clear
Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints)
of each paper feed section.
Paper feed
Counter
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Operation/procedure
Item
Used to clear each paper feed counter individually.
Data clear
Used to reset the developer counter. (The developer
counter of the DV unit which is installed is reset.)
Image process
Counter
Developer
Operation/procedure
2. Press the [START] key. The confirmation menu is shown.
After execution of SIM25-2, this counter is cleared.

3. Select 1: YES.
1: YES (Cleared)
1
2
3
4
5
Item
BYPASS
TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
2. Select 1: YES.
1: YES (Cleared)
Content
Manual feed counter
Tray 1 counter
Tray 2 counter
Tray 3 counter
Tray 4 counter
24-6
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item
24-3
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Data clear
Used to clear the copy counter.
Counter
Copier
Operation/procedure
Data clear
Used to clear the number usage data of the stapler,
RSPF, and scanning.
Transport/Finisher
Counter

2. Select 1: YES.
1: YES (Cleared)
Operation/procedure
Used to clear the original and staple counters individually.
24-7
Purpose

Function
(Purpose)
3. Select 1: YES.
1: YES (Cleared)
1
2
3
Item
SPF
SCAN
STAPLE
Section
Content
Item
RSPF counter
Scan counter
Stapler counter
Operation/procedure
2. Select 1: YES.
24-4
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item
Data clear
Used to clear the OPC drum (membrane decrease)
correction counter. (This simulation is executed when
the OPC drum is replaced.)
Image process
Photo conductor
Counter
Data clear
Used to reset the maintenance counter.
Counter
Operation/procedure
1. Press the [START] key. The confirmation menu is shown.
2. Select 1: YES.
1: YES (Cleared)
1: YES (Cleared)
24-9
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Data clear
Used to clear the printer counter and other counters.
Printer
Counter
Printer
Operation/procedure
3. Select 1: YES.
1: YES (Cleared)
1
2
3
4
Item
PRINTER
IMC
DUPLEX
OTHERS
Content
Printer counter
IMC counter
DUPLEX counter
The other counters
25-2
24-10
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item
Data clear
FAX counter data clear
FAX
Counter
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Setting
Used to make the initial setting of toner concentration
when replacing developer.
Image process
Section
Operation/procedure
1. Select a counter to be cleared with the 10 key.
Operation/procedure
2. Select 1: YES.
After execution, the developer counter is cleared.

1) Open the cover with the power OFF.
1: YES (Cleared)
1
2
3
Item
FAX SEND
(PAGE & TIME)
FAX RECEIVE
(PAGE & TIME)
FAX OUTPUT
2) Turn on the power. (Since the cover is open, the machine does not
perform initializing.)
Content
FAX send page and time
3) Execute the simulation.

4) Enter SIM 25-2. ([25] [START] key [2] [START] key)
FAX receive page and time
5) Close the cover just before starting the simulation.

FAX output (number of prints)
The main motor rotates. After stirring for 3 min, the toner density
control sensor value is sampled 16 times, and the average value is
stored.
24-15
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Data clear
Used to clear the scanner counter in the network
scanner mode.
Scanner section
Counter
When EE-EU or EE-EL after completion, an error display is shown.

Note: After completion of execution, be sure to press the [CA] key to
cancel the simulation.
Operation/procedure
26

26-1
2. Select 1: YES.
Purpose
1: YES (Cleared)
The scanner mode counter and the number of send of the scanner are
cleared.
* The simulation to perform communication with the PCL is inhibited
until Notice Page storing is completed. (Only when the serviceman
call error occurs.)
* When in other than the serviceman call error, entering the simulation
is not allowed from the system check display.
Setting
Used to set whether the job separator is installed or
not. (Since this cannot be detected by hardware
detection, it is set in this simulation.)
Specifications
Option
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Operation/procedure
1. Select the set value with the 10-key.
Set value
0
1
Connection option
None (default)
Job separator provided.
25
26-2
25-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Used to check the operation of the main drive
(excluding the scanner section) and to check the
operation of the toner concentration sensor. (The toner
concentration sensor output can be monitored.)
DRIVE
Operation
Operation/procedure
The main motor rotates to start monitoring the toner density control
sensor. (3min operation)
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Setting
Used to set whether the automatic detection of paper
size is made or not.
Paper feed
Specifications
Operation/procedure
1. Select the item with the 10-key and press the [START] key.
Used to set the automatic size detection.
2. Set whether automatic detection of paper size is made or not with
the 10-key.
1:B4/LG,FC
* Even in toner end error, if there is no other error (including cover

open) after turning on the power, this simulation can be performed.
2:A4<->LT
Setting to detect B4/Legal as FC

0: B4 legal is detected as B4 legal. (Default)
1: B4 legal is detected as FC.
This setup detects Letter as A4 in the inch series and
A4 as Letter in the AB series.
0: Detection disable (Default)
1: Detection valid
8.5 x 13 detection valid/invalid setup

Set value
0
1
Setup
Detection invalid
Detection valid
Remarks
Default
Operation/procedure
Detection size when 8.5 x 13 document/paper is used.

Employed
unit
Docu
ment
Destina
tion
Document
size
AB
series
FC
(8.5 x 13)
LG
(8.5 x 14)
Document
table/
RSPF
Inch
series
Paper
Manual
paper feed
tray
Inch
series
B4
B4
B4
FC
(8.5 x 13)
LG
(8.5 x 14)
LG
(8.5 x 14)
LG
(8.5 x 14)
WLT
(11 x 17)
All
destina
tions
AB
series
0
(Invalid)
B4
B4
Machine
paper feed
tray
Set value
1
(Valid)
FC
(8.5 x 13)
FC
(8.5 x 13)
FC
(8.5 x 13)
FC
(8.5 x 13)
FC
(8.5 x 13)
WLT
(11 x 17)
Select the mode corresponding to the auditor specification mode with

the 10-key.
Item
Content
P10
Built-in auditor mode
VENDOR
Coin vendor mode
OTHER
Others
Setting
range
Default
0-2
When 1: VENDOR (Coin vendor mode) is set, the following three

items of system setting are changed.
1) Set the LCD backlight change inhibit to 1: OFF (Enable).
2) When SIM 26-6 destination setting is set to 0: Japan, duplex copy
inhibit setting must be set to 0: ON (Inhibit).
3) Set the sort automatic selection to 0: OFF (Disable).
Set with system setting.
FC
(8.5 x 13)
LG
(8.5 x 14)
B4
FC
(8.5 x 13)
LG
(8.5 x 14)
B4
LG
(8.5 x 14)
LG
(8.5 x 14)
B4
LG
(8.5 x 14)
LG
(8.5 x 14)
B4
FC
(8.5 x 13)
FC
(8.5 x 13)
B4
FC
(8.5 x 13)
FC
(8.5 x 13)
B4
26-5
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Setting
Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the
maintenance counter.
Specifications
Counter
Operation/procedure
Used to set the count up number (1 or 2) when an A3/WLT paper
passes through.
A4/LT (8.5 x 11) detection enable/disable setup
For the drum counter and the developer counter, double count is
employed unconditionally.
In the inch series, Letter is detected as A4; in the AB series, A4 is

detected as Letter.
(Target counter selection)
Set value
0
1
Setup
Detection invalid
Detection valid
Remarks
Default
Detection size when A4/LT (8.5 x 11) document/paper is used.

Employed
unit
Docu
ment
Paper
Document
table/
RSPF
Machine
paper feed
tray
Manual
paper feed
tray
Destina
tion
AB
series
Inch
series
All
destina
tions
All
destina
tions
LT
(8.5 x 11)
Set value
0
1
(Invalid)
(Valid)
LT
A4
(8.5 x 11)
LT
A4
(8.5 x 11)
LT
A4
(8.5 x 11)
LT
A4
(8.5 x 11)
Set with system setting.
Document
size
A4
LT
(8.5 x 11)
A4
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Content
TOTAL COUNTER
Total counter
MAINTENANCE COUNTER
Maintenance counter
Used to set the count up number of the selected counter.

Item
Content
SINGLE COUNT
Single count
DOUBLE COUNT
Double count
Setting range
Default
1-2
26-6
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Setting
Used to set the specifications depending on the
destination.
Specifications
Destination
Operation/procedure
Select the destination with the 10-key.
Regardless of the
simulation setup.
26-3
Purpose
Item
1
Setting
Used to set the specifications of the auditor.
Setting must be made depending on the use condition
of the auditor.
Auditor
Specifications
By changing the destination, some other setting items may be changed.

Item
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
JAPAN
SEC
SECL
SEEG
SUK
SCA
SEF
INEG
ABEG
INEF
ABEF
CHINESE
TAIWAN
SEEG2
TAIWAN2
Content
Japan
SEC
SECL
SEEG
SUK
SCA
SEF
EX inch series
EX AB series
EX inch series (FC)
EX AB series (FC)
China
Taiwan AB
SEEG2
Taiwan China
Setting
range
Default
0-14
26-12
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Setting
Used to input the Software Key for E-MAIL RIC.
E-MAIL RIC
Specifications
Operation/procedure
The current setup is displayed with ON or OFF.
Enter an input (20 digits) of the E-MAIL RIC soft key with the 10-key
and press the [START] key, and the collating result is displayed with
OK or NG.
After canceling the simulation, if OK, the E-MAIL RIC function is
enable; if NG, the E-MAIL RIC function is disabled.
This setting must be reset after the simulation cancel.
26-14
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Item
PORTUGUESE
TURKISH
GREEK
POLISH
HUNGARIAN
CZECH
RUSSIAN
FINNISH
NORWEGIAN
DANISH
CHINESE
TAIWANESE
SLOVAK
HEBREW
BRAZILIAN
23
PORTUGUESE
24 ARABIC
25 FARSI
Remarks
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Traditional Chinese supported locally

Supported locally
Setting
Used to input the Software Key for the PS extention kit.
26-30
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Printer
Specifications
Operation/procedure
Setting
Used to set ON/OFF of the heater lamp slow-up control
conforming to the CE mark control.
Specifications
Operation mode (Common)
The current setup is displayed with ON or OFF.
Operation/procedure
Enter an input (20 digits) of the PS expansion kit soft key with the 10key and press the [START] key, and the collating result is displayed
with OK or NG.
Input the set value with the 10-key and press the [START] key.
This setup varies in connection with SIM 26-6 (Destination setup).
After canceling the simulation, if OK, the PS expansion kit function is

enable; if NG, the PS expansion kit function is disabled.
0
1
This setting must be reset after the simulation cancel.

Note: Executable only when the PCL/PS3 is installed.
26-18
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Others
OFF
ON
Purpose
Used to set enable/disable of toner save operation.

Specifications
Operation mode (Common)
Item
Content
Disable
Enable
Function
(Purpose)
Item
OFF
ON
Default
U.S.A, Canada, Australia, France, Taiwan
26-35
Setting
Operation/procedure
0
1
Item
Setup
Used to set whether the same continuous troubles are
displayed as one trouble or the series of troubles with
SIM 22-4 when the same troubles occur continuously.
Specifications
Operation/procedure
Setting
range
Default
0-1
Enter the set value with 10-key, and press [START] key.
Item
0 ONCE
1 ANY
Content
When two or more troubles occur, only one is
registered.
All the troubles occurred are registered.
Default
26-22
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Setting
Used to set the specification (language display) for the
destination.
Specifications
Operation/procedure
Select the display language with the 10-key, and press the [START]
key.
Item
Remarks
0 JAPANESE
1 ENG.US
2 ENG.UK
3 FRENCH
4 GERMAN
5 ITALY
6 DUTCH
7 SWEDISH
8 SPANISH
26-36
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Setting
when the maintenance counter life is expired.
Operation
Operation/procedure
0
1
Item
STOP
NON STOP
Content
Stop
Non stop
Default
1
26-37
26-57
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Setting
when the developer counter life is expired.
Operation
Operation/procedure
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item
Operation/procedure
Item
STOP
NON STOP
0
1
Setting
Used to set the model code.
Operation
Content
Stop
Non stop
Item
AR-5726
AR-5731
1
2
Default
1
26-60
26-38
Purpose
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Setting
when the drum counter life is expired.
Operation
Operation/procedure
Item
STOP
NON STOP
0
1
Content
Stop
Non stop
Setting
Used to set enable/disable of the FAX mode key when
FAX is not installed. (When FAX is installed, the FAX
mode is enabled regardless of this setup.)
Operation
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Operation/procedure
Default
Content
Default
U.S.A, Canada,
U.K., Australia
Effective (The message with

FAX uninstalled is displayed.)
Disable (Error Beep)
Item
26-50
ON
OFF
Setting
Used to set ON/OFF of the black and white reversion
function.
Operation
Operation/procedure
Enter the set value with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
Item
ON
OFF
Content
Enable
Disable
Default
1 (U.K.)
0 (Others)
26-56
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item
Setting
Gamma life correction setting
Operation
Operation/procedure
Sets enable/disable of the gamma life correction function.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
0
1
Others
Item
AE (Japan)
AE (Ex Japan)
Text
Text/Photo
Photo (Error diffusion)
Photo (Dither)
T/S AE (Japan)
T/S AE (Ex Japan)
T/S Text
T/S Text/Photo
Set value
0: Disable
1: Enable
Default
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
30-2
26-71
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Setting
In the power save time setting, the pre-heat (pre-heat
mode setting) and the auto power shut off time can be
set to the short time setup (pre-heat: 1 min, auto power
shut off: 1 min) and the long time setup (pre-heat:
5min, auto power shut off: 30min).
Operation/procedure
Select the short time setup or the long time setup of the pre-heat time
and the auto power shut off time with the 10-key, and press the
[START] key.
Item
1
2
Content
Preheat: 1min, auto power shut off: 1min
Preheat: 5min, auto power shut off: 30min
Default
1
Note: When the sub code 71 is entered to display the setting menu,the
default values are always displayed. (However,the default time is
not always set.)
26-72
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Setting
The letterhead support is set.
When Letterhead paper setting is selected, the set
value of SIM 26-46 (Image output direction setting) is
set to Setting Enable accordingly.
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Used to display the status of the sensors attached to
the standard tray and the manual feed tray. (Use SIM
4-2 for the option trays.)
The sensor of an uninstalled tray is not displayed.
Paper feed
Operation
Operation/procedure
PED1
LUD1
CD1
PED2
LUD2
CD2
PFD2
DSWR2
MPED
MPLS1
MPLS2
MPLD1
MPLD2
1st tray paper empty sensor

1st tray paper upper limit detection sensor
1st tray empty sensor
2nd tray paper empty sensor
2nd tray paper upper limit detection sensor
2nd tray empty sensor
2nd tray paper pass sensor
2nd tray right door detection sensor
Manual tray paper empty detection
Manual tray length detection 1
Manual feed paper length detection 1
Width detection size of the manual feed tray (one of them is displayed.)
Operation/procedure
A4/A3, LT/WLT, B5/B4, INV/LTR, A5/A4R, B5R, POSTCARD, EXTRA,

8K/16K
(At detection, highlighted)
Item
0
1
Content
OFF
ON
Setting
range
Default
0-1
Letterhead paper is not set.

Letterhead paper is set.
40
40-1
30
30-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Used to display the sensor status attached to the
machine.
Others
Operation
Operation/procedure
PPD1H
PPD1L
PPD2
POD1
DVCH
DRST
DSWR1
SFTHP
POD2
TOPF
DSWR0
LOEMP
DUP2
POD3
PTOPF
PS paper detection 1 sensor

PS paper detection 2 sensor
Fusing paper sensor
1st paper exit paper out sensor
Developing cartridge detection sensor
Drum intial detection sensor
Interlock switch (side door)
Shifter home position sensor
2nd paper exit paper out sensor
2nd paper exit full detection sensor
2nd paper exit cover open/close detection sensor
1st paper exit empty detection sensor
Reverse path paper sensor
Right paper exit sensor
Right paper exit full sensor
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Used to check the sensor of the machine manual feed
tray.
Paper feed
Operation
Operation/procedure
MPLS1
MPLS2
MPLD1
MPLD2

Width detection size of the manual feed tray (one of them is displayed.)
A4/A3, LT/WLT, B5/B4, INV/LTR, A5/A4R, B5R, POSTCARD, EXTRA,
8K/16K
40-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Adjustment
Used to adjust the manual paper feed tray paper width
detector detection level.
Paper feed
Operation
Operation/procedure
The adjustment method is of the 4-point system. Set the guide to Max.
(A3/WLetter) position, A4R/Letter R position, A5R/Invoice R position,
and Min. position for adjustment.
1) Set A3/W Letter and fit the guide, then press the [START] key.
2) Set A4R/LetterR and fit the guide, then press the [START] key.
3) Set to A5R/INVOICE R and fit the guide, then press the [START]
key.
4) Narrow the guide at minimum, press the [START] key.
5) Set the paper detection width (+), and press the [START] key.
6) Set the paper detection width (), and press the [START] key.
41-3
If FAILED is displayed in procedure 1), 2), 3), or 4), it is NG of adjustment. Repeat the adjustment.
Purpose
Middle position adjustment L

Middle position adjustment S
Yes
No
Yes
No
Function
(Purpose)
MID-L ADJ.ON
MID-L ADJ.OFF
NID-S ADJ.ON
MID-S ADJ.OFF
Section
Item
Used to check the light reception level and the
detection level of the original size detection photo
sensor.
Others
Operation
Operation/procedure
The detection output level of each sensor is displayed in real time.
40-3
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Adjustment
The AD conversion value of manual feed width
detection is displayed.
Paper feed
Operation
Operation/procedure
The AD conversion value of manual feed width detection is displayed.
OCSW
1 to 5
Original cover state

Open: Highlighted display
Close: Normal display
PD sensor detection level (Hexadecimal display)
The value in [ ] shows the threshold value of 20 degree detection

adjustment. (Hexadecimal display)
For AB series, 1 to 5 is displayed, for inch series, 1 to 4.
41-4
41
41-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Used to check the document size detection photo
sensor.
Others
Operation
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
The detection output level of each sensor is displayed in real time.
The operation status of the sensors and detectors in the original size
detection section are displayed. The active sensors and detectors are
highlighted.
1 to 5
PD1 to 5
Others
Operation
Set the OC cover at 20 degrees detection and press the [START] key.
OCSW
OCSW
Used to adjust the detection level of OC 20 degrees.
Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure

Original sensor status
Without original: Normal display
With original: Highlighted display
Adjustment

The value in [ ] shows the threshold value of 20 degree detection

adjustment. (Hexadecimal display)
During execution, [EXECUTING] is highlighted.
For AB series, PD1 to 5 is displayed, for inch series, PD1 to 4.
43
43-1
41-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Adjustment
Used to adjust the detection level of the document size
photo sensor.
Others
Operation
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Setting
Used to set the fusing temperature.
Fixing (Fusing)
Operation
Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure
Place an A3 (or WLT) document on the document table, and press

[START] key with the OC cover open.
1. Touch the item to be set.

The adjustment is performed and the result is displayed.

OCSW
1 to 5
Item

The value in [ ] shows the threshold value. (Hexadecimal display)

During execution of the simulation, EXECUTING is displayed.

3
Ready
Temp Main
(145)
Ready
Temp Sub
(145)
Ready
Temp Main
(122)
Ready
Temp Sub
(122)
Content
Ready
temperature Main
(145mm/s)
Ready
temperature Sub
(145mm/s)
Ready
temperature Main
(122mm/s)
Ready
temperature Sub
(122mm/s)
Setting
range
Default
(Others) (Europe)
150 220
185
190
150 220
180
185
150 220
175
180
150 220
170
175
Item
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
WarmUp
Target Main
(145)
WarmUp
Target Sub
(145)
WarmUp
Target Main
(122)
WarmUp
Target Sub
(122)
WarmUp
Temp Main
(145)
WarmUp
Temp Sub
(145)
WarmUp
Temp Main
(122)
WarmUp
Temp Sub
(122)
600dpi
Main (145)
600dpi Sub
(145)
POST
CARD
Main (145)
POST
CARD Sub
(145)
CARDBOA
RD Main
(145)
CARDBOA
RD Sub
(145)
600dpi
Main (122)
600dpi Sub
(122)
CARDBOA
RD Main
(122)
POST
CARD Sub
(122)
POST
CARD
(122mm/s)
CARDBOA
RD Sub
(122)
Content
Warmup target
temperature Main
(145mm/s)
Warmup target
temperature Sub
(145mm/s)
Warmup target
temperature Main
(122mm/s)
Warmup target
temperature Sub
(122mm/s)
Warmup
complete
temperature Main
(145mm/s)
Warmup
complete
temperature Sub
(145mm/s)
Warmup
complete
temperature Main
(122mm/s)
Warmup
complete
temperature Sub
(122mm/s)
600dpi Main
(145mm/s)
600dpi Sub
(145mm/s)
Postcard Main
(145mm/s)
Postcard Sub
(145mm/s)
Thick paper Main
(145mm/s)
Thick paper Sub
(145mm/s)
Setting
range
Default
(Others) (Europe)
150 220
180
190
150 220
180
190
43-10
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Setting
Used to set the paper feed cycle timing when printing
postcards.
Paper feed
Operation
Operation/procedure
150 220
175
150 220
170
Setting range
Default
1-99
50
44
0 - 40
10
44-1
0 - 40
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
15
Section
0 - 40
Item
10
Setting
Used to make various setups in each mode of process
control.
Image process
Operation
Operation/procedure
0 - 40
150 220
150 220
Item
ENVIRONMENT
1
ADJ.
15
190
195
190
195
150 220
200
150 220
200
Content
Environmental correction Allow/
Inhibit (0: Inhibit, 1: Allow)
Duplex print correction Allow/
2 DUPLEX PRINT ADJ.
Inhibit (0: Inhibit, 1: Allow)
Transfer current enviroment
ENVIROMENT ADJ
3
correction Allow/Innibit
(TC)
(0: Inhibit, 1: Allow)
Default
1
0
0
44-2
150 220
200
150 220
200
Purpose
Setting
Function
(Purpose)
Drum life correction setting
Section
Image process (Photoconductor)
Item
Operation
Operation/procedure
1. Select an item with 10-key, and press [START] key.
600dpi Main
(122mm/s)
600dpi Sub
(122mm/s)
Postcard Main
(122mm/s)
Postcard Sub
(122mm/s)
Thick paper Main
(122mm/s)
Thick paper Sub
(122mm/s)
150 220
150 220
175
185
175
185
Item
1
150 220
190
150 220
190
150 220
150 220
2. Enter the setting value, and press [START] key.
190
GRIDBIAS
ADJUST
Content
Drum life correction Disable/
Enable
(0: Disable, 1: Enable)
Default
44-3
Purpose
Setting
Function
(Purpose)
Used to set the DV count correction.
Section
Image process
Item
Operation
190
Operation/procedure
Item
1. Select an item with 10-key, and press [START] key.

2. Enter the setting value, and press [START] key.
Item
1
PR_LIFE_ADJUST
TN_LIFE_ADJUST
RATE_ADJUST
TONER_ADJUST
Content
DV count correction Disable/
Enable
Life of toner control DV
correction Disable/Enable
Printing rate correction
Disable/Enable
Toner unconditionally supply
correction Disable/Enable
Default
1
44-9
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/Check

(Display/Print)
Function
(Purpose)
Used to display the process control correction

information.
Section
Image process
Item
Operation
Operation/procedure
Used to display the process control correction information.
44-14
Purpose

(Display/Print)
Function
(Purpose)
Used to display the environment (temperature,

humidity) correction information.
Item
Operation
Operation/procedure
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
465001 - 857313
857314 - 1714625
1714626 - 2571938
2571939 - 3429250
3429251 - 4286563
4286564 - 5143875
5143876 - 6001188
6001189 - 6858500
6858501 - 7715813
7715814 - 8573125
8573126 - 9430438
9430439 - 10287750
10287751 - 11145063
11145064 - 12002375
12002376 0 - 93000
93001 - 186000
186001 - 279000
279001 - 372000
372001 - 465000
465001 - 857313
857314 - 1714625
1714626 - 2571938
2571939 - 3429250
3429251 - 4286563
4286564 - 5143875
5143876 - 6001188
6001189 - 6858500
6858501 - 7715813
7715814 - 8573125
8573126 - 9430438
9430439 - 10287750
10287751 - 11145063
11145064 - 12002375
12002376 -
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
Setting
range
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
Default
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
The following data are displayed.

TH AREA
Current environment area
TMP DATA
Detection temperature of sensor (C)
HUD DATA
Detection humidity of sensor (%)
44-17
Purpose
* The value before entry of SIM is displayed. (It is not revised in real
time.)
If sim entry is just after power turned on, the display value is all 0.
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Operation/procedure
44-16
The following data are displayed. (The displayed value is the previous
print correction value.)
Purpose
Setting
Function
(Purpose)
Used to set the toner density control correction value.
Section
Image process
Item
Operation
TARGET
DEV REF
LIFE
TH
Toner concentration control reference value

Developer adjustment value
Toner container life correction value (SIM 44-16)
Toner container environment correction value
TARGET = DEV REF+(LIFE-50)+(TH-50)
Operation/procedure
Sets the toner density control correction value of the traveling distance
count.
Item
1
2
3
4
5

(Display/Print)
Used to display the toner density control reference
value.
Image process
Operation
0 - 93000
93001 - 186000
186001 - 279000
279001 - 372000
372001 - 465000
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
Setting
range
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
Developer adjustment value 128, life correction 60 (developer adjustment value plus 10), environment correction 45 (5 subtraction correction), rapid toner supply correction = 128+(60-50)+(45-50) = 133.)
Default
45
45
45
45
45
44-34
Item
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Setting
Used to set the transfer current value in each mode.
21 +V1 LABEL (145)

22 +V2 LABEL (145)
Operation/procedure
23

To support an individual necessity in paper and the environment, it is
variable in the range of 5 to 30uA in the increment of 1uA in each mode.
When changing +V2, check with +V1 unchanged. If there is any trouble
in the half tone image of graphics, keep the relationship between +V1
and +V2 at the default and change it.
When the image quality is deteriorated because the user selects the
OHP mode and use other than the recommended OHP, decrease the
transfer current to adjust deterioration of black background picture quality. If some of characters are not printed, increase the transfer current.
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
This setting is changed in linkage with SIM 26-6 destination setting.
31
*1: SECL/SCA/SEF/EX inch series/EX AB series/EX inch series (FC)/

EX AB series (FC)/China/Taiwan/SEEG2
32
*2: SEC/SEEG/SUK
Item
1 +V1F (145)
2 +V1R (145)
3 +V2F (145)
4 +V2R (145)
5 +V1S-F (145)
6 +V1S-R (145)
7 +V2S-F (145)
8 +V2S-R (145)
9 +V1SS-F (145)
10 +V1SS-R (145)
11 +V1SS-F (145)
12 +V1SS-R (145)
13 +V1 THICK (145)
14 +V2 THICK (145)
+V1 THICK S
(145)
+V2 THICK S
16
(145)
15
17 +V1 THIN (145)

18 +V2 THIN (145)
19 +V1 THIN S (145)
20 +V2 THIN S (145)
Content
145mm/s normal paper W
+V1 single surface. Duplex
(Front)
+V1 Duplex (Back)
(Front)
+V2 Duplex (Back)
145mm/s normal paper N1
(Front)
+V1 Duplex (Back)
(Front)
+V2 Duplex (Back)
(Front)
+V1 Duplex (Back)
(Front)
+V2 Duplex (Back)
145mm/s thick paper > LTR
+V1
+V2
145mm/s thick paper t LTR
+V1
+V2
145mm/s thin paper > LTR
+V1
+V2
145mm/s thin paper t LTR
+V1
+V2
Setting Default
range *1 *2
+V1 LABEL S
(145)
+V2 LABEL S
(145)
+V1 OHP (145)
+V2 OHP(145)
+V1 OHP S (145)
+V2 OHP S (145)
+V1 POSTCARD
(145)
+V2 POSTCARD
(145)
+V1 POSTCARD
S (145)
+V2 POSTCARD
S (145)
33 +V1F (122)
5-30
34 +V1R (122)
5-30
35 +V2F (122)
5-30
18 20
36 +V2R (122)
5-30
14 18
37 +V1S-F (122)
5-30
38 +V1S-R (122)
5-30
39 +V2S-F (122)
5-30
18
40 +V2S-R (122)
5-30
18
5-30
5-30
5-30
18
5-30
18
5-30
5-30
14
5-30
5-30
14
5-30
5-30
18
5-30
5-30
18
41 +V1SS-F (122)
42 +V1SS-R (122)
43 +V2SS-F (122)
44 +V2SS-R (122)
45 +V1 THICK (122)
46 +V2 THICK (122)
+V1 THICK S
(122)
+V2 THICK S
48
(122)
47
49 +V1 THIN (122)

50 +V2 THIN (122)
51 +V1 THIN S (122)
52 +V2 THIN S (122)
53 +V1 LABEL (122)
54 +V2 LABEL (122)
Content
145mm/s label paper > LTR
+V1
+V2
145mm/s label paper t LTR
+V1
+V2
145mm/s OHP > LTR +V1
145mm/s OHP t LTR +V1
145mm/s postcard/envelope
> 100mm +V1
> 100mm +V2
t 100mm +V1
t 100mm +V2
(Front)
+V1 Duplex (Back)
(Front)
+V2 Duplex (Back)
(Front)
+V1 Duplex (Back)
(Front)
+V2 Duplex (Back)
+V2 Duplex (Back)
(Front)
+V1 Duplex (Back)
(Front)
+V1
+V2
+V1
+V2
+V1
+V2
+V1
+V2
+V1
+V2
Setting Default
range *1 *2
5-30
5-30
18
5-30
5-30
14
5-30
5-30
5-30
5-30
5
14
5
18
5-30
5-30
26
5-30
5-30
26
5-30
5-30
5-30
12 14
5-30
12
5-30
5-30
5-30
14
5-30
14
5-30
5-30
5-30
14
5-30
14
5-30
5-30
10
5-30
5-30
12
5-30
5-30
12
5-30
5-30
12
5-30
5-30
12
Item
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
Setting Default
range *1 *2
Content
+V1 LABEL S
(122)
+V2 LABEL S
(122)
+V1 OHP (122)
+V2 OHP (122)
+V1 OHP S (122)
+V2 OHP S (122)
+V1 POSTCARD
(122)
+V2 POSTCARD
(122)
+V1 POSTCARD
S (122)
+V2 POSTCARD
S (122)

+V1
+V2
> 100mm +V1
> 100mm +V2
t 100mm +V1
t 100mm +V2
46-9
Purpose
Adjustment
(Text).
Picture quality
Density
5-30
5-30
12
5-30
5-30
5-30
5-30
5
8
5
12
5-30

5-30
16

Use the 10-key to set the exposure level.
5-30
5-30
16

Copying is started.
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Operation/procedure
1. Touch the item to be adjusted.
The adjustment item and the currently set value are highlighted.
(Exposure mode (Text))

Item
44-40
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Setting
Used to set the time from the start of the main motor
rotation (Ready) to the start of toner supply in previous
rotation after turning on the power.
Operation/procedure
Set the toner supply previous rotation time.
Setting range
Default
1-99 (sec)
4 (sec)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
46
14
46-2
15
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Adjustment
Used to set the exposure level in each exposure mode.
Picture quality
17
Density
Operation/procedure
1. Touch the item to be adjusted. (Automatic adjustment)
(Exposure mode)
AE
TEXT
TEXT/PHOTO
PHOTO
AE(TS)
TEXT(TS)
TEXT/PHOTO(TS)
19
1.0 (SHIFT)
1.0 (GAMMA)
2.0 (SHIFT)
2.0 (GAMMA)
3.0 (SHIFT)
3.0 (GAMMA)
4.0 (SHIFT)
4.0 (GAMMA)
5.0 (SHIFT)
5.0 (GAMMA)
TS 1.0
(SHIFT)
1TS 1.0
(GAMMA)
TS 2.0
(SHIFT)
TS 2.0
(GAMMA)
TS 3.0
(SHIFT)
TS 3.0
(GAMMA)
TS 4.0
(SHIFT)
TS 4.0
(GAMMA)
TS 5.0
(SHIFT)
TS 5.0
(GAMMA)
Character level 1.0 (shift qty)

Character level 1.0 (slant)
Character (TS) level 1.0
(shift qty)
(slant)
(shift qty)
(slant)
(shift qty)
(slant)
(shift qty)
(slant)
(shift qty)
(slant)
Setting
range
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
Default
22
44
36
47
50
50
61
55
72
60
1-99
22
1-99
44
1-99
36
1-99
47
1-99
50
1-99
50
1-99
61
1-99
55
1-99
72
1-99
60
Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display returns to the initial
menu but the machine is not reset.

Copying is started.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
18
20

Item
16
Content
46-10
Setting
Default
range
Content
AE
Character
Character/Photo
Photo
AE (TS)
Character (TS)
Character/Photo (TS)
Level 3.0
Level 3.0
Level 3.0
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
1-99
50
Item
Adjustment
(Text/Photo).
Picture quality
Operation/procedure
Level 3.0
Level 3.0
* Except for AE and AE (TS), only Level 3 can be set.


Copying is started.
(Exposure mode (Text/Photo))

Item
Content
1 1.0 (SHIFT)
2 1.0 (GAMMA)
3 2.0 (SHIFT)
4 2.0 (GAMMA)
5 3.0 (SHIFT)
6 3.0 (GAMMA)
7 4.0 (SHIFT)
8 4.0 (GAMMA)
9 5.0 (SHIFT)
10 5.0 (GAMMA)
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
(Exposure mode (Photo))
TS 1.0
(SHIFT)
TS 1.0
(GAMMA)
TS 2.0
(SHIFT)
TS 2.0
(GAMMA)
TS 3.0
(SHIFT)
TS 3.0
(GAMMA)
TS 4.0
(SHIFT)
TS 4.0
(GAMMA)
TS 5.0
(SHIFT)
TS 5.0
(GAMMA)
Character/Photo level 1.0

(shift qty)
(slant)
(shift qty)
(slant)
(shift qty)
(slant)
(shift qty)
(slant)
(shift qty)
(slant)
Character/Photo (TS) level 1.0
(shift qty)
(slant)
(shift qty)
(slant)
(shift qty)
(slant)
(shift qty)
(slant)
(shift qty)
(slant)
Setting
Default
range
Item
1.0(SHIFT)
1.0(GAMMA)
2.0(SHIFT)
2.0(GAMMA)
3.0(SHIFT)
3.0(GAMMA)
4.0(SHIFT)
4.0(GAMMA)
5.0(SHIFT)
5.0(GAMMA)
Setting
range
Default
1-99
16
50
33
50
50
50
56
61
62
66
Photo level 1.0 (shift qty)

Photo level 1.0 (slant)
30
1-99
37
1-99
40
1-99
43
1-99
50
1-99
50
1-99
57
1-99
61
1-99
64
1-99
66
1-99
30
1-99
37
1-99
40
2. Enter the set value of the exposure level with the 10-key, and
press the [#/P] key.
1-99
43

Copying is started and the set value is stored.
1-99
50
1-99
50
1-99
57
1-99
61
1-99
64
1-99
66
46-12
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Adjustment
(1 mode automatic adjustment)
FAX
Image quality
Operation/procedure
1. Select 1: COPY START.
The currently set value is displayed beside the item.
Normal display
NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN
JAM
PAPER EMPTY
Error display
There is no tray selection operation.

The optimum paper tray for the scanned size is selected.
Item
Setting range
Default
1 COPY START
2 FAX EXP.LEVEL
0-99
50
46-13
46-11
Function
(Purpose)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Content
1-99
Purpose
Item
Adjustment
(Photo).
Picture quality
Density
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Adjustment
(Normal mode individual adjustment)
FAX
Image quality
Operation/procedure
The currently set value is highlighted beside the item.
1. Select an item to be adjusted.
Operation/procedure
2. Enter the set value of the exposure level with the 10-key.


Normal display

Error display

Copying is started.
NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN
JAM
PAPER EMPTY

1
2
3
4
Item
COPY START
EXP.LEVEL
AE
MANUAL
Content
Setting range
Copy start
Exposure level selection

Normal text AE
0-99
Normal text MANUAL

Default
50
46-16
46-14
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Adjustment
(Fine text mode individual adjustment)
FAX
Image quality
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Adjustment
(Ultra Fine mode individual adjustment)
FAX
Image quality
Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure
1. Select 1: COPY START.

The currently set value is displayed beside the item.
2. Enter the set value of the exposure level with the 10-key, and
press the [#/P] key.

Normal display
Normal display
NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN
JAM
PAPER EMPTY
Error display
Error display

Item
5
6
Setting
Default
range
Content
COPY START
EXP.LEVEL
AE (PHOTO ON)
AE (PHOTO OFF)
MANUAL
(PHOTO ON)
MANUAL
(PHOTO OFF)
NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN
JAM
PAPER EMPTY
1
2
3
4

Copy start
Fine text AE (Half tone)
Fine text AE
Fine text MANUAL
(Half tone)
0-99
50
Fine text MANUAL

Setting
Item
Content
range
1 COPY START
Copy start
2 EXP.LEVEL
3 AE (PHOTO ON)
Ultra Fine AE (Half tone)
4 AE (PHOTO OFF) Ultra Fine AE
MANUAL
Ultra Fine MANUAL
0-99
5
(PHOTO ON)
(Half tone)
MANUAL
Ultra Fine MANUAL
6
(PHOTO OFF)
46-15
46-18
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Adjustment
(Super Fine mode individual adjustment)
FAX
Image quality
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Adjustment
Used to adjust inclination for each exposure mode.
Picture quality



Set the exposure level with the 10-key.
Copying is started.
NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN
JAM
PAPER EMPTY
(Auto adjustment)
Item

Item
Content
1
2
COPY START
EXP.LEVEL
AE (PHOTO ON)
AE (PHOTO OFF)
MANUAL
(PHOTO ON)
MANUAL
(PHOTO OFF)
Copy start
Super Fine AE
(Half tone)
Super Fine AE
Super Fine MANUAL
(Half tone)
5
6
50

The adjustment item and the current set value are highlighted.
Error display
Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure
Normal display
Default
Setting
range
0-99
Default
50
AE
Character
Character/Photo
Photo
AE(TS)
Character (TS)
Character/Photo
7 TEXT/PHOTO(TS)
(TS)
1
2
3
4
5
6
AE
TEXT
TEXT/PHOTO
PHOTO
AE(TS)
TEXT(TS)
Setting
Default
range
Content
Level 3.0
Level 3.0
Level 3.0
1-99
50
Level 3.0
Level 3.0
Super Fine MANUAL
Note:Executable only when the FAX is installed.
46-31
46-19
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Adjustment
Used to set the control method of the exposure mode.
Picture quality

The display is shifted to the adjustment value entry menu.
3. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the display returns to
the original state (adjustment item selection menu).
4
5
PHOTO MODE
Content
Auto exposure mode*
(1: Priority on Image quality,
2: Priority on toner consumption)
Auto exposure STOP mode
(COPY)
(0: Fixed, 1: Real-time)

Item
AE
TEXT
TEXT/PHOTO
PHOTO
1
2
3
4
Setting range
Default
0-2
Default
Auto exposure STOP mode (FAX)

Auto exposure STOP mode
(SCANNER)
Photo mode
(1: ED (Error diffusion) , 2: DT (Dither))
46-39
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Setting
Used to switch the FAX send image quality.
Enter the set value with the 10-key.

0
Item
0
HAIRLINE
PRINTER
Content
Original with pencil lines
and thin lines
Printed original
Setting range
Default
0-1
* Auto exposure mode

When SIM 26-6 (Destination setup) is changed from EX Japan to
Japan, the setup value becomes 1 (Default: Japan). If, on the contrary, it is changed from Japan to EX Japan, the set value becomes
2 (Default: EX Japan)
If the auto exposure mode setup value is changed, the setup value
of SIM 46-30 (AE limit setup) is reset to the default value.
46-20
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Setting
(Toner save).
Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure
Item
AE MODE
(1:EXPOSURE
2:TONER)
AE STOP(COPY)
(0:FIXED
1:REAL TIME)
AE MODE(FAX)
(0:FIXED
1:REAL TIME)
AE STOP(SCAN)
(0:FIXED
1:REAL TIME)
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Adjustment
Used to set the exposure correction value of SPF/
RSPF for OC exposure.
Picture quality
48
48-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Adjustment
Used to adjust the copy mode magnification ratio
(main scanning direction, sub scanning direction).
Image processing
Picture quality
Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure


3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density, and enter the
adjustment value with the 10-key.

Copying is started.
1
2
Item
SPF EXPOSURE
RSPF EXPOSURE
Content
SPF
RSPF
Setting range
Default
1-99
53
Item
1
F-R
SCAN
SPF (SIDE1)
Operation/procedure
SPF (SIDE2)

DUPLEX
MirSpeed
46-30
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Setting
(Toner save).
If SIM 26-6 (Destination setup) and SIM46-19 (Auto exposure mode)

are changed, this setup is also changed to the default value accordingly.
1
2
Item
AE
AE(TS)
Setting range
Default
0-31
Content
Main scanning magnification
ratio adjustment
Sub scanning magnification
ratio adjustment
RSPF surface sub scan
magnification ratio
RSPF back surface sub scan
magnification ratio
DUPLEX sub scanning
Mirror speed adjustment
Setting
range
Default
50
60
1-99
50
Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display is shifted to the initial menu, but the machine is not reset.
There is no operation of tray selection.
48-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Adjustment
Used to adjust the scanner mode magnification ratio
(main/sub scanning direction).
Image processing
Picture quality
Operation/procedure
3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density, and enter the
adjustment value with the 10-key.
Copying is started.
Content
Setting
range
Default
Main scanning magnification

ratio adjustment
Sub scanning magnification
ratio adjustment
RSPF surface sub scan
magnification ratio
RSPF back surface sub scan
magnification ratio
1-99
50
Item
1
F-R
SCAN
SPF (SIDE1)
SPF (SIDE2)

Even when the SPF/RSPF is selected, if there is no original on the
SPF/RSPF, the OC is scanned.
Even when the OC is selected, if there is any original on the SPF/
RSPF, the SPF/RSPF is scanned. (Setting 2)
Setting
Item
Content
Default
range
1 COPY START
Copy start
SCAN SELECT
Scan selection
2
1-255*
128
(OC/SPF/RSPF)
(OC/ SPF/RSPF)
SCAN Main scanning
3 OC(MAIN)
magnification ratio
1-255*
128
adjustment (OC)
SCAN Sub scanning
4 OC(SUB)
magnification ratio
1-255*
128
adjustment (OC)
SCAN Main scanning
5 SPF(MAIN)
magnification ratio
1-255*
128
adjustment (SPF)
SCAN Sub scanning
6 SPF(SUB)
magnification ratio
1-255*
128
adjustment (SPF)
SCAN Main scanning
7 RSPF(MAIN)
magnification ratio
1-255*
128
adjustment (RSPF)
SCAN Sub scanning
8 RSPF(SUB)
magnification ratio
1-255*
128
adjustment (RSPF)
* The adjustment can be made in the range of 12.7% - +12.7% by
the increment of 0.1%.
48-3
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Adjustment
Used to adjust the print mode magnification ratio
correction.
Image processing
Picture quality
48-9
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Operation/procedure
Adjustment
FAX magnification adjustment (print)
FAX
1. The adjustment item and the currently set value are highlighted.
Operation/procedure
2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key.
Changes magnification ratio by changing speed of main motor.
The change of the paper transfer speed is 0.1% when changing value
is 1.
2. Enter the set value of the magnification ratio correction with the 10
key.
1
2
Item
Content
Setting
range
Default
145mm/s
122mm/s
Main motor speed (145mm/s)

Main motor speed (122mm/s)
45-55
50
Normal display
Error display
Adjustment
FAX magnification adjustment (read)
FAX
Operation/procedure
2. Enter the set value of the magnification ratio adjustment with the
10 key.
Normal display
Error display
NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN
JAM
PAPER EMPTY
There is no operation of tray selection.
48-8
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN
JAM
PAPER EMPTY
When two pages are scanned, duplex printing is made.

Setting
Default
Item
Content
range
1 COPY START Copy start
1-255
128
Print magnification ratio
2 Horizontal
adjustment (Horizontal, vertical 1-255
128
to paper passing)
3 Vertical
adjustment (Vertical, parallel to 1-255
128
paper passing)
Horizontal
adjustment on the back surface
4
1-255
128
(DUPLEX)
(Horizontal, vertical to paper
passing)
adjustment on the back surface
Vertical
1-255
128
5
(Vertical, parallel to paper
(DUPLEX)
passing)
50
Item

(First print surface)
9 SIDE VOID-DUP
(Duplex)
Image loss amount
10 LOSS(OC)
adjustment (Lead edge
image loss set value) (OC)
8
50-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Adjustment
Used to adjust the copy lead edge position.
Picture quality
Content
Image position
SIDE VOID
Setting
Default
range
1-99
18
1-99
18
1-5
Operation/procedure
50-5
2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the [P] key.,
The display goes to the copy menu.
When the [START] key is pressed, the display goes to the copying
state and print is started.
(When the [P] key is pressed: Copy menu)


Copying is started.
(Adjustment procedure)
2. Set SIM 50-1 (Items 2, 3, 4, 5) to 1. (By setting to 1, there is no void.)

3. Place a chart with a clear lead edge (or a ruler) on the OC document table.
4. Use SIM 50-1 (Item 1) to execute test print. Check the print out and
adjust so that the lead edge image is printed. (1 - 99: About
0.127mm/Step)
5. Reset the adjustment values of SIM 50-5 (Items 1, 2, 3, 4) to the
original values, and execute test print. Check the print out and
adjust so that the lead edge image is printed on the lead edge of
paper. (1 - 99: About 0.127mm/Step).
6. Adjust SIM 50-1 (Items 2, 3, 4, 5) so that the lead edge void on the
print out is the specified value. (1 - 99: About 0.127mm/Step)
7. Similar to procedure 6, adjust SIM 50-1 (Item 6, 7) so that the rear
edge void is the specified value. (1 - 99: About 0.127mm/Step)
8. Similar to procedure 6, adjust SIM 50-1 (Item 8, 9) so that the left
edge void is the specified value. (1 - 99: About 0.127mm/Step)
9. Make an enlargement copy (400%), and check that there is no
shade of the cabinet printed at the lead edge.
10. If there is a shade printed at the lead edge in procedure 9, adjust
SIM 50-1 (Item 10). (1 - 5: About 0.677mm)
* If there is no problem, set to 2.
2
3
4
5
6
7
1. Note down the adjustment value of SIM 50-5 (Items 1, 2, 3, 4), and
change the value to 99.
Adjustment
Used to adjust the print image position (top margin) on
the print paper in the print mode.
Picture quality
Print area
Operation/procedure

Enter the exposure level with the 10-key.
Item
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Content
Original scan start position

adjustment
RRC-A
Lead edge position
adjustment value (OC)
Lead edge cancel
DEN-A
adjustment (Main tray)
Lead edge cancel
DEN-A-MANUAL adjustment (Manual feed
tray)
Lead edge cancel
DEN-A -OPTION
adjustment (Option tray)
Lead edge cancel
DEN-A -DUPLEX adjustment (back of the
machine)
DEN-B
DEN-B-DUP
(Duplex)
Setting
Default
range
1-99
43

Copying is started.
Item
Content
Setting range Default
1 TRAY1
1st tray
0-99
2 OPTION
Option tray
53
3 MANUAL
Manual feed
1-99
4 DUPLEX
Back print
50-6
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item
Adjustment
Used to adjust the print image position (top margin) on
print paper in the copy mode. (RSPF)
Picture quality
Image position
Operation/procedure
Copying is started.
1-99
18
1-99
18
Item
1-99
18
1-99
18
1-99
30
1-99
50
1 SIDE1
2 SIDE2
3 END EDGE
4 LOSS(SIDE1)
5 LOSS(SIDE2)
Content
Surface original scan start
position adjustment
Back original scan start
position set
(RSPF)
Surface image loss quantity
set
Back image loss quantity set
Setting
range
Default
1-99
50
1-99
50
1-99
50
1-5
1-5
Item
Content
Surface rear edge image

6 REARLOS(SIDE1)
loss quantity set
Back rear edge image loss
7 REARLOS(SIDE2)
quantity set
Setting
range
Default
1-5
1-5

Normal display
Error display
NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN
JAM
PAPER EMPTY

50-8
When two pages are scanned, duplex print is made,
The adjustments on the machine side must have been normally

completed.
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Adjustment
FAX lead edge adjustment (read)
FAX
1 COPY START
Setting
Default
range
43-57
53
43-57
53
43-57
53
43-57
53
43-57
53
43-57
53
Item

2. Enter the set value of the lead edge adjustment with the 10 key.
Copying is started.
Normal display
NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN
JAM
PAPER EMPTY
Error display

4. Select the scanning method.

Even when the SPF/RSPF is selected, if there is no original on the
SPF/RSPF, the OC is scanned.
Even when the OC is selected, if there is any original on the SPF/
RSPF, the SPF/RSPF is scanned. (Setting 2)
Item
1 COPY START
SCAN
2 SELECT (OC/
SPF/RSPF)
3 LEAD
4 LEFT
5 REAR
6 RIGHT
Content
Copy start
Setting
range
Scan selection (1: OC,

2: SPF, 3: RSPF back)
Scan lead edge position
adjustment value of the
selected method in 2.
Scan left edge position
Scan rear edge position
Scan right edge position
Copy start
Print lead edge void
LEAD
adjustment value
(Front surface)
Print left edge void
LEFT
adjustment value
(Front surface)
Print rear edge void
REAR
adjustment value
(Front surface)
Print lead edge void
LEAD
adjustment value
(DUPLEX)
(Back surface)
Print left edge void
LEFT (DUPLEX) adjustment value
(Back surface)
Print rear edge void
REAR
adjustment value
(DUPLEX)
(Back surface)
Default
50-10
Purpose
1-3
43-57
50
43-57
50
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Adjustment
(Adjustment can be made for each paper feed
section.)
Image processing (ICU)
Picture quality
Image position
Operation/procedure
43-57
50
43-57
50

Copying is started.
50-9
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Content
Adjustment
FAX lead edge adjustment (print)
FAX
Operation/procedure
2. Enter the set value of the lead edge adjustment with the 10 key.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Item
BYPASS
TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
DUPLEX
Content
Manual paper feed
1st tray
2nd tray
3rd tray
4th tray
Back print
Setting range
Default
1-99
50
50-12
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Adjustment
(Adjustment can be made for each document mode.)
Image processing
Picture quality
Image position
Operation/procedure

Copying is started.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Item
BYPASS
TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
DUPLEX
SPF(SIDE1)
SPF(SIDE2)
Content
Manual feed
1st tray
2nd tray
3rd tray
4th tray
Back print
RSPF front surface
RSPF back surface
Setting range
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
Default
50
50
50
50
50
70
50
50

51-8

Copying is started.
1
Item
OC
SPF(SIDE1)
SPF(SIDE2)
Content
OC document scan
RSPF document front
surface scan
RSPF document back
surface scan
Setting range
Default
1-99
50
Item
Item
Select the set value with the 10-key.

0
1
Adjustment
Used to adjust the OPC drum separation pawl ON time.
Image process
Operation
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Default
0-1
Setting
Used to adjust the OPC drum separation voltage ON/
OFF timing.
Process (OPC drum, developing, transfer, cleaning)
Operation

Item
Setting range
Default
1-99
50
SHV ON
SHV OFF
51-2
Purpose
Setting range
Operation/Procedure

Item
145mm/s
122mm/s
Content
Enable
Disable
Operation/procedure
1
2
Item
ON
OFF
51-9
51-1
Section
Section
Setting
Used to set the OPC drum separation pawl operation
inhibit. (ON/OFF)
Image process
Operation
Operation/procedure
51
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Adjustment
Used to adjust the contact pressure of paper onto the
resist roller in each section (copier paper feed section,
duplex paper feed section, RSPF paper feed section).
(When the print image position varies greatly for the
paper or when a lot of paper jam troubles occur, the
adjustment is required.)
Paper transport (Discharge/Switchback/Transport)
Operation
Operation/procedure
Content
Separation voltage ON timing
* Transfer V2ON reference
(Synchronized with the
adjustment value of 50.)
Separation voltage OFF timing
* Transfer V2OFF reference
(Synchronized with the
adjustment value of 50.)
Setting
range
Default
25-90
50
50-90
75
53-9
53
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
53-6
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Adjustment
Used to adjust the detection level of the RSPF width.
The adjustment method is the 4-point system. Set the
guide to Max. (A3/WLetter) position, A4R/Letter R
position, A5R/Invoice R position, and Min. position for
adjustment.
RSPF
Press [START] key.

Item
Read position adjustment
53-10
(Max. position setting)
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
2. Set A4R and fit the guide, and press the [START] key.
RSPF read position adjustment
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1. Set the guide to the maximum position, and press the [START] key.
Adjustment
Setting range
1-99
Adjustment
RSPF exp adjustment
3. Set A5R and fit the guide, and press the [START] key.
Operation/Procedure
4. Set the guide to the minimum position, and press the [START] key.
1. Press [START] key.
5. Set the paper recognition width (+), and press the [START] key.
6. Set the paper recognition width (),and press the [START] key.
If FAILED is displayed in the above procedure 1, 2, 3, or 4, repeat the
adjustment.
1
2
Default
50
Item
SPF EXPOSURE
RSPF EXPOSURE
Setting range
Default
1-99
53
(Middle position L/S setting)

Middle position
adjustment L
Middle position
adjustment S
YES
NO
YES
NO
MID-L ADJ.ON
MID-L ADJ.OFF
MID-S ADJ.ON
MID-S ADJ.OFF
55
55-1
53-7
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Adjustment
Used to enter the RSPF width detection adjustment
value.
RSPF
Purpose
Setting
Function
(Purpose)
Used to set the soft switch.
Section
Operation
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure

Used to enter the number of SW to be changed.
2. Enter the RSPF original tray size adjustment value (specified on

the back of the RSPF) with the 10-key.
Item
Content
Setting range Default
1 MAX POSITION Max. width
2 POSITION 1
Adjustment point 1
0-999
0
3 POSITION 2
Adjustment point 2
4 MIN POSITION Min. width
The bit to be changed is specified by 10-key. (The current value is

highlighted.)
When [START] key is pressed, the entered value is set.
61
61-1
Purpose
53-8
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Adjustment
Used to adjust the RSPF scan position of the mirror
unit automatically. For the RSPF scan position
automatic adjustment, the mirror unit is shifted to
11mm before the RSPF glass cover edge, and is
operated automatically to scan images by the unit of 1
step, detecting the position up to the glass cover
automatically.
Operation/Procedure
With the RSPF or the OC cover open, put a white paper on the OC
glass (the RSPF glass surface is included for the RSPF standard
model), and press the [START] key.
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Used to check the LSU (polygon motor) operation.
Check speed can select 145mm/s or 122mm/s
individually.
LSU
Operation
Operation/procedure
Press the [START] key, and the LSU test is performed.
Used to set the LSU to ON state and check that the sync signal
(HSYNC/) is outputted or not.
After operation for 30 sec, the result is displayed. (Interruption cannot
be made for 5 sec after starting the operation.)
If the adjustment is executed normally, the adjustment value is displayed and saved in the EEPROM. If an error occurs, ERR is displayed and the value is not saved in the EEPROM.
If the adjustment is not performed because of abnormality, --- is displayed.
During execution of the adjustment, the operation cannot be interrupted.
63
65
63-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
65-1
(display/print)
Used to check the result of shading correction.
(The shading correction data are displayed.)
Scanner (Exposure)
Operation
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Adjustment
Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section)
detection position.
Operation (Display, Operation)
Operation/Procedure
Press the keys displayed on the LCD sequentially.
Operation/procedure
Pressing the [START] key performs shading, and displays the result
(center pixel).
Adjust the touch panel coordinates.

When the point of + on the LCD is pressed, it turns gray. Press all the
four points of +.
63-7
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Adjustment
Used to adjust the RSPF white correction start pixel
position automatically.
This adjustment is performed after the lens unit is
replaced.
Scanner
Operation
65-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output check

(Display, Print)
Used to check the touch panel (LCD display section)
detection position adjustment result.
Operation (Display, Operation)
Operation/Procedure
Operation/procedure
Lift the RSPF unit to the fully open position, and press the [START] key.
[ ] indicates the order number of the pixel of the white sheet for RSPF
exposure correction in the RSPF position.
If the adjustment is normally completed, COMPLETE is displayed
and data are written into the EEPROM.
In case of an abnormality, ERROR is displayed and no data is written
into the EEPROM.
The RSPF white correction start pixel = Displayed pixel position 34
If the simulation is executed with the RSPF unit closed, an error will
result.
Check the touch panel coordinates.

When the touch panel is pressed, the X-coordinate and the Y-coordinate (dot conversion values) are displayed.
65-5
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output check

(Display, Print)
Used to check the key inputs of the operation panel.
Operation (screen/operation)
64
Operation/procedure
64-1
Check the key input of the operation panel.

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Used to check the operation of the printer function
(auto print operation).
Printer
Operation
After completion of all key entries, COMPLETE is displayed.
66
Operation/procedure
66-1
1. Select the print item with the 10-key.
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section

Copying is started.
Setting
Used to change and check the FAX-related soft SW.
FAX
Operation/procedure
During execution of the print test, the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key and
the [INTERRUPTION] key are invalid.
Setting
Item
Content
Default
range
Self print is made in 2 by 4 mode
(printing 2 lines and not printing
4 lines). Since scanning is not
2 BY 4
1
performed, when the original is
MODE
set on the RSPF, this cannot be
1-2
1
performed.
* Duplex print cannot be made.
Lattice print (1cm, 1dot width
WLT, A3 print (A3 main scan,
LATTICE
2
WLT sub scan)) is performed.
PRINT
* Duplex print can be made.
1. Enter the soft SW number to be selected with the 10-key.

2. Check and change the setting content of the selected soft SW.
3. Press the [START] key to save the set content.
The FAX-related soft SW is displayed on the LCD, and changing can
be made by monitoring it.
* If the IMC board is not installed, the key inputs cannot be made.
2. Detailed procedure
66-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Adjustment
Used to clear the FAX-related soft SW.
(Except for the FAX adjustment values)
FAX
55H is written to all the addresses of each memory, and the

address data are read in sequence to check that they were
properly written.
AAH is written to all the addresses of each memory, and the
properly written.
00H is written to all the addresses of each memory, and the
properly written.
Perform checks 1 - 3 sequentially. If there is no abnormality, it is
OK. If there is any abnormality, NG is notified to the error
address.
The check result is saved. New result is overwrited with each
check.
Operation/procedure
1. Enter the country code with the 10-key, and press the [START]
key.
2. When 1: (YES) is selected, the soft SW corresponding to the

country code is cleared. When 2: (NO) is selected, the simulation
is canceled.
Country code
Japan
: 00000000
U.S.A.
: 10110101
Australia
: 00001001
Interruption cannot be made during operation.
U.K.
: 10110100
France
: 00111101
Germany
: 00000100
Sweden
: 10100101
66-4
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
New Zealand : 01111110

China
: 00100110
Singapore
: 10011100
Taiwan
: 11111110
Signal send mode (Signal send level: Max.)
FAX
Operation
India
: 01010011
Operation/procedure
Malaysia
: 01101100
Hong Kong
: 01010000
Middle east
: 11111101
Select the signal number with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
The signal is sent to the line and the machine speaker. (Sending the
signal is continued until the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed.)
SouthAfrica
: 10011111
Spain
: 10100000
Portugal
: 10001011
Russia
: 10111000
Denmark
: 00110001
Norway
: 10000010
Switzerland
: 10100110
Italy
: 01011001
Belgium
: 00001111
By entering the signal number and pressing the [START] key during
execution, the signal kind can be changed.
Luxembourg : 01101001
Netherlands : 01111011
Finland
: 00111100
66-3
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item
FAX PWB memory check
FAX
Operation
Operation/procedure
Press the [START] key.
Read/write can be checked for FAX PWB memory.
The check result is displayed separately for each memory.
1. Memory to be checked
DRAM
SRAM
Flash ROM
Option memory
PAGE
Program area
SUM check only
Memory area
The memory size follows the
automatically detected value.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Item
NO SIGNAL
33.6 V34
31.2 V34
28.8 V34
26.4 V34
24.0 V34
21.6 V34
19.2 V34
16.8 V34
14.4 V34
12.0 V34
9.6 V34
7.2 V34
4.8 V34
2.4 V34
14.4 V33
12.0 V33
14.4 V17
12.0 V17
9.6 V17
7.2 V17
9.6 V29
7.2 V29
4.8 V27t
2.4 V27t
0.3 FLG
CED2100
CNG1100
0.3 V21
ANSam
31 RINGER
MODEM
Send signal
Signal not sent
33.6 V34
31.2 V34
28.8 V34
26.4 V34
24.0 V34
21.6 V34
19.2 V34
16.8 V34
14.4 V34
12.0 V34
9.6 V34
7.2 V34
4.8 V34
2.4 V34
14.4 V33
12.0 V33
14.4 V17
12.0 V17
9.6 V17
7.2 V17
9.6 V29
7.2 V29
4.8 V27t
2.4 V27t
7EH Flag signal
Tone signal
Pseudo-ringer sound
([ON HOOK] key ON)
Item
32 No MSG
33 No RBT
34 DP MAKE
35 DP BRK
Send signal
Voice message (no sound)
Under the state where the ring back tone can be
sent to the line, keep the sound composition IC
volume to 0.
Ring back tone (no sound)
sent to the line, keep the G/A volume to 0.
Dial pulse (make)
Maintain the make state with keeping the condition
to be able to send to the dial pulse line.
Dial pulse (break)
Maintain the break state with keeping the condition
32 No MSG
33 No RBT
34 DP MAKE
35 DP BRK
Send signal
Voice message (no sound)
sent to the line, keep the sound composition IC
volume to 0.
Ring back tone (no sound)
sent to the line, keep the G/A volume to 0.
Dial pulse (make)
Maintain the make state with keeping the condition
Dial pulse (break)
Maintain the break state with keeping the condition
66-5
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Signal number
66-6
Signal send mode (Signal send level soft SW setting)
FAX
Operation
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item
Data output, check

Printing the confidential password
FAX
Data
Confidential/Pass code
Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure
By setting the signal number, signals are sent to the line and the
machine speaker. (Sending signals is continued until interruption command is made (by pressing [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.)
The confidential ID table (confidential BOX numbers, confidential BOX

names, and confidential password) is printed.
By entering the signal number and pressing the [START] key during
execution, the signal kind can be changed.
Signal number
1 NO SIGNAL
2 33.6 V34
3 31.2 V34
4 28.8 V34
5 26.4 V34
6 24.0 V34
7 21.6 V34
8 19.2 V34
9 16.8 V34
10 14.4 V34
11 12.0 V34
12 9.6 V34
13 7.2 V34
14 4.8 V34
15 2.4 V34
16 14.4 V33
17 12.0 V33
18 14.4 V17
19 12.0 V17
20 9.6 V17
21 7.2 V17
22 9.6 V29
23 7.2 V29
24 4.8 V27t
25 2.4 V27t
26 0.3 FLG
27 CED2100
28 CNG1100
29 0.3 V21
30 ANSam
31 RINGER
Send signal
Signal not sent
33.6 V34
31.2 V34
28.8 V34
26.4 V34
24.0 V34
21.6 V34
19.2 V34
16.8 V34
14.4 V34
12.0 V34
9.6 V34
7.2 V34
4.8 V34
2.4 V34
14.4 V33
12.0 V33
14.4 V17
12.0 V17
9.6 V17
7.2 V17
9.6 V29
7.2 V29
4.8 V27t
2.4 V27t
7EH Flag signal
The confidential data of My company mode is printed separately.
66-7
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item
Data output, check

Print the screen memory contents
FAX
Data
Image data
Operation/procedure
Used to input all image data (including confidential reception data,
remote send image, not-sent image) stored in image memory of the
FAX section.
The output image is remained even after outputting.
66-10
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item
Image data memory clear
FAX
Data
Image data
Operation/procedure
Select 1: YES with the 10-key and press the [START] key. (When 2:
NO is selected, the simulation is canceled.)
Used to clear all image data (including confidential reception data)
stored in image memory of the FAX section.
The management table is also cleared (initialized) at the same time.
* lIf there is any print data, the power must be turned off after clearing.
Tone signal
Pseudo-ringer sound
([ON HOOK] key ON)
66-14
66-11
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
FAX
Operation
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Operation check/test
FAX
Operation
Operation/procedure
Operation/Procedure
1. Select the item with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
By setting the signal number, the specified signal is delivered to the

line at the speed of 300bps. (The signal is continuously sent until the
interruption command is provided by pressing the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.)
2. Set the make time with the 10-key.

The dial is sent with the set value + 26ms.
The sending dial cannot be interrupted.
The signal send level can be selected from 0dB or the soft SW set value.
The signal send level is returned to the soft SW set value before execution of the mode after completion of the mode.
0
1
Item
EXECUTE
MAKE TIME
Content
Execution
Dial pulse make time setting
By entering the number and pressing the [START] key during execution, the signal kind can be changed.
Item
1 NO SIGNAL
2 11111
3 11110
4 00000
5 010101
6 00001
Operation/Procedure
Setting range
0-15
66-15
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
FAX
Operation
66-12
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
2. Set the make time with the 10-key.

(Signal send level: Set by soft SW)
FAX
Operation
The dial is sent with the set value + 9ms.

0
1
Operation/procedure
Item
EXECUTE
MAKE TIME
Content
Execution
Dial pulse make time setting
By setting the signal number, the specified signal is delivered to the

line at the speed of 300bps. (The signal is continuously sent until the
interruption command is provided by pressing the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.)
66-16
The signal send level can be selected from 0dB or the soft SW set value.
The signal send level is returned to the soft SW set value before execution of the mode after completion of the mode.
By entering the number and pressing the [START] key during execution, the signal kind can be changed.
Item
1 NO SIGNAL
2 11111
3 11110
4 00000
5 010101
6 00001
66-13
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Setting range
0-15
Used to perform the dial test. (DTFM signal send test)
FAX
Operation
Operation/Procedure
Item
0
1
2
Content
EXECUTE
HIGH (SW)
HIGH-LOW (SW)
Execution
High group
High group, Low group
Setting
range
0-15
0-15
3. Select the soft SW reflection.

Setting
Used to register the dial numbers.
FAX
Operation
1
2
Item
NO STORE TO SW
STORE TO SW
Content
Not reflected.
Reflected. (Shift SW value changed.)
Operation/procedure
Enter the number with the 10-key, [*] key, and [#] key.
Press the [CLEAR] key to return to the initial state.
Press the [START] key to register the entered number.
66-21
66-17
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
FAX
Operation
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item
Check
FAX information print
FAX
Data
Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure
1. Select the item to be printed.
Enter the DTFM signal (1 digit (1 to 9, 0, *, #)) and press the [START] key.
When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during execution, the

simulation is terminated.
The information of the selected item is printed.
1
2
Item
USER SW.LIST
SOFT SW.LIST
SYSTEM ERROR
PROTOCOL
PARTIAL SRAM
CLEAR
66-18
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
(Signal send level: Set by soft SW.)
FAX
Operation
Operation/Procedure
Enter the DTFM signal (1 digit (1 to 9, 0, *, #)) and press the [START] key.
When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during execution, the
simulation is terminated.
Back up
Used to write the SRAM data to the Flash ROM.
66-22
FAX
Data
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Operation/Procedure
Select 1: YES with the 10-key, and press the [START] key. The data
are backed up. (When 2: NO is selected, the simulation is canceled.)
* The AR-FX5 data cannot be written into the AR-FX7. If it is executed, data are initialized and deleted. In addition, the AR-FX7 data
cannot be used in the AR-FX5.
Setting
Handset sound volume adjustment (Japan only)
FAX
Operation
Operation/procedure
1. Select the sound volume to be set.
(MAX: Large, MIDDLE: Medium, MIN: Small)
2. Press [START] key.
Selection of 1, 2, and 3 can be made even during execution of the simulation.
66-20
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Clear the FSS area in the SRAM.
66-19
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Content
User setting list
Soft SW list
System error list
Used to print the system error log (error
number and time).
Protocol error list
Regardless of soft SW38-1 status, the
protocol monitor of the preceding
communication is printed. (Printing is
allowed at any time before starting the
next communication.) For this operation,
the protocol monitor of one
communication is always buffered.
A sound is generated during execution of the simulation.

Back up
Note: Execution is possible only when FAX is installed.
Used to write the Flash ROM data to the SRAM.

FAX
Data
66-24
Operation/Procedure
Select 1: YES with the 10-key, and press the [START] key. The Flash
ROM data are read out and written into the SRAM. (When 2: NO is
selected, the simulation is canceled.)
* The AR-FX5 data cannot be written into the AR-FX7. If it is executed, data are initialized and deleted. In addition, the AR-FX7 data
cannot be used in the AR-FX5.
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item
Data clear
Used to clear the FAST storage data. (SEC only)
FAX
Data
Initializing
Operation/procedure
Select 1: YES with the 10-key and press the [START] key. The FAST
storage data are cleared. (When 2: NO is selected, the simulation is
canceled.)
66-34
66-30
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item
FAX
Operation
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item
Communication time measurement display
FAX
Operation
Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure
When the relay state of the polarity reverse relay, the handset hook
switch, or the external telephone hook switch is changed, the content
of change is displayed regardless of the soft SW setup (real time). The
display of change is kept until an interruption command is supplied by
pressing the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
The send/receive test is performed, and the time required for send/
receive of the image data in the test is measured and displayed.
Item
HS2
HS1
RHS
EXHS
Notification contents
Signal low
Signal high
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Setup on the user

side when executing
communication
Measuring
range
Send
Receive

Mode when measuring
66-31
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item
How to check the time
Setting
FAX
Operation
Measuring unit
Communication
: Memory send
means
: Normal Character
Picture quality
: Lighter
Density
: ON
ECM
: OFF
Sender information
From flag reception before sending of image
data until sending of RCP frame
From flag reception before reception of
image data until reception of RCP frame
Used to make communication not in a
simulation process but in the normal screen
and measure the time.
Enter the simulation for communication time
check and check the time.
msec
Operation/Procedure
When there are two or more send/receive operations of image data in

one communication, only the time of the last send/receive data near
the end is measured.
1. Enter the set value. (Valid only 1 to 5)
2. The entered bit is alternatively switched between 0 and 1 and

the target signal name is highlighted.
66-37
3. Press the [START] key to send the signal.

When the [CUSTUM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Speaker sound volume adjustment
FAX
Operation/procedure
The following test sound is delivered to the line and the speaker to
adjust the sound kind and volume.
66-32
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item
Receive data check
FAX
Operation
The send level to the line is the set value of soft SW.
The set values of the selected sound kind and volume are written to
each soft SW.
1. Sound kinds pattern
Operation/procedure
Operation/Procedure
Sound kinds (Test sound)

RINGER
Call sound
Line monitor sound (Test
LINE MONITO sound: communication
signal sound)
On-hook (Test sound,
ON HOOK
communication signal
sound)
SCAN FINISH Scan finish sound
Communication finish
TX/RX FINISH
sound
DTMF
DTFM send sound
Signal detection is checked and the result is displayed.
LAR: (MED. Value + 1)
MED: (SMA value +1) - (LAR value 1)
The fixed data received from the line are checked and the result is displayed.
When data are coincident, OK is displayed. When not, NG is displayed.
66-33
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item
Signal detection check
FAX
Operation
Sound volume set value

DEF. LAR. MED. SMA.
DEF. LAR. MED. SMA.
DEF. LAR. MED. SMA.

DEF. LAR. MED. SMA.
DEF. LAR. MED. SMA.
DEF. LAR. MED. SMA.
SMA: 1 - (MED. Value + 1)

2. Sound volume pattern
66-41
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
CI signal check
Operation/procedure
When the [START] key is pressed, the call signal from CI pin is
detected to deliver the call sound to the line and the speaker. The volume of call sound follows the soft SW.
Signal detection and delivery of pseudo-call sound at detection are
executed until the interruption command is provided by pressing the
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
66-52
Purpose
Section
Item
Function
(Purpose)
Operation test/check (Japan only)

FAX
Operation
Pseudo-ringer check
Operation/procedure
Press [START] key.
The call sound of the machine and the pseudo-ring are generated.
[7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE

1. Trouble code list
Trouble code
Main Sub
code code
A0
01
E1
00
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
80
81
82
84
88
E7
F1
F2
F5
F6
02
10
11
12
00
03
10
15
19
20
37
50
95
02
04
05
02
00
10
80
81
82
84
88
96
F9
99
00
10
Trouble
detection
Trouble contents
Security incompatibility error
IMC PWB communication trouble
IMC PWB trouble
IMC PWB ASIC error
IMC PWB CODEC IC error
IMC PWB flash ROM error
IMC PWB expaned memory module
(DIMM) error
IMC PWB page memory error
/SRAM error
IMC PWB standard compression memory
error
IMC PWB smoothing IC error
(protocol)
(Parity)
(Overrun)
(Framing)
(Time-out)
LSU trouble
CCD black level error
CCD white level error
Shading trouble
Finisher communication trouble
Delivery roller lift motor trouble
Staple motor trouble
Tray lift motor trouble
Paper alignment motor F trouble
Paper alignment motor R trouble
RAM data trouble
Incompatible trouble
Paper exit option configuration error
Toner supply failure
Model error
Type error
Destination error
Data abnormality
Misc error
CRUM chip communication error
Copy lamp (xenon lamp) error
FAX control PWB communication trouble
FAX control PWB trouble
(Protocol)
(Parity)
(Overrun)
(Framing)
(Time-out)
Combination error between the MCU and
the FAX firmware.
FAX control PWB destination error
Printer PWB communication trouble
Printer PWB trouble
MCU
FIN
MCU
Trouble code
Trouble
Trouble contents
Main Sub
detection
code code
80 Printer PWB communication trouble
F9
(Protocol)
(Parity)
(Overrun)
(Framing)
(Time-out)
H2
00 Main heater lamp thermistor open hard
detection
01 Sub heater lamp thermistor open hard
detection
H3
00 Main heater lamp abnormally high
temperature hard detection trouble
01 Sub heater lamp abnormally high
10 Main heater lamp abnormally high
temperature soft detection trouble
11 Sub heater lamp abnormally high
H4
00 Main heater lamp abnormally low
temperature detection
01 Sub heater lamp abnormally low
20 Main heater lamp abnormally low
21 Sub heater lamp abnormally low
H5
01 10 times of continuous detection of the
lower paper exit sensor (POD1) lead edge
jam or the upper paper exit sensor
(POD2) lead edge jam or the duplex
sensor (PPD2) rear edge jam
L1
00 Scanner feed trouble
L3
00 Scanner return trouble
L4
01 Main motor trouble
11 Shifter motor trouble
31 VFM trouble
32 DCFM or DCFM2 trouble
33 VFM2 trouble
L6
10 Polygon motor trouble
L8
10 Power abnormality detection trouble
U1
01 FAX battery error
02 PANEL LOW battery error
U2
04 EEPROM communication error
20 Machine speed code data error
U7
00 RIC communication trouble
U9
00 Operation control PWB communication
OPE
trouble
trouble (Protocol)
trouble (Parity)
trouble (Overrun)
trouble (Framing)
trouble (Time-out)
99 Operation panel destination error
MCU
AR-5726/5731 SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 - 1
Trouble code
Trouble contents
Main Sub
code code
EE
EL Developer adjustment trouble
(Over-toned abnormality)
EU Developer adjustment trouble
(Under-toned abnormality)
PF
00 PF trouble
Trouble
detection
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
E1
14
Content
Details
Check
and
remedy
00
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
10
11
12
E1
13
Cause
Details of trouble
Cause
E1
Content
Details
2. Details of trouble code

Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
A0
01
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Remarks
Security incompatibility error

When the PCL or the FAX control PWB is
installed, it does not match with
compatible/incompatible setup of the MCU
PWB security.
The security compatibility/incompatibility of
the installed PCL or FAX control PWB
does not match with that of the MCU PWB.
Cheek the security compatibility/
incompatibility of each board. Match the
security compatibility/incompatibility of the
boards.
Communication trouble between MCU and
IMC PWB
IMC PWB connector disconnection.
Motherboard connector pin breakage.
IMC PWB ROM defect, data failure.
Check the connectors of the IMC PWB and
MCU PWB.
Check the grounding of the copier.
Check the ROM of the IMC PWB.
IMC PWB trouble
IMC PWB hardware abnormality
IMC PWB abnormality
Replace the IMC PWB
Check
and
remedy
Remarks
15
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Remarks
16
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Remarks
17
IMC PWB ASIC error
ASIC abnormality on IMC PWB
IMC PWB abnormality
Replace the IMC PWB
80
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
IMC PWB CODEC IC error

CODEC IC (JBIG chip) abnormality on
IMC PWB
IMC PWB abnormality
Replace the IMC PWB
IMC PWB flash ROM error

Flash ROM abnormality on IMC PWB
IMC PWB abnormality
Replace the IMC PWB.
When the program download is abnormally
terminated, a error may occur. In this case,
download the program again.
Program ROM abnormality
Content
Cause
Check
and
remedy
81
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
IMC PWB expanded memory module

(DIMM) error
IMC extended compression memory
module (DIMM) installation error.
IMC extended compression memory
module (DIMM) access error.
IMC expanded memory module installation
trouble.
IMC expanded memory module trouble.
IMC expanded memory contact trouble.
IMC PWB abnormality.
Check installation of the expanded
memory module. (Spec: Added to Slot 1.)
Replace the expanded memory module.
Replace the IMC PWB.
Extend memory abnormality for
compressed image store (DIMM module)
IMC PWB page memory error
/SRAM error
IMC PWB page memory or work SRAM
access error
IMC PWB abnormality
Replace the IMC PWB
Print buffer page memory or work SRAM

abnormality
IMC PWB standard compression memory
error
Access error of standard compression
memory on IMC PWB
IMC PWB abnormality
Replace the IMC PWB
Standard compression image store

memory abnormality
IMC PWB smoothing IC error
IMC PWB smoothing IC abnormality
IMC PWB abnormality
Replace the IMC PWB

(protocol)
IMC PWB (Protocol error)
MCU PWB.
IMC PWB communication trouble (Parity)
printer IMC (Parity error)
MCU PWB.
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
E1
82
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
84
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
88
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7
02
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
10
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy

(Overrun)
IMC PWB (Overrun error)
MCU PWB.
(Framing)
IMC PWB (Framing error)
MCU PWB.
(Time-out)
IMC PWB (Time-out error)
MCU PWB.
LSU trouble
BD signal from LSU is not detected in a
constant cycle (Kept OFF or ON)
LSU connector or LSU inside harness
trouble or disconnection.
Polygon motor rotation abnormality.
Laser does not illuminate.
MCU PWB failure.
Check for disconnection of the LSU
connector.
Check the LSU operation with SIM 61-1.
Check that the polygon motor rotates
normally.
Check laser LED lighting.
Replace the LSU unit.
Replace the MCU PWB.
CCD black level error
CCD black reference plate scan level
abnormality when the copy lamp turns off.
Flat cable installation failure to CCD unit.
CCD unit error.
Check flat cable installation to the CCD
unit.
Check CCD unit.
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
E7
11
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
12
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
F1
00
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
03
Content
Details
Cause
10
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
CCD white level error

Improper CCD white reference plate
reading level for copy lamp lighting
Dirt on the mirror, lens, and reference
white plate.
Copy lamp lighting trouble.
CCD unit abnormality.
MCU PWB abnormality. (Occurred in the
RSPF scan position)
Clean the mirror, the lens, and the
reference white plate.
Check the copy lamp light quantity and its
operation. (SIM 5-3)
Check CCD unit.
Check MCU PWB.
Shading trouble
White correction is not completed in the
specified number of times.
Dirt on the mirror, lens, and reference.
white plate.
Copy lamp lighting trouble.
CCD unit abnormality.
MCU PWB abnormality.
Clean the mirror, the lens, and the
reference white plate.
Check the copy lamp light quantity and its
operation. (SIM 5-3)
Check CCD unit.
Check MCU PWB.
Finisher communication trouble
Communication line test error occurs when
power is turned on or after the exit of a
simulation mode.
Error in finisher communication
Connection trouble or disconnection of the
connector and harness between the body
and the finisher.
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Control PWB failure.
Malfunction by noises.
Canceled by turning OFF/ON the power.
Check the connectors and the harness of
communication line.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Delivery roller lift motor trouble
Paper exit roller lift-up motor operation
abnormality
Motor lock.
Motor rpm abnormality.
Overcurrent to the motor.
Use SIM3-3 to check the delivery roller lift
motor operation
Staple motor trouble
Staple motor operation abnormality
Motor lock.
Use SIM 3-3 to check the staple motor
operation.
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
F1
15
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
19
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
20
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
37
50
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
95
F2
02
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Tray lift motor trouble

The finisher lift-up motor does not reach
the specified position
Lift-up motor abnormality.
Lift-up motor upper limit sensor
abnormality.
Finisher PWB abnormality.
Use SIM 3-3 to check the lift-up motor
operation
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
F2
04
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Paper alignment motor F trouble

Alignment motor operation abnormality
Motor lock.
Use SIM3-3 to check the alignment (F)
motor operation.
Paper alignment motor R trouble
Alignment motor operation abnormality
Motor lock.
Use SIM3-3 to check the alignment (R)
motor operation
RAM data trouble
Backup RAM contents are disturbed
Malfunction by noise.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Cause
05
F5
02
Incompatible trouble
Speed does not coincide between finisher
and main unit
A finisher which is not applicable is
installed.
Connection of a finisher incompatible with
the machine is detected.
Connect the MX-FN13 to the machine.
Paper exit option configuration error

An improper option is installed.
Configuration of the paper exit option is
improperness.
Install a proper option.
Toner supply failure

The value judged from the actual toner
supply hysteresis differs greatly from the
toner sensor value
Developing unit trouble.
Toner supply abnormality caused by
installation of unpacked toner cartridge.
Replace the developing unit.
Use SIM 25-1 to perform DV stirring.
Check
and
remedy
Content
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
F6
00
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
10
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Model error
Type error
Destination error
Data abnormality
Misc error
(Model error)
When the boot program model code does
not match with the CRUM model
information
(Type error)
When the CRUM type is other than
[Genuine/Conversion/Production rotation]
(Destination error)
The destination of the body differs from
that of the CRUM
(Data abnormality)
The initial check information includes an
erroneous value.
When the max. toner supply time is 00.
When the print hard stop is 00.
CRUM chip failure.
Erroneous TNCA.
Replace the CRUM chip.
Replace the TNCA.
CRUM chip communication error
CRUM chip failure.
Developing unit contact trouble.
MCU PWB failure.
Check installation of the developing unit.
Copy lamp (xenon lamp) error
The copy lamp does not light up
Copy lamp abnormality.
Copy lamp harness abnormality.
CCD PWB harness abnormality.
Check the copy lamp. (SIM 5-3)
When the lamp lights:
Check the harnesses and connectors
between the CCD unit and the MCU PWB.
When the lamp does not light:
Check the harness and connector between
the copy lamp and the MCU PWB.
Replace the copy lamp unit.
FAX control PWB
FAX control PWB connector
disconnection.
Harness trouble between FAX control
PWB and MCU PWB.
FAX control PWB ROM defect/Data failure.
FAX control PWB and MCU PWB.
Check FAX control PWB ROM.
FAX control PWB trouble
FAX control PWB abnormality
FAX control PWB defect
Replate the FAX control PWB
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
F6
80
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
81
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
82
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
84
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy

(Protocol)
FAX control PWB (Protocol error)
FAX control PWB connector disconnection
PWB and MCU PWB.
(Parity)
FAX control PWB (Parity error)
FAX control PWB connector disconnection
PWB and MCU PWB.
(Overrun)
FAX control PWB (Overrun error)
disconnection.
PWB and MCU PWB.
(Framing)
FAX control PWB (Framing error)
disconnection.
PWB and MCU PWB.
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
F6
88
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
96
Content
Details
Cause
99
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
F9
00
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
10
80
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy

(Time-out)
FAX control PWB (Time-out error)
disconnection.
PWB and MCU PWB.
Combination error between the MCU and
the FAX firmware.
The version of the FAX firmware is not
changed 04.xx or later.
The version of the FAX firmware is not
proper.
Change the version of the FAX firmware to
04.xx or later.
FAX control PWB destination error
The machine destination setup does not
coincide with the FAX control PWB
destination setup.
The machine destination setup (Sim 26-6)
does not coincide with the FAX control
PWB setup
Check the variety of FAX LIU PWB.
Check the machine destination setup (Sim
22-6) and FAX country code (Soft SW
table).
printer PWB
Printer PWB connector disconnection.
Harness trouble between the printer PWB
and the MCU PWB.
Printer PWB ROM defect/Data failure.
the printer PWB and MCU PWB.
Check ROM on printer PWB.
Printer PWB trouble
Printer PWB abnormality
Printer PWB defect
Replace the printer PWB

(Protocol)
printer PWB (Protocol error)
and the MCU PWB.
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
F9
81
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
82
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
84
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
88
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
H2
00
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy

(Parity)
printer PWB (Parity error)
and the MCU PWB.
(Overrun)
printer PWB (Overrun error)
and the MCU PWB.
(Framing)
printer PWB (Framing error)
and the MCU PWB.
(Time-out)
printer PWB (Time-out error)
and the MCU PWB.
Main heater lamp thermistor open hard
detection
Main heater lamp thermistor open
detection.
Fusing unit not installed.
Main thermistor defect.
Fusing section connector contact failure.
Check the harness and the connector of
the thermistor and the MCU.
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
H2
01
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
H3
00
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
01
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
10
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Sub heater lamp thermistor open hard

detection
Fusing sub thermistor open detection.
Sub thermistor defect.
Check the harness and the connector of
the thermistor and the MCU.
Main heater lamp abnormally high
The fusing main heater thermistor causes
abnormally high temperature
Check the main heater lamp blinking with
SIM 5-2-1.
When the lamp blinks normally:
Check the thermistor and the harness.
Check the MCU PWB thermistor input
circuit.
If lamp lights and stays lit:
Check the power circuit and the lamp
control circuit on MCU PWB.
Clear the display of self-diagnostics with
SIM 14.
Sub heater lamp abnormally high
The fusing sub thermistor causes
abnormally high temperature
Check the sub heater lamp blinking with
SIM 5-2-2.
circuit.
SIM 14.
Main heater lamp abnormally high
A/D value the fusing main thermistor
causes abnormally high temperature (over
230C).
Main heater lamp thermistor defect.
SIM 5-2-1.
circuit.
SIM 14.
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
H3
11
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
H4
00
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Sub heater lamp abnormally high

A/D value the fusing sub heater lamp
thermistor causes abnormally high
temperature (over 230C).
Sub heater lamp thermistor defect.
SIM 5-2-2.
Check the MCU PWB thermistor input circuit.
SIM 14.
Main heater lamp abnormally low
The setup temperature (about 90C) is not
reached within the specified time (about
20sec) from turning on the power.
When the temperature of main heater
lamp thermistor falls below 140C in the
standby mode or printing.
When the temperature of main heater
lamp thermistor falls below 50C in the
pre-heat mode.
Main heater lamp thermistor defect
Main heater lamp failure
Main thermostat failure
Control PWB failure
Check the heater lamp blinking with SIM 5-2.
Check for disconnection of the heater lamp
and thermostat.
Check the interlock switch.
SIM 14.
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
H4
01
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
20
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Sub heater lamp abnormally low

The setup temperature (about 90C) is not
reached within the specified time (about
20sec) from turning on the power.
When the temperature of sub heater
thermistor falls below 140C in the standby
mode or printing.
When the temperature of sub heater lamp
thermistor falls below 50C in the pre-heat
mode.
Sub heater lamp thermistor defect.
Sub heater lamp failure.
Sub thermostat failure.
SIM 5-2-2.
SIM 14.
Main heater lamp abnormally low
The setup temperature (about 25C: Sim
43-1-1) is not reached within the specified
time (about 40sec) from turning on the power.
A/D value of fusing main thermistor is not
reached within the specified temperature.
(specified temperature : SIM43-1 (600dpi)
25C )
Main heater lamp failure.
Main thermostat failure.
SIM 5-1.
SIM 14.
Check that there is no foreign material in
the contact section between the thermistor
and the heat roller.
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
H4
21
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
H5
01
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Sub heater lamp abnormally low

The setup temperature (about 25C: Sim
43-1-1) is not reached within the specified
time (about 40sec) from turning on the
power.
A/D value of fusing sub thermistor is not
reached within the specified temperature
(specified temperature : SIM43-1 (600dpi)
25C )
Sub heater lamp failure.
Sub thermostat failure.
SIM 5-2-2.
circuit.
SIM 14.
Check that there is no foreign material in
the contact section between the thermistor
and the heat roller.
10 times of continuous detection of the
lower paper exit sensor (POD1) lead edge
jam or the upper paper exit sensor (POD2)
lead edge jam or the duplex sensor
(PPD2) rear edge jam
After supplying the power, one of the
above jams occurs 10 times continuously
in printing
Counting is started on supplying the
power. When any one of the above jams
occurs, one count is made. When paper
entry to the POD1 or POD2 is detected,
the counter is cleared.
A paper jam (paper rounding, etc.) near
the duplex sensor (PPD2) on the fusing
unit is not canceled completely.
POD1, POD2, PPD2 sensor breakdown or
harness connection trouble
Fusing unit installation failure
Check for jam paper in the fusing section.
(paper winding, etc.)
Check fusing unit installation.
Check the POD1, POD2 or PPD2 sensor.
Clear the trouble with SIM 14.
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
L1
00
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
L3
00
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
L4
01
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Scanner feed trouble

Scanner feed is not completed within the
specified time.
Mirror unit defect.
Scanner wire disconnection.
Origin detection sensor error.
Mirror motor harness abnormality.
Check the scanning operation with SIM 11.
When the mirror not feeds:
Check for disconnection of the scanner
wire.
the mirror motor and the MCU PWB.
Replace the mirror unit.
When the mirror feeds:
Check the mirror home position sensor
with SiM 1-2.
Scanner return trouble
Scanner return is not completed within the
specified time.
When OC copying with the mirror at the
home position, the mirror is not in the
home position.
Mirror unit defect.
The scanner wire is disconnected.
Origin detection sensor error.
Mirror motor harness abnormality.
Check the scanning operation with SIM 11.
When the mirror fails to return:
Check for disconnection of the scanner
wire.
the mirror motor and the MCU PWB.
Replace the mirror unit.
When the mirror feeds:
Check the mirror home position sensor
with SiM 1-2.
Main motor trouble
The main motor does not rotate.
The motor lock signal is detected for 1sec
or more after the main motor rotates.
during rotation of the main motor.
Main motor defect.
Main motor connection, harness trouble or
disconnection.
MCU PWB failure.
Check the main motor operation with SIM
25-1.
Check connection of the main motor
harness and connector.
Replace the main motor.
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
L4
11
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
31
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
32
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
33
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Shifter motor trouble

The shifter home position detection signal
is not detected when the shifter is
operating.
Shifter motor trouble or harnes connection
trouble and disconnection.
Shifter home position sensor trouble.
Check the shifter motor operation with SIM
3-11.
Check connection of the shifter motor
harness/connector.
Replace the shifter motor.
VFM fan trouble
5 sec after starting the fan motor rotation,
the motor lock signal is detected for 1 sec.
During rotation of the fan motor, the motor
lock signal is detected for 1 sec.
Fan motor trouble.
Fan motor connection harness connection
MCU PWB trouble.
Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the
fan motor.
Check connection of the fan motor
Replace the fan motor.
DCFM or DCFM2 fan trouble
lock signal detected for 1 sec.
Fan motor trouble.
MCU PWB trouble.
fan motor.
VFM2 fan trouble
lock signal detected for 1 sec.
Fan motor trouble.
MCU PWB trouble.
fan motor.
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
L6
10
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
L8
10
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
U1
01
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
02
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
U2
04
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
20
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Polygon motor lock trouble

The polygon motor does not rotate.
or more after the polygon motor rotates.
during rotation of the polygon motor.
Polygon motor unit failure
Polygon motor connection, harness trouble
or disconnection
MCU PWB failure
Check the polygon motor operation with
SIM 61-1.
polygon motor
Replace the polygon motor.
Power abnormality detection trouble
The power status monitoring signal keeps
power OFF state after passing the
specified time (2sec).
Circuit around the power status monitoring
signal (PSSTS) failure.
Check whether power status monitoring
signal (PSSTS) on MCU PWB is OPEN or
not.
Replace MCU PWB.
FAX battery error
The SRAM backup battery voltage on FAX
control PWB falls.
The SRAM backup battery voltage on FAX
control PWB falls.
Check voltage of the SRAM back up
battery.
Replace the battery.
PANEL LOW battery error
The voltage of the panel clock function
battery falls.
The voltage of the panel clock function
battery falls.
Check voltage of panel clock function
battery.
Replace the battery.
EEPROM communication error
EEPROM communication error
EEPROM defect.
ICU PWB EEPROM access circuit failure.
Check that the EEPROM is properly set.
Clear trouble with SIM 16.
Machine speed code data error
The machine boot speed information is not
identical to the model code speed
information
EEPROM defect.
SIM operation error.
Check for matching of the machine and
model information setting in SIM26-57.
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
U7
00
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
U9
00
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
80
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
81
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
82
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
RIC communication trouble

Error in communication with RIC.
Error in communication test after turning
on the power or canceling SIM.
Connector harness contact trouble or
disconnection.
RIC control PWB trouble.
MCU PWB failure.
Malfunction by noises.
Check the communication cable,
connectors from the RIC box to the main
body.
Operation control PWB communication
trouble
the operation control PWB
Operation control PWB connector
disconnection
Harness failure of the operation control
PWB and the MCU PWB
the operation control PWB and MCU PWB.
Check ROM on the operation control PWB.
trouble (Protocol)
the operation control PWB (Protocol error)
disconnection.
Harness failure of the operation control.
PWB and the MCU PWB.
trouble (Parity)
the operation control PWB (Parity error)
disconnection.
trouble (Overrun)
the operation control PWB (Overrun error)
disconnection.
Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
84
U9
Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
88
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
99
Content
Details
Cause
EE
EL
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
EU
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
PF
00
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy

trouble (Framing)
the operation control PWB (Framing error)
disconnection.
trouble (Time-out)
the operation PWB (Time-out error)
disconnection.
Operation panel destination error
An error occurred in checking the
destination of the operation panel and the
main body.
Erroneous connection the operation panel
unit.
SIM setup error.
Check the destination information of the
operation panel unit and the MCU.
(Sim26-6/22)
Developer adjustment trouble (Over-toned
abnormality)
An abnormality occurred in execution of
automatic developer adjustment.
Sample data was detected over-toner.
Toner concentration sensor abnormality.
Toner concentration trouble.
MCU PWB failure.
Use SIM 25-2 to perform the auto
developer adjustment.
Developer adjustment trouble (Undertoned abnormality)
An abnormality occurred in execution of
automatic developer adjustment.
Sample data was detected under-toner.
Toner concentration sensor abnormality.
Toner concentration trouble.
MCU PWB failure.
Use SIM 25-2 to perform the auto
developer adjustment.
PF trouble
The copy inhibit command from RIC is
received.
Judged by the host.
Inform to the host.
[8] MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance list
(For 26cpm)
: Check (Check, clean, replace or adjust according to necessity.)
: Cleaning
Unit
Process
DV
Fusing
Paper feed
Transport
Others
: Replace
: Lubricate
Parts
Drum
Cleaner blade
Seal F/R
Drum frame unit
(Toner reception sheet)
MC unit
Separation pawl unit
Star ring
Developer
Toner filter unit
DV blade
DV side sheet F
DV side sheet R
Toner sensor
Upper heat roller
Lower heat roller
Upper separation pawl
Upper cleaning pad
Lower separation pawl
Thermistor
Fuser gear
Lower fuser bearing
Paper guide
Pickup roller
Paper feeding sheet
Pickup roller and feed roller
(RSPF)
Transport roller unit
Gear
Paper feed rollers
Gears
Ozone filter
75k
150k
225k
300k
375k
450k
525k
600k
AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 1
Note
Usable for three PM cycles
Changing criteria for parts: 100k
(For 31cpm)
: Check (Check, clean, replace or adjust according to necessity.)
: Cleaning
Unit
Process
DV
Fusing
Paper feed
Transport
Others
: Replace
: Lubricate
Parts
Drum
Cleaner blade
Seal F/R
Drum frame unit
(Toner reception sheet)
MC unit
Separation pawl unit
Star ring
Developer
Toner filter unit
DV blade
DV side sheet F
DV side sheet R
Toner sensor
Upper heat roller
Lower heat roller
Upper separation pawl
Upper cleaning pad
Lower separation pawl
Thermistor
Fuser gear
Lower fuser bearing
Paper guide
Pickup roller
Paper feeding sheet
Pickup roller and feed roller
(RSPF)
Gear
Paper feed rollers
Gears
Ozone filter
100k
150k
200k
300k
400k
450k
500k
600k
Note
Usable for three PM cycles
Changing criteria for parts: 100k
2. Details of Maintenance
Unit
A. Process unit
B. Developing unit
C. Fusing section
D. Optical section
E. Paper feed
section
Parts
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
F. Side door unit
G. 1st paper exit unit

H. Laser unit
I. Power unit
J. PWB
Unit
L. Drive section
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Drum
Drum section
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Main charger
Cleaning blade
Drum frame unit
Moquette F/R
Separation pawl
Developer
Toner filter unit
DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R
DV blade
Toner sensor
Thermostat
Thermistor
Paper guide
Lower heat roller
Heater lamp
Upper cleaning pad
Upper heat roller
CCD unit
Lamp unit
a. Lamp
b. PWB
c. Wire
d. Mirror motor
Paper feed solenoid
Tray sensor PWB
Manual P-in sensor/Manual empty sensor
Multi manual
a. Paper feed roller/
paper feed
pickup roller
b. Reverse sensor
c. Separation sheet
d. Clutch/solenoid
Upper 500
sheets tray
pickup roller
paper feed
b. Separation sheet
Lower 500
sheets tray
pickup roller
paper feed
b. Separation sheet
c. Lift up unit
d. Transport clutch
e. Paper feed clutch
f. Transport clutch
g. Solenoid
h. Sensor PWB
Transport roller
DUP motor
Cooling fan
Transport/exit roller
LSU
Power source
Option CN PWB
IMC PWB
MCU PWB
Motherboard PWB
Second interface PWB
M. Transport section
N. Operation section
O. Switch
P. RSPF
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Parts
DUP reverse motor
Main drive motor
Toner motor
PS transport clutch
Paper feed clutch
Drive unit
Lift up motor
Transport roller
Operation section
OPU PWB
Key PWB
LCD unit
Power switch
Document tray a. Document tray unit
section
b. Document length
sensor
c. Document width
resistor PWB
Paper feed unit a. Paper feed clutch
section
b. Pickup roller
c. Paper feed roller
d. Paper feed unit
e. Separation sheet
f. Sensor
Transport
a. Transport unit
section
b. PS clutch
c. Pressure release
solenoid
d. RSPF motor
e. Transport roller
f. Roller
g. Sensor
h. Roller
i. Roller
Base section
a. Interface PWB
b. Solenoid
c. Book sensor
d. Sensor
A. Process unit
(Note for servicing the OPC drums)
1. Prevention of oily dirt attachment
Note:
Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the OPC drum surface. (Keep the unit away from oils and dust.)
When replacing the OPC drum, cover the OPC drum with the protection sheet and hold the protection sheet.
If it is required to hold the OPC drum directly, use enough care not to
touch the cleaning blade area, 5mm inside from both edges of the
OPC drum. (If a fingerprint or oily dirt is attached to the cleaning
blade area of the OPC drum, the cleaning blade may flip.)
K. Ozone filter
5mm
5mm
[Countermeasures]
(2) Drum section
If a fingerprint is attached to the OPC drum surface erroneously,

perform the following countermeasures.
a. Main charger
1
1) Use dry cloth to clean and remove the dirt.

4
2) Apply KYNAR to prevent blade flip.

[Check method]
Check to confirm that the OPC drum is free from fingerprints or oily dirt
and that the cleaning blade is completely cleaned by the following
method.
Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11" x 8.5")
paper, and check the printed paper for any abnormality in the image.
2. Prior exposure prevention
Note:
Avoid servicing in a place where there is strong light.
Do not expose the unit to light for a long time.
Cover the OPC drum with light-blocking material. (When using
paper, use about 10 sheets of paper to block light.)
[Countermeasures]
3
If the OPC drum is erroneously exposed to light too much (prior exposure), perform the following countermeasures.
1) Print half tone images on the whole surface of A4 (11" x 8.5")
paper, and check to confirm that there is no irregular density area
in the previously exposed section.
b. Cleaning blade
1
2) Damages due to prior exposure may be recovered by keeping the

OPC drum for several hours. If, however, image are not recovered,
replace the OPC drum.
(1) Drum
2
2
4
3
c. Drum frame unit
Note: When installing the process unit in the main unit after replacing
the drum, process unit may not be able to install by reason of the
drum drive coupling position.
In this case, rotate the drum about 45 degrees and install again.
B. Developing section
d. Moquette F/R
(1) Developer
Rotate the MG roller to discharge developer.
Note: If it disturbs the blade movement, replace it and attach new one.
e. Separation pawl
Disassembly* Hold the tip of the separation pawl and remove it.
Assembly* Press the center of the separation pawl and install it.
(2) Toner filter unit

With the guide AS (cover) removed, replace it.
When replacing, clean the guide AS.
(3) DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R
(5) Toner sensor

Execution of cleaning the sensor must be made after discharging
used DV in DV replacement.
Without removing the MG roller, use waste cloth to remove toner
from the sensor surface in the arrow direction.
[DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R attachment reference]
Clean the sensor only after removing used DV when replacing DV.
0
Molt
edge
reference
0.3
Molt
edge
reference
C. Fusing section
0.3
0.5
Projection edge
reference
0.5
Projection edge
reference
(4) DV blade
[DV blade attachment reference]
2
1
[Cross-section]
Bump
0
reference
0.5
0.5
Rib reference
(4) Fusing separation pawl (lower)
(1) Thermostat
Note: When securing the lamp harness and the thermostat, the
tightening torque of the screw (4 positions) is 6-9 kgs.
(5) Lower heat roller

3
(2) Thermistor
(3) Paper guide
(6) Heater lamp
(9) Upper heat roller

1
1
2
(7) Upper cleaning pad
1
2
1
2
(10) Thermistor cleaning pad
1
2
2
(8) Fusing separation pawl (upper)
2
1
2
D. Optical section
(1) CCD unit
2
1
1
3
1
1
4
1
1
2
1
3
5
4
1
3
a. Lamp
(2) Lamp unit

1
3
1
1
2
b. PWB
6
2
3
5
2
4
4
(1) Paper feed solenoid
c. Wire
1
2
(2) Tray sensor PWB
1
2
(3) Manual P-in sensor/Manual empty sensor

d. Mirror motor
3
A
(4) Multi manual paper feed
a. Paper feed roller/pickup roller
E. Paper feed section
A
B
A
B
C
Paper feed roller

Pickup roller
Separation sheet
c. Separation sheet
1)
2)
5
6
3)
Slightly apply grease GP501MR (UKOG-0012QSZZ) around the
axis. One rice grain for each.

Installation*Install so that the cam transmit arm (1) comes under the
roller arm (2).
d. Clutch/solenoid
(Clutch)
1
6
5
4
2
3
2
3
5
LOCK
2
1
4
b. Reverse sensor
1
1
2
(Solenoid)
1
2
(5) Upper 500 sheets tray paper feed
(Clutch)
A
A
A
A
1
4
1
3
Note: With the toner cartridge installed, do not tilt or shake the developer cartridge.
4
2
1
3
3
2
b. Separation sheet
1
3
3
4
When replacing, be careful not
to adhere conduction grease

(black) to the drive section.
Slightly apply grease GE676

(UKOG-0013QSZZ) to the
drum boss.
1)
3
2
4
2
b. Separation sheet

Grease should not come out when assembling.
(6) Lower 500 sheets tray paper feed


Grease should not come out when assembling.
c. Lift up unit
1
2
1
1
3
2
d. Transport clutch
g. Solenoid
1
3
3
2
h. Sensor PWB
1
e. Paper feed clutch
2
3
1
3
3
2
F. Side door unit

(1) Transport roller unit
3
f. Transport clutch
Check that two springs are securely inserted into the transfer roller
unit bosses.
(2) Transport roller
(4) DUP motor

1
2
3
1
1
3
1
G. 1st paper exit unit

(1) Cooling fan
(3) DUP transport roller
2
3
3
1
1
4
1
2
5
3
2
1
4
5
2
3
1
2
(2) Transport/exit roller
(Except North America)
2
1
1
3
4
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
H. Laser unit
Note: Do not disassemble the LSU unit.
(1) LSU
1) Turn OFF the machine power, and disconnect the power plug from
the power outlet.
2) Remove the left cabinet and exit tray.
3) Disconnect the LSU connector, and remove the securing screws to
remove the LSU.
Note: Check to confirm that the solenoid shaft is in the gate bracket,
and fix with the screw.
1
2
2
2
3
I. Power unit
(1) Power source
J. PWB
(1) Option CN PWB
1
1
3
1
1
1
3
4
3
2
3
2
(2) IMC PWB
(4) Motherboard PWB
2
1
2
1
1
(3) MCU PWB
1
3
3
3
4
3
1
3
2
3
2
1
1
(5) Second interface PWB
2
1
2
1
2
K. Ozone filter
1
2
1
3
2
1
3
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
(3) Toner motor
1
2
(4) PS transport clutch
L. Drive section
(1) DUP reverse motor
1
3
4
(2) Main drive motor
2
1
2
3
(5) Paper feed clutch
(7) Lift up motor
1
2
1
3
1
2
2
1
(6) Drive unit
3
1
1
4
3
3
2
M. Transport section
(1) Transport roller
Drive unit (Grease application part)
2
1
2
1
(2) OPU PWB
2
3
(3) Key PWB
N. Operation section
(1) Operation section
(4) LCD unit
P. RSPF
(1) Document tray section
a. Document tray unit
1
2
2
2
O. Switch
2
(1) Power switch
(2) Paper feed unit section
b. Document length sensor
a. Paper feed clutch
2
1
1
1
3
3
2
2
b. Pickup roller
c. Document width resistor PWB
2
1
1
c. Paper feed roller
d. Paper feed unit
2
3
e. Separation sheet
2
3
b. PS clutch
f. Sensor
3
2
1
2
1
c. Pressure release solenoid
(3) Transport section

a. Transport unit
d. RSPF motor
3
2
1
1
3
1
2
1
f. Roller
2
1
2
1
<Note for disassembling the motor>
The motor is positioned by the jig. Use the mark when assembling
it to the original position.
e. Transport roller
1
2
g. Sensor
3
2
3
2
1
1
3
2
(4) Base section
h. Roller
a. Interface PWB
1
2
1
2
b. Solenoid
1
2
3
I
O R GI
i. Roller
1
1
2
1
2
c. Book sensor
3
1
2
1
d. Sensor
3. Other related items

A. Counter clear
Item
Maintenance cycle setting
Jam/trouble counter clear
Paper feed counter clear
Scan/Stapler counter clear
Maintenance counter clear
Developing counter clear
SIM
Remarks
SIM 21-1
SIM 24-1
SIM 24-2
SIM 24-3
SIM 24-4 *
SIM 24-5 After execution of SIM25-2,
this counter is cleared.
SIM 24-6
SIM 24-7 At drum replacement
SIM 24-9
Copy counter clear

Drum counter clear
Printer, IMC, Duplex, other
counter clear
FAX counter clear
SIM 24-10
Scanner mode counter clear SIM 24-15
31 sheet model: When maintenance message is displayed, replace
consumption part reaching the number of sheets of maintenance,

then clear the replaced part's counter only.
[9] FIRMWARE UPDATE
A. Firmware update method

(for Copier, and fax firm)
1. Firmware update procedure
Following operational procedures are for:

Copier firm
(Necessary items for update)
fax firm
A Personal computer
B RS232C cross cable (D-sub 9pin to D-sub 9pin, or D-sub 25pin to
D-sub 9pin)
1)
Make sure copier is off, and connect it to PC with download cable

beforehand.
2)
Start up the maintenance program on PC. Select the model name

from the model selection dialogue box.
3)
Make sure only "Printer Control Board" tree is visible under "Simulation Command List".
4)
Turn on the copier. The machine starts up in the download mode.
5)
Additional tree will be visible when downloading maintenance program on PC.
C Software for version-up
(Target PWB)
1 MCU PWB
2 Panel PWB
3 IMC PWB
4 Finisher PWB
Outline of Update Procedure

PC
C
Download
data
RS232C connector
(9pin or 25pin)
RS232C cross cable

(D-sub 9pin to D-sub 9pin)
or
(D-sub 25pin to D-sub 9pin)
I/F circuit (9pin)
1
MCU-PWB
Operation
panel
IMC
PWB
Finisher
Prepare following files necessary for program update

Maintenance software: maintenance.exe
Andromeda module file: ProcModelR.mdl
Make sure to start up maintenance program before turn on the

machine.
Maintenance tool driver: SFZEJENU.inf
Ready to start download process

when these trees appear.
AR-5726/5731 FIRMWARE UPDATE 9 - 1
6)
When downloading copier firm, expand "Special(Copier)", and

double-click on "All Data areas Download".
7)
Select download file(*.dat), and press "Open" button.
8)
Download procedure starts automatically.
9)
Notice message "Download is complete. Check the copier panel

to make sure the download is complete." will appear on PC.
10) Close the maintenance program, and turn off the copier. Turn on
the copier again after pulling the plug.
This is the end of download procedure.
It is possible that download process somehow went wrong if the
copier does not start up properly. In that case, start up the copier
and maintenance program in download mode by repeating the step
1)-5) again. And then, Expand "Special", and double-click on "Confirm Error Status". If any of the message besides "No error has been
occurred" appears, it means that download is incomplete, so please
try again.
B. Others (Troubleshooting)
Followings are the error possibly occur during the download process and troubleshooting method.
No
1
Warning/error message
Incorrect destination. Continue with the
download process?
Incorrect download file.
No downloadable data included.
This option not available.
The data size exceeds the Flash ROM size.

Try again with the appropriate size of data.
Time out error.
Communication (incoming) error.
Checksum error.
Error during the download process. Error

code: 0xXXXXXXXX
10
An error. [0xXXXXXXXX]
Detail
Destination of download file and copier doesn't match.
Possible to select either continue or cancel the job.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
To change destination, select "Yes". If not, select "No" and cancel download process.
Invalid download file for the machine is selected, or the file format is not correct.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Confirm the download file. Possibly the improper download file is selected.
Unable to find appropriate data in selected download file.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Download procedure is executed on uninstalled optional kit.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Confirm installed optional kit.
Panel flash ROM size is not enough to execute download procedure.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Exchange the flash ROM to the one which has more capacity.
Transmission error
Unable to receive data from the machine among the certain period of time.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Restart maintenance program after confirming communication port or communication cable.
Incorrect download procedure.
The machine did not proceed download procedure correctly.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Restart maintenance program after confirming communication port or communication cable.
Make sure the communication device of PC(either COM or parallel) is under right condition.
Transmission error
The check sum value of the transmission data is mismatch.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Restart maintenance program after confirming communication device of PC (either COM or
parallel) is under right condition.
Download data file operation error.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Restart maintenance program after confirming the selected download file is not abnormal and
not using other application.
The error occurred except the above errors.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Restart maintenance program after confirming communication device of PC(either COM or
parallel) is under right condition.
RSPF-Paper feed
clutch
RSPF-DupSOL
AR-5726/5731 ELECTRICAL SECTION 10 - 1
Fuser-Lamp(x2)
Thermister (x 2 Analog)
CN14
Key/LED PWB
OPU-PWB
LSU-UN
APC-PWB
LSU-PWB
Polygon-Motor
CN501
Fuser Unit
CN19
LCD
Touch Panel
Coin
Vender
CN27
WakeUp SW
CN28
Auditer I/F
BD-PWB
BD-Sensor
HVU
CN31
CSS1H: Tray Detector

PSRSOL: Paper Stop Roller Sol.
PCL1H: PickUp Cluth
LUM1H: Lift Up Motor
CN3
Toner-Motor
Main / Sub
Power Supply
Power Unit
CN10
OPERATION PANEL
CN502
DEV/CRUM
CN7
TRAY PAPER
SENSOR
CN12
OP-LO tray
PPD2: Paper Pass Detector
PAP2: Paper Empty
LUD2: Lift Up Detector
CSS2: Casette Detector
DRS2: Door Detector
PCL2: Pick Up Clutch
LUM2: Lift Up Motor
CN18
InterLock
Switch
CN29
OP-UP tray
PPD1: Paper Pass Detector
PAP1: Paper Empty
LUD1: Lift Up Detector
CSS1: Casette Detector
DRS1: Door Detector
PCL1: Pick Up Clutch
LUM1: Lift Up Motor
TRCL: Verical transport roller
clutch 2
CN8
MAIN-Motor
CN30
HPEMPTY: HandpaperEmpty sensor

HPIN: Handpaper IN Sensor
HPTRAY1: Handpaper TRAY Sensor 1
HPTRAY2: Handpaper TRAY Sensor 2
HPSIZE1: Handpaper Size Sensor 1
HPSIZE2: Handpaper Size Sensor 2
HPWS: Handpaper Width Sensor (Analog)
HPSOL: Handpaper PickUp Solenoid
Manual Feed Unit

Main body paper feed load
CN38
CS interface PWB
IMC PWB
256/512MB DIMM (x 2)
D-Sub 15pin
Reactor
(CE Only)
PS-SW
PS Cooling Fan
Front Cooling FAN
Defog Heater
(Japan Only)
AC
SPCL PWB
FAX PWB
Paper Alignment Plate Home Position Detector F

Paper Alignment Plate Home Position Detector R
Delivery Roller Position Detector
Delivery Tray Lower Limit Detector
Delivery Tray Upper Limit Detector
Paper Level Detector
Paper Pass Detector
Paper Rear Edge Detector C
Paper Rear Edge Detector F
Paper Rear Edge Detector R
Staple Empty Detector
Staple Lead Detector
Staple Home Position Sensor
Staple Tray Paper Detector
Inner Finisher Unit (Optional)
CN
Paper Feed Motor
CN22
Multi-step tray Unit (Optional)
CN15
CN23
(AB / INCH )
Paper Feed Motor
CN11
CCD-PWB
Option
Connector PWB
CN5
PCL2H: Pick Up Clutch

LUM2H: Lift Up Motor
TRCLH: Vertical Transport Roller Clutch
CS interface PWB
Paper Remove
Sol
Duplex Paper Out Sensor
MCU-PWB
Paper Size Sensor

AB
INCH
D-Sub 25pin
Down-Load-Connector
D-Sub 9pin
Plasmacluster
(Download PC with exclusive connection)
CN
2nd tray Unit (Optional)

CSS2H: Casette Detector
DRS2H: Door Detector
PPD2H: Paper Pass Detector
PAP2H: Paper Empty
LUD2H: Lift Up Detector
PCS1H ; Pick Up Solenoid
PAP1H ; Paper Empty

LUD1H ; Lift Up Detector
PPD1H (PIN) : Paper IN
Main tray Unit
CN503
Paper Full
Sensor
Humidity Sensor
CN26
Duplex Conveyance Sensor
CN25
CN1
Defog
Heater
Mirror HP
Sensor
CN6
Duplex-Motor
CN504
CN4
CPLD Writer
CN505
CN21
Copy-Lamp
Scanner
Cover
Sensor
Mirror-Motor
INNER
FINISHER PWB
Pout Cooling Fan (x 2)
Duplex 2 Motor
CN32
CN2
Pout 2 Ssensor
Except North America
CN17
Pout Gate
Solenoid
Pout Sensor
Shifter
HP
Except North America
Sensor
2nd POUT
COVER SENSOR
Shifter-Motor
Fuser Cooling Fan (x 2)
POUT2_R: Paper OUT (Right Tray) Detector

PFULL2_R: Paper Full (Right Tray) Detector
KEEPSOL1/2: KeepSolenoid (Right Tray)
Right Tray Paper OUT Unit (Optional)
RSPF-Pressure
release SOL
RSPF-CNT-PWB
RSPF-Motor
L2
L1
RSPF-SEN-PWB
RSPF Cover Sens
RSPF PS Sens
RSPF Paper Empty
RSPF Paper Out Sensor
RSPF Paper Width Sens (Analog)
RSPF BOOK Sens
RSPF Unit
Delivery Roller Lift Motor
Paper Alignment Motor F
Paper Alignment Motor R
Paper Delivery Motor
Paper Transport Motor
Stalpe Motor
Tray Lift Motor
Rear Edge Take-up Roller Solenoid
Paper Pass Gate Solenoid
Paddle Solenoid
Control PWB Cooling Fan
Stapler Cooling Fan
Paper Entry Gate
Safety Switch
[10] ELECTRICAL SECTION
1. Block diagram
A. SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
Mother PWB
CN9
2. Actual wiring chart
CN5(52746-1571)
V0
1
LP
2
D-GND
3
4
CP
5
D-GND
6
M
3.3V_EXT 7
8
D0
D1
9
D-GND 10
11
D2
12
D3
D-GND 13
DISP
14
VEE
15
CN6
(SM02(8.0)
B-BHS-1-TB)
CCFT+ 1
/CCFT
2
AB ONLY
PAPER SIZE SENSOR
(AB ONLY)
Sub scanning side
CN23(B34B-PHDSS-B)
1
/ABJP
2
DGND
3
LED1#
5
LED2#
7
LED3#
9
5V
11
DGND
13
DSCLK#
15
DSIN0
17
/INCHJP
18
DGND
4
LED1#
6
LED2#
8
LED3#
10
5V
12
DGND
14
DSCLK#
16
DSIN3
19
DSIN2A
20
DSIN2B
21
DGND
22
DGND
23
DSCLK#
24
DSCLK#
25
5V
26
5V
27
LED0#
28
LED0#
OCCOVER 29
30
DGND
5V(PULL UP) 31
5V(PULL UP) 32
33
MHP
34
DGND
CN23(B34B-PHDSS-B)
1
/ABJP
2
DGND
3
LED1#
4
LED1#
5
LED2#
6
LED2#
7
LED3#
8
LED3#
9
5V
10
5V
11
DGND
12
DGND
13
DSCLK#
14
DSCLK#
15
DSIN0
16
DSIN3
/INCHJP
17
DGND
18
19
DSIN2A
21
DGND
23
DSCLK#
25
5V
27
LED0#
20
DSIN2B
22
DGND
24
DSCLK#
26
5V
28
LED0#
OCCOVER 29
30
DGND
5V(PULL UP) 31
5V(PULL UP) 32
33
MHP
34
DGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
LED1#
LED2#
LED3#
5V
DGND
DSCLK
DSIN0
N.C
292250-8
Main scanning side

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
LED1#
LED2#
LED3#
5V
DGND
DSCLK
DSIN0
N.C
292250-8
OC COVER SENSOR
1
2
3
OC COVER
DGND
PULL UP
292250-3
MHP SENSOR
3
PULL UP
2
MHP
1
DGND
S3B-PH-K-S
INCH ONLY
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
PAPER SIZE SENSOR

(INCH ONLY)
Sub scanning side
1
2
3
4
5
DSIN2A
DGND
DSCLK#
5V
LED0#
292250-5
Main scanning side

1
2
3
4
5
DSIN2B
DGND
DSCLK#
5V
LED0#
292250-5
OC COVER SENSOR
1 OC COVER
2
DGND
3
PULL UP
292250-3
MHP SENSOR
3
PULL UP
2
MHP
1
DGND
S3B-PH-K-S
CN**(*****)
1
V0
2
LP
3
D-GND
4
CP
5
D-GND
6
M
7 3.3V_EXT
8
D0
9
D1
10
D-GND
11
D2
12
D3
13
D-GND
14
DISP
15
VEE
PANEL UNIT
CN2(52271-2479)
24
GND
23 INFO_LED
22 /START_KEY
21
SENSE0
20
SENSE1
19
SENSE2
18
SENSE3
17
SENSE4
16
SCAN0
15
SCAN1
14
SCAN2
13
SCAN3
12
SCAN4
11
/SEG0
10
/SEG1
9
/SEG2
8
/SEG3
7
COM0
6
COM1
5
COM2
4 /BZR_PWM
3 START_LED
2
5Vsub
1
GND
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
FPC
OPTICAL BASE PLATE (1/2)
MCU PWB
KEY PWB
CN1(IMSA-9619S-24C-TB)
GND
INFO_LED
/START_KEY
SENSE0
SENSE1
SENSE2
SENSE3
SENSE4
SCAN0
SCAN1
SCAN2
SCAN3
SCAN4
/SEG0
/SEG1
/SEG2
/SEG3
COM0
COM1
COM2
/BZR_PWM
START_LED
5Vsub
GND
CN4(52271-0469)
X2/
1
Y2/
2
X1
3
Y1
4
LCD UNIT
CN1(52610-1871)
18
DGND
17 +24V_OP
16
DGND
15
+5V
14
DGND
13
+3.3V
12
+3.3V
11 RES_OPU
10 /CLK_OPU
9 CRDY_OPU
8 SRDY_OPU
7 /TXD_OPU
6 /RXD_OPU
5
DGND
4 Standby_LED
3 /WakeUp_Key
2
+5Vsub
1
DGND
OPU PWB
CN9(52207-1885)
18
DGND
17
24V1
16
DGND
15
+5V
DGND
14
+3.3V
13
+3.3V
12
RES_OPU
11
/CLK_OPU
10
CRDY_OPU 9
SRDY_OPU
8
7
/TXD_OPU
/RXD_OPU
6
5
DGND
Standby_LED 4
/WakeUp_Key 3
+5Vsub
2
DGND
1
TOUCH PANEL
A. MCU - Panel unit, Optical base plate sensor section
<MIRROR MOTOR>
CCD PWB
RSPF
FINISHER
CN903(SUB-D9)
1
N.C
2
SVCMDX
3
SVSTSX
4
DTRX
5
DGND
6
DSRX
7
RTSX
8
CTSX
9
N.C
CN905(SUB-D15)
1
PGND
2
24V_FN
3
/FINCRDY
4
FINSTS
5
/RESET#
6
FINPIN
7
24V_FN
8
PGND
9
DGND
10
3.3V1
11
/FINSRDY
12
FINCMD
13
5V1
14
/FINDET
15
DGND
CN904(SUB-D25)
1
DGND
2
24V_RSPF
3
/SPFMODB#
4
/SPFMODA#
5
SPFMODA#
6
SELC#
7
SELB#
8
SPFPDA
9
SPFRSOL#
10
SPFPSOL#
11
SPFPAPER
12
24V_RSPF
13
DGND
14
PGND
15
YSPF
16
DGND
17
SPFMODB#
18
SPFWS
19
3.3V1
20
SELA#
21
SPFCLH#
22
SPFGSOL#
23
SPFPDB
24
5V1
25
PGND
CN906(52147-0510)
1
MIRMODA#
2
MIRMODB#
3
/MIRMODA#
4
/MIRMODB#
5
24V_MIR
COPY LAMP UNIT
CN30(B18B-PHDSS-B)
2
DGND
1
5V
4
3.3V
3
SVSTS
6
DTR
5
CTS
8
SVCMD
7
RTS
10
DSR
9
/FINCRDY#
12
/FINSRDY
11
FINSTS#
14
FINCMD
13
/RESET#
16
/MSFINDET
15
/FINDET
18
PGND
17
24V1
CN901(B18B-PHDRS-B)
1
DGND
2
5V
3
3.3V
4
SVSTS
5
DTR
6
CTS
7
SVCMD
8
RTS
9
DSR
10
/FINCRDY
11
/FINSRDY
12
FINSTS
13
FINCMD
14
/RESET#
15
FINPIN
16
/FINDET
17
PGND
18
24VOP
CN26(IMSA-9604S-04C)
1
PGND
2
PGND
3
/CL
4
24V
CN31(B26B-PHDSS-B)
2
MIRMO0#
1
MIRMO2#
4
/MIRMODB#
3
MIRMO1#
6
MIRMODA#
5
MIRMODB#
8
DGND
7
/MIRMODA#
10
SPFWS
9
DGND
12
YSPF
11
/SPFMODB#
14
/SPFMODA#
13
SPFMODB#
16
SPFMODA#
15
SELC#
18
SELB#
17
SELA#
20
SPFCLH#
19
SPFRSOL#
22
SPFGSOL#
21
SPFPSOL#
24
SPFPAPER
23
5V
26
PGND
25
24V1
4
3
2
1
PGND
PGND
/CL
24V
CN6(FF4-32-S15D3-FA)
1
CCDD4
2
CCDD3
3
CCDD5
4
CCDD2
5
CCDD6
6
CCDD1
7
CCDD7
8
CCDD0
9
ADSCLK
10
ADWRT
11
ADSD
12
/f1
13
3.3V
14
/SH
15
DGND
16
/f2
17
DGND
18
DGND
19
DGND
20
/REFCK
21
DGND
22
/DATCK
23
DGND
24
/FR
25
/DUMC
26
/PB
27
/OB
28
5V
29
DGND
30
12V
31
DGND
32
12V
CN902(B26B-PHDSS-B)
1
MIRMO0#
2
MIRMO2#
3
/MIRMODB#
4
MIRMO1#
5
MIRMODA#
6
MIRMODB#
7
DGND
8
/MIRMODA#
9
SPFWS
10
DGND
11
YSPF
12
/SPFMODB#
13
/SPFMODA#
14
SPFMODB#
15
SPFMODA#
16
SELC#
17
SELB#
18
SELA#
19
SPFCLH#
20
SPFRSOL#
21
SPFGSOL#
22
SPFPSOL#
23
SPFPAPER
24
5V
25
PGND
26
24VOP
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CCDD4
CCDD3
CCDD5
CCDD2
CCDD6
CCDD1
CCDD7
CCDD0
ADSCLK
ADWRT
ADSD
/f1
3.3V
/SH
DGND
/f2
DGND
DGND
DGND
/REFCK
DGND
/DATCK
DGND
/FR
/DUMC
/PB
/OB
5V
DGND
12V
DGND
12V
CN1(FF4-32-S15D3-FA)
OPTICAL BASE PLATE(2/2)
CZHR-03V-S CZHR-03V-S
1
3
PullUp
2
2
POUT1
3
1
DGND
3
4
1
5
6
2
10
14
13
12
16
15
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
Red
1
2
3
4
5
CN2(B6B-PH-K-S)
SW24V
SW24V
SFTDA#
SFTDB#
/SFTDA#
/SFTDB#
CN4(B5B-PH-K-R)
SW24V
DUP2MODA#
DUP2MODB#
/DUP2MODA#
/DUP2MODB#
CN1(B5B-PAEK-1) Blue
SW24V / SW24V_Dup
1
2
DPXA
3
DPXB
4
/DPXA
5
/DPXB
CN22(S3B-PH-K-M) Green
1
24V
2
/PGSOL1
3
/PGSOL2
5V
SFTHP
DGND
5V(PullUp)
POUT1
DGND
TFANOUT
TFANRDY
PGND
TFANOUT
TFANRDY
PGND
DGND
CN32(B16B-PHDSS-B)
7
N.C
9
N.C
11
N.C
(N.C)
6
9
/POUT2B_DET
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
10
8
POUTCOV
DGND
DGMD
4
5
7
5V
PFULL2
DGND
5V
SFTHP
DGND
GP1A71L3
SMP-03V-NC SMR-03V-N
1
TFANOUT
1
3
TFANRDY
3
2
PGND
2
SMP-03V-NC SMR-03V-N
1
TFANOUT
1
3
TFANRDY
3
2
PGND
2
3
2
1
S 3B-PH-K-S
<COOLING FAN 2>
<INTERNAL COOLING FAN>
<COOLING FAN 1>
<PAPER OUT1 SENSOR>
<DUPLEX 2 MOTOR>
Except North America: Installed

North America: Not installed
<SHIFTER MOTOR>
<DUPLEX MOTOR>
<PAPER OUT GATE SL>
PINK
BROWN
GRAY
<SHIFTER HP SENSOR>

[1st PAPER EXIT UNIT]
<PAPER EXIT COVER OPEN/CLOSE

SENSOR SW>
<2nd PAPER FULL SENSOR>
<2nd PAPER EXIT SENSOR>
* When right paper exit unit (option) is installed:

Right paper exit door open/close sensor
292250-2
POUTCOV
1
2
DGND
DF3A-3P-2DS
2
5V
3
PFULL2
1
DGND
GP1SQ44S
292250-3
GP1SQ73P
3
5V(PULL_UP)
1
POUT2
2
DGND
3
2
1
CN21(B10B-PASK-1)
5V(PULL_UP)
POUT2
DGND

[2nd PAPER EXIT UNIT]
B. MCU - Optical base plate 2, OP I/F PWB, 1st paper exit unit, 2nd paper exit unit
MCU PWB
OP I/F PWB
RIC / DOWNLOAD/ PCI
MCU PWB

26
28
30
16
18
20
22
24
/HPIN
DGND
5V(PULL UP)
HPEMPTY
DGND
5V(PULL UP)
CSS1H
DGND
CN14(B8B-PH-K-S)
1
24V
2
/PCS1H
3
DGND
4
/PIN
5
5V
6
/PAP1H
7
N.C
8
/LUD1H
6
8
/LUM1H
PGND
3
4
24V
PSRSOL/
2
1
32
34
35
36
5V
PPSEN
DGND
DGND
/PCL1H
24V
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
10
12
14
HPTRAY1
DGND
HPTRAY2
DGND
HPSIZE1
DGND
5V(PULL UP)
HPSIZE2
DGND
5V(PULL UP)
3.3V
HPWS
DGND
DGND
DUP2SEN
5V(PULL UP)
CN15(B36B-PUDSS-1)
5
24V
7
/HPSOL
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
BU03P-TR-P-H
DGND
DUP2SEN
PULL UP
3
2
1
PHNR-3-H
PHNR-5-H
1
2
3
4
5
BU05P-TR-P-H
HPEMPTY
DGND
PULL UP
CSS1H
DGND
5
4
3
2
1
PHNR-5-H
SMP-02V-BC BLACK SMR-02V-B

1
1
/PCL1H
2
2
24V
SMP-03V-NC
SMR-03V-N
1
1
24V
2
2
N.C
3
3
/PSRSOL
1
2
3
PHNR-3-H
HARNESS GUIDE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
4
3
2
1
MAIN FRAME
PHNR-15-H
PHNR-4-H
BU04P-TR-P-H
/HPIN
N.C
DGND
PULL UP
PHNR-4-H
1
2
3
4
PHNR-15-H
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
BU15P-TR-P-H
24V
/HPSOL
HPTRAY1
DGND
HPTRAY2
DGND
HPSIZE1
DGND
PULL UP
HPSIZE2
DGND
PULL UP
3.3V
HPWS
DGND
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
DGND
/PIN
5V
/PAP1H
N.C
/LUD1H
B 6B-PH-K-S
SMR-02V-N
SMP-02V-NC
1
1
24V
2
2
/PCS1H
<PAPER PATH SENSOR>

<PAPER EMPTY SENSOR>
<PAPER UPPER LIMIT SENSOR>
<TRAY SENSOR PWB>
<PAPER FEED SOLENOID>
<CASETTE SENSOR SW (TRAY DETECTION)>
[1st TRAY UNIT]
<HAND PAPER
EMPTY SENSOR PWB>
VHPSG2481++-1
<HAND PAPER IN
SENSOR PWB>
VHPSG2481++-1
292250-3
1
/HPEMPTY
2
DGND
3
PULL UP
292250-3
1
/HPIN
2
DGND
3
PULL UP
[LIFT UP MOTOR UNIT]
<PAPER FEED CLUCH>
/LUM1H
N.C
PGND
B 3B-PH-K-S
<DUPLEX 2 SENSOR PWB>
<PAPER STOP ROLLER CLUCH>
DGND
DUP2SEN
PULL UP
<HAND PAPER WIDTH SENSOR>
<HAND PAPER SIZE SENSOR 2>
<HAND PAPER PICK SIZE SENSOR 1>
<HAND PAPER TRAY 2>
<HAND PAPER TRAY 1>
LIFT UP MOTORUN PLATE
1
2
3
S 3B-PH-K-S
3.3V
HPWS
DGND
292250-2
1
CSS1H
2
DGND
1
2
3
S 3B-PH-K-S
292250-3
1
HPSIZE2
2
DGND
3
PULL UP
292250-3
1
HPSIZE1
2
DGND
3
PULL UP
292250-2
1
HPTRAY2
2
DGND
292250-2
1
HPTRAY1
2
DGND
<HAND PAPER
SOLENOID>
[HAND PAPER (MANUAL FEED) UNIT]

SMP-02V-NC
SMR-02V-N
1
1
24V
2
2
/HPSOL
C. Manual feed, 1st tray unit section

[1st TRAY UNIT]
CN38(B28B-PUDSS-1)
1
PGND
2
24V
3
5V
4
24V
5
PCS1A#
6
LUM1A#
7
TRCLA#
8
PCL1A#
9
PCS2#
10
LUM2#
11
PCL2#
12
Y1B
13
LUM1B#
14
Y2
15
CSSELA#
16
TRCLB#
17
CSSELB#
18
PCS1B#
19
CSSELC#
20
PCL1B#
21
AI#
22
BI#
23
/AI#
24
/BI#
25
Y1A
26
OPCASSEL#
27
DGND
28
DGND
CN5(B28B-PUDSS-1)
1
PGND
2
24V
3
5V
4
24V
5
PCS2#
6
LUM2#
7
TRCL2#
8
PCL2#
9
PCS4#
10
LUM4#
11
PCL4#
12
Y3
13
LUM3#
14
Y4
15
CSSELA#
16
TRCL3#
17
CSSELB#
18
PCS3#
19
CSSELC#
20
PCL3#
21
AI#
22
BI#
23
/AI#
24
/BI#
25
Y2
26
OPCASSEL#
27
DGND
28
DGND
CN9(B24B-PUDSS-1)
1
PGND
2
24V
3
5V
4
24V
5
LUM4#
6
PCS4#
7
Y3
8
PCL4#
9
Y4
10
LUM3#
11
TRCL3#
12
CSSELA#
13
PCS3#
14
CSSELB#
15
PCL3#
16
CSSELC#
17
BI#
18
AI#
19
/BI#
20
/AI#
21
OPCASSEL#
22
DGND
23
DGND
24
DGND
Standard Tray I/F PWB
MCU PWB
D. 2nd tray unit section
Option Tray I/F PWB
[2nd TRAY UNIT]

CN3(B3B-PH-K-S)
/PCL2
N.C
24V
1
2
3
CN2(B3B-PH-K-K) Black
1
/TRCL2
2
N.C
3
24V
<PAPER FEED CL>
<VERTICAL TRANSPORT ROLLER CL>
(N.C)
TRAY SENSOR PWB

CN8(B8B-PH-K-S)
DGND
PPD2
5V
PAP2
DRS2
LUD2
/PCS2
24V
B 6B-PH-K-S
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CN7(B3B-PH-K-E) Blue
1
CSS2
2
N.C
3
DGND
CN1(B3B-PH-K-R) Red
1
LUM2D
2
N.C
3
PGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
B 3B-PH-K-S
DGND
PPD2
5V
PAP2
DRS2
LUD2
DRS2
N.C
DGND
1
2
3
292250-2
1
DRS2
2
D-GND
<PAPER PATH SENSOR>

<PAPER EMPTY SENSOR>
<PAPER UPPER LIMIT SENSOR>
SMR-02V-N
SMP-02V-NC
1
1
/PCS2
<PAPER
2
2
24V
292250-2
1
CSS2
2
DGND
FEED SL>
<TRAY SENSOR SW>
B 3B-PH-K-S
1
2
3
LUM2D
N.C
PGND
<DOOR OPEN/CLOSE
SENSOR SW>
[LIFT UP MOTOR UNIT]
THERMOSTAT 2
3
2
1
RHNR-4-H
4
3
2
1
RHNR-3-H
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
VLP-03V
VLR-03V
1
LIVE2
1
2
N.C
2
3
HL-OUTPUT2
3
VLP-02V
VLR-02V
1
LIVE1
1
2
HL-OUTPUT1
2
HARNESS GUIDE
HEATER LAMP 2 (SIDE)
BU04P-TR-P-H
RTH1
DGND
RTH2
DGND
BU03P-TR-P-H
5V(PullUp)
DGND
PDPX
CN6(B2P3-VH)
1
HL-OUTPUT1
2
N.C
3
HL-OUTPUT2
CN5(B2P-VL)
1
LIVE1
2
LIVE2
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
1
2
3
CN3(B03P-VL-B)
AC-LIVE IN
N.C
AC-NEUT IN
FGND
CN1(B03P-VL)
LIVE
N.C
NEUTRAL
FGND
CN1(B03P-VL)
LIVE
N.C
NEUTRAL
1
2
3
1
2
3
CN102(B3B-PH-K-S)
1
/PSFAN
2
N.C
3
GND
3
2
1
CN2(B03P-VL-R)
AC-NEUT OUT
N.C
AC-LIVE OUT
CN401(B2P-VH_RD_Red)
1
DVBS
2
GND
CN301(B2P-VH_BK_Black)
1
DHV
2
N.C
#187(B201)[WH]
THV
CN101(B2P-VH_White)
1
GB
2
N.C
CN21(B2P-VH_BL_Blue)
1
MCCASE
2
N.C
#187(B1)[RD]
MHV
LVPS PWB (1/2)
LVPS PWB (2/2)
CN101(B30B-PNDZS-1)
1
+12V
3
Sub3.3V
5
+3.3V
7
+3.3V
9
+5V
11
D-GND
13
D-GND
19
D-GND
21
+24V
23
P-GND
25
/PR
27
FW
29
P-OFF
2
Sub5V
4
Sub3.3V
6
+3.3V
8
+5V
10
D-GND
12
D-GND
14
D-GND
16
D-GND
18
+24VINT
20
+24VINT
22
P-GND
28
HLOUT2
30
HLOUT1
15
D-GND
17
D-GND
24
P-GND
26
FAN-C
CN1(B11B-PH-K-S)
9
DGND
11
SW24V
3
TCDA#
4
DHVREM
6
THV-REM
8
DVBSPWM
1
MHVREM
5
THVREM
2
GBPWM
7
DVBSREM
10
N.C
CN20(B10B-PH-K-S)
1
24VOP
2
24VOP
3
24VOP
4
+3.3V
5
+5V
6
D-GND
7
D-GND
8
P-GND
9
P-GND
10
P-GND
HV PWB
HEATER LAMP 1 (CENTER)
THERMOSTAT 1
THERMISTER 2
RHNR-4-H
1
2
3
4
RHNR-3-H
1
2
3
MCU PWB
THERMISTER 1
292250-3
5V(PullUp)
3
DGND
2
PDPX
1
DGND
RTH2
DGND
RTH1
PDPX
DGND
5V(PullUp)
<DUPLEX PAPER OUT SENSOR>
[FUSING UNIT]
CN19(S7B-PH-K-S)
CN10(B30B-PUDSS-1)
11
24V1
5
P-GND
14
D-GND
16
D-GND
21
+12V
28
3.3Vsub
22
+3.3V
20
+3.3V
18
+5V
30
D-GND
26
D-GND
2
D-GND
3
+24V
8
P-GND
9
/PR
13
FW
15
POFFR#
25
5Vsub
27
3.3Vsub
24
+3.3V
17
+5V
29
D-GND
23
D-GND
19
D-GND
1
D-GND
6
+24VINT
4
+24VINT
7
P-GND
12
HLOUT2
10
HLOUT1
CN12(B10B-PASK-1)
1
DGND
2
SW24V
3
TCDA#
4
DHVREM/
5
THV-REM/
6
DVBSPWM/
7
MHVREM/
8
THVREM
9
GBPWM/
10
DVBSREM/
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
[POWER SUPPLY UNIT]
White
Brown
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
DHV
THV
GB
SOKET
White
Black
Black
White
200V only
PS-250-R (RED)
SW IN (LIVE)
PS-250-R (RED)
SW IN (NEUTRAL)
PS-250
SW OUT (NEUTRAL) 1
PS-250
SW OUT (LIVE)
1
<AC SW>
TC HIGH VOLTAGE
HOLDER
MCCASE
(To DV & LSU unit section)
MHV
E. Fusing unit, Power supply unit section
PM PWB
BPC
APC
/PMCLK
/PMRDY
/PMD
PGND
24V
177622-5
DGND
/SYNC
SW5V
B3B-PH-K-S
SW5V
/SYNC
/VIDEO
/SAMP
APCSTT#
DGND
LPSEL
SW5V
/SYNC
DGND
B10B-PH-K-S
LSU UNIT
2
1
3
1
2
3
4
5
3
2
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3
2
1
(TSHP-04V-K)
CRUM PWB
TCS
4
3
2
1
51010-0811
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
(To HV PWB)
DGND
TRAY PAPER
PULL UP
BU03P-TR-P-H
PHNR-3-H
1
2
3
SW5V
/PMRDY
/VIDEO
/SAMP
APCSTT
DGND
LPSEL
/PMCLK
/SYNC
/PMD
PGND
24V
BU12P-TR-P-H
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
PHNR-12-H
(THSR-04V-K)
DGND
5V
DEVCLK#
DEVID#
52025-0811
8
DVBS
7
N.C
6
DGND
5
DEV
4
N.C
3
N.C
2
TONER
1
24V
PHNR-3-H
3
2
1
SMR-03V-N
SMP-03V-NC
1
1
/PSFANOUT
3
3
PSFANRDY
2
2
PGND
SMR-03V-N
SMP-03V-NC
1
1
/PSFANOUT
3
3
PSFANRDY
2
2
PGND
<PAPER EXIT TRAY UNIT>
<PAPER EXIT TRAY SENSOR>
GP1S73P
DGND
TRAY PAPER
PULL UP
<PS FAN 2 (FRONT)>
<PS FAN 1 (SIDE)>
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PHNR-12-H
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
/PSFANOUT
PSFANRDY
PGND
DGND
DEV
TONER
24V
DGND
5V
DEVCLK#
DEVID#
CN501(B13B-PASK-1)
1
SW5V
2
DGND
3
/PMRDY
4
/VIDEO
5
/SAMP
6
APCSTT
7
DGND
8
LPSEL
9
/PMCLK
10
/SYNC
11
/PMD
12
PGND
13
24V
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
CN502(B14B-PUDSS-1)
10
OZNFANOUT
12
OZNFANRDY
14
PGND
13
DGND
11
TRAY PAPER
9
5V(PULL UP)
3
2
1
CN29(B6B-PH-K-S)
6
/PSFANOUT
5
PSFANRDY
4
PGND
1
2
CN3(B2P-VH)
TMD
/TMD
1
2
3
(N.C)
CN503(B4B-PH-K-S)
1
5V
2
EHUD#
3
DGND
4
ERTH
CN11(B4B-PH-K-K)BLACK
1
24V
2
/PREMSOL
3
N.C
(N.C)
4
DGND
(N.C)
CN18(B03P-VH)
24VINT
PGND
SW24V
CN504(B06B-CZHK-B-1)
6
/POUTFANOUT
POUTFANRDY
5
4
PGND
3
/POUTFANOUT
POUTFANRDY
2
1
PGND
5
4
3
2
1
CN8(B5B-PH-K-S)
SW24V
PGND
/MMD
/MMRDY
/MMCLK
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5V
EHUD#
DGND
ERTH
(S4B-ZR-SM3A-TF)
SMP-02V-NC
1
24V
2
DGND
SMP-03V-NC
1
24VINT
2
N.C
3
SW24V
SMR-02V-N
1
2
ILSW
<INTERLOCK SW>
<SEPARATION PAWL SOLENOID>
Soldering
24VINT
Soldering
SW24V
<POUT FAN 2>
<POUT FAN 1>
<TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSOR>
only
SMR-03V-N
1
2
3
CK03-6H-P 31 CPM model

1
3
POUTFANOUT
2
POUTFANRDY
2
3
1
PGND
CK03-6H-P
3
POUTFANOUT
2
POUTFANRDY
1
PGND
<TONNER MOTOR>
<MAIN MOTOR>
(B5B-PH-K-S)
1
SW24V
2
PGND
3
/MMD
4
/MMRDY
5
/MMCLK
F. DV & LSU unit section
MCU PWB
CN**(TX24-60R-12ST-H1)
1
24V
2
24V
3
5V
4
5V
5
3.3V
6
3.3V
7
/RESET
8
/PWOFF
9
/PRLINE
10
/HSYNC
11
GND
12
GND
13 /FAXPAGE
14
FAXCMD
15 /FAXCRDY
16
GND
17
GDATA0
18
GDATA2
19
GDATA4
20
GDATA6
21
GDATA8
22
GDATA10
23
GDATA12
24
GDATA14
25
GND
26
/FAXPRD
27 /FAXACK1P
28
GND
29 /FAXACK0P
30
GND
31
24V
32
24V
33
5V
34
5Vsub
35
3.3V
36
3.3V
37
EXTRS
38
FAXWU
39
/SCLINE
40
/READY
41
GND
42
GND
43
/FAXDET
44
FAXSTS
45 /FAXSRDY
46
GND
47
GDATA1
48
GDATA3
49
GDATA5
50
GDATA7
51
GDATA9
52
GDATA11
53
GDATA13
54
GDATA15
55
GND
56 /FAXREQ1P
57 /FAXCS1P
58 /FAXREQ0P
59 /FAXCS0P
60
GND
IMC PWB
Board to Board Connector
CN7(TX25-60P-12ST-H1E)
5V
1
5V
2
3.3V
3
3.3V
4
/MRESET
5
/PWOFF
6
/PRLINE
7
/HSYNC
8
DGND
9
DGND
10
DGND
11
N.C
12
/ESPAGE
13
ESCMD
14
/ESCRDY
15
DGND
16
GDATA0
17
GDATA2
18
GDATA4
19
GDATA6
20
GDATA8
21
GDATA10
22
GDATA12
23
GDATA14
24
N.C
25
/ESACK1P 26
N.C
27
/ESPRD
28
/ESACK0P 29
DGND
30
5V
31
5V
32
3.3V
33
3.3V
34
N.C
35
N.C
36
/SCLINE
37
/READY
38
DGND
39
DGND
40
DGND
41
N.C
42
/ESDET
43
ESSTS
44
/ESSRDY
45
DGND
46
GDATA1
47
GDATA3
48
GDATA5
49
GDATA7
50
GDATA9
51
GDATA11
52
GDATA13
53
GDATA15
54
N.C
55
/ESREQ1P 56
/ESCS1P
57
/ESREQ0P 58
/ESCS0P
59
DGND
60
MCU PWB
CN5(TX25-60R-12ST-H1E)
1
3.3VSub
2
3.3VSub
3
24V
4
DGND
5
DGND
6
/SCLINE
7
/READY
8
5V
9
GDATA1
10
GDATA3
11
GDATA5
12
GDATA7
13
GDATA9
14
GDATA11
15
GDATA13
16
GDATA15
17 /PRINTERWU
18
/PCLDET
19
PCLSTS
20 /PCLSRDY
21 /PCLREQ1P
22 /PCLCS1P
23 /PCLREQ0P
24 /PCLCS0P
25
/FAXDET
26
FAXSTS
27 /FAXSRDY
28 /FAXREQ0P
29 /FAXCS0P
30
3.3V
31
5Vsub
32
EXTRS
33
GND
34
GND
35
/MRESET
36
/PWOFF
37
/PRLINE
38
/HSYNC
39
/PSSTS
40
GDATA0
41
GDATA2
42
GDATA4
43
GDATA6
44
GDATA8
45
GDATA10
46
GDATA12
47
GDATA14
48
/FAXWU
49
/GDIDET
50
PCLCMD
51 /PCLCRDY
52
/PCLPRD
53 /PCLACK1P
54 /PCLACK0P
55 /FAXPAGE
56
FAXCMD
57 /FAXCRDY
58
/FAXPRD
59 /FAXACK0P
60
3.3V
CN9(B3B-PH-K-S)
SP+
1
SP2
N.C
3
SPEAKER
FAX PWB
CN1(TX25-60P-12ST-H1)
24V
1
24V
2
5V
3
5V
4
3.3V
5
3.3V
6
/RESET
7
/PWOFF
8
/PRLINE
9
/HSYNC
10
GND
11
GND
12
/FAXPAGE 13
FAXCMD
14
/FAXCRDY 15
GND
16
GDATA0
17
GDATA2
18
GDATA4
19
GDATA6
20
GDATA8
21
GDATA10
22
GDATA12
23
GDATA14
24
GND
25
/FAXPRD
26
/FAXACK1P 27
GND
28
/FAXACK0P 29
GND
30
24V
31
24V
32
5V
33
5Vsub
34
3.3V
35
3.3V
36
EXTRS
37
FAXWU
38
/SCLINE
39
/READY
40
GND
41
GND
42
/FAXDET
43
FAXSTS
44
/FAXSRDY 45
GND
46
GDATA1
47
GDATA3
48
GDATA5
49
GDATA7
50
GDATA9
51
GDATA11
52
GDATA13
53
GDATA15
54
GND
55
/FAXREQ1P 56
/FAXCS1P 57
/FAXREQ0P 58
/FAXCS0P 59
GND
60
MOTHER PWB
CN**(TX25-60P-12ST-H1)
1
5Vsub
2
5Vsub
3
3.3Vsub
4
3.3Vsub
/RESET
5
/PWOFF
6
7
/PRLINE
8
/HSYNC
9
GND
10
GND
11
GND
12
GND
13 /PCLPAGE
14
PCLCMD
15 /PCLCRDY
16
GND
17
GDATA0
18
GDATA2
19
GDATA4
20
GDATA6
GDATA8
21
22
GDATA10
23
GDATA12
24
GDATA14
GND
25
/PCLPRD
26
27 /PCLACK1P
GND
28
29 /PCLACK0P
GND
30
31
5Vsub
32
5Vsub
33
3.3Vsub
34
3.3V
35 /PRINTWU
36
PSSTS
37
/SCLINE
38
/READY
39
GND
40
GND
41
GND
42
NC
43
/PCLDET
44
PCLSTS
45 /PCLSRDY
46
GND
47
GDATA1
48
GDATA3
49
GDATA5
50
GDATA7
51
GDATA9
52
GDATA11
53
GDATA13
54
GDATA15
55
GND
56 /PCLREQ1P
57 /PCLCS1P
58 /PCLREQ0P
59 /PCLCS0P
60
GND
CN3(TX24-60R-12ST-H1)
3.3VSub
1
3.3VSub
2
24V
3
DGND
4
DGND
5
/SCLINE
6
/READY
7
5V
8
GDATA1
9
GDATA3
10
GDATA5
11
GDATA7
12
GDATA9
13
GDATA11
14
GDATA13
15
GDATA15
16
/PRINTERWU 17
/PCLDET
18
PCLSTS 19
/PCLSRDY 20
/PCLREQ1P 21
/PCLCS1P 22
/PCLREQ0P 23
/PCLCS0P 24
/FAXDET
25
FAXSTS
26
/FAXSRDY 27
/FAXREQ0P 28
/FAXCS0P 29
3.3V
30
5Vsub
31
EXTRS
32
GND
33
GND
34
/MRESET
35
/PWOFF
36
/PRLINE
37
/HSYNC
38
/PSSTS
39
GDATA0
40
GDATA2
41
GDATA4
42
GDATA6
43
GDATA8
44
GDATA10
45
GDATA12
46
GDATA14
47
/FAXWU
48
/GDIDET
49
PCLCMD
50
/PCLCRDY 51
/PCLPRD
52
/PCLACK1P 53
/PCLACK0P 54
/FAXPAGE 55
FAXCMD
56
/FAXCRDY 57
/FAXPRD
58
/FAXACK0P 59
3.3V
60
SPCL PWB
G. Board to board section
3. Signal list
Signal name
Name
CL
Copy lamp
CLH
RSPF clutch
COVER
CSS1
RSPF cover open/close

detection
Tray 1 installation detection
CSS2
CSS3
CSS4
DPX
Duplex motor
DRS2
DUP2SEN
Door open/close detection

(Tray 2)
(Tray 3)
(Tray 4)
DUP2 paper delivery sensor
EHUD
Function/Operation
Controls ON/OFF of the
copy lamp.
RSPF paper feed roller.
Detects open/close of
the RSPF cover.
Detects installation of
tray 1.
tray 2.
tray 3.
tray 4.
Controls the duplex
motor.
Detects door open/close.
Connector level
L
H
ON
OFF
Connector
No.
CN26
Pin No.
PWB name
MCU
RSPF
interface
RSPF
interface
MCU
ON
OFF
CN5
13
OPEN
CLOSE
CN5
NO
YES
CN15
22
NO
YES
CN7
NO
YES
CN7
NO
YES
CN4
CN1
2,3,4,5
OPEN
CLOSE
CN8
OPEN
CLOSE
CN8
OPEN
CLOSE
CN4
YES
NO
CN15
12
Humidity sensor
Detects paper delivery in

the reverse path.
Senses the humidity.
Standard
tray I/F
Option tray
I/F
Option tray
I/F
MCU
CN503
MCU
ERTH
Temperature sensor
Senses the temperature.
CN503
MCU
GSOL
Gate solenoid
ON
OFF
CN4
HLOUT1
Heater lamp main
OFF
ON
CN10
10
RSPF
interface
MCU
HLOUT2
Heater lamp sub
OFF
ON
CN10
12
MCU
HPEMPTY
Manual feed paper presence

detection
YES
NO
CN15
16
MCU
HPIN
Manual feed paper entry

detection
detection
Manual feed paper size
detection
(Longitudinal direction)
Manual paper feed solenoid
Reverses the paper exit

gate in ON operation.
Turns ON/OFF the
heater lamp main.
Turns ON/OFF the
heater lamp sub.
Detects presence of
paper for manual paper
feed.
Detects paper entry for
manual feed.
Detects the length of
manual feed paper.
Detects the size of
manual feed paper.
(longitudinal direction)
Controls the manual
paper feed solenoid.
manual feed tray paper.
manual feed tray paper.
Detects the width of
manual feed paper.
Drives the right paper
exit gate solenoid.
Detects the upper limit of
the lift-up motor.
the lift-up motor.
the lift-up motor.
the lift-up motor.
Drives the lift plate of the
paper tray.
NO
YES
CN15
26
MCU
NO
YES
CN15
17
MCU
NO
YES
CN15
23
MCU
ON
OFF
CN15
MCU
LONG
SHORT
CN15
MCU
SHORT
LONG
CN15
13
MCU
CN15
31
MCU
ON
OFF
CN17
8,9
MCU
Not
detected
Not
detected
Not
detected
Not
detected
OFF
Detected
CN14
MCU
Detected
CN8
Detected
CN8
Detected
CN4
ON
CN15
Standard
tray I/F
Option tray
I/F
Option tray
I/F
MCU
DRS3
DRS4
HPSIZE1
HPSIZE2
HPSOL
HPTRAY1
HPTRAY2
HPWS
KEEPSOL
LUD1H
LUD2
LUD3
LUD4
LUM1H

length detection
length detection
Manual feed paper width
detection
Right paper exit gate
solenoid
Lift-up motor upper limit
detection
detection (Tray 2)
detection (Tray 3)
detection (Tray 4)
Lift-up motor
NOTE
Standard
tray I/F
Option tray
I/F
Option tray
I/F
MCU
Analog
detection
Analog
detection
Signal name
Name
Function/Operation
LUM2D
Lift-up motor

paper tray.
paper tray.
paper tray.
Corrects the initial
position of the scanner.
LUM3D
Lift-up motor
LUM4D
Lift-up motor
MHP
Mirror home position sensor
MIRMOD
Mirror motor
MMD
MMRDY
Main motor
Main motor lock
OCCOVER
OZNFANOUT
PAP1H
PAP2
OC cover open/close
detection
Ozone fan
Paper pass sensor (Tray 1)
Controls the mirror

operation.
Controls the main motor.
Detects lock of the main
motor.
the OC cover.
Controls the ozone fan.
Detects paper pass.
Detects paper pass.
PAP3
PAP4
Connector level
L
H
OFF
ON
Connector
No.
CN1
Pin No.
1
PWB name
Standard
tray I/F
Option tray
I/F
Option tray
I/F
MCU
OFF
ON
CN1
OFF
ON
CN4
14
Other
than
home
position.
Home
position
CN23
33
CN906
1,2,3,4
ON
Rotation
OFF
Lock
IC215
IC215
3
2
MCU
MCU
OPEN
CLOSE
CN23
29
MCU
OFF
YES
YES
ON
NO
NO
CN502
CN14
CN8
10
6
4
Detects paper pass.
YES
NO
CN8
Detects paper pass.
YES
NO
CN4
PAPER
Paper entry sensor
Detects paper entry.
YES
NO
CN5
18
PCL1H
Paper feed clutch (Tray 1)
ON
OFF
CN15
PCL2
ON
OFF
CN3
PCL3
ON
OFF
CN3
PCL4
ON
OFF
CN4
10
PCS1H
Paper feed solenoid (Tray 1)
ON
OFF
CN14
PCS2
ON
OFF
CN8
PCS3
ON
OFF
CN8
PCS4
ON
OFF
CN4
12
PDPX
Duplex sensor
YES
NO
CN19
Standard
tray I/F
Option tray
I/F
Option tray
I/F
MCU
PFULL2
No. 2 paper exit full sensor
YES
NO
CN21
MCU
PFULL2_R
Right paper exit full sensor
YES
NO
CN17
MCU
PGSOL
Paper exit gate solenoid
ON
OFF
CN22
2,3
MCU
PIN
POUT1
Paper entry sensor

No. 1 paper exit sensor
YES
NO
NO
YES
CN14
CN32
4
6
MCU
MCU
POUT2
No. 2 paper exit sensor
YES
NO
CN21
MCU
POUT2_R
Right paper exit sensor
YES
NO
CN17
MCU
POUTCOV
Paper exit cover open/close

detection
Paper exit cooling fan
Paper exit cooling fan lock
detection

paper feed roller.
paper feed roller.
paper feed roller.
paper feed roller.
paper feed roller.
paper feed roller.
paper feed roller.
paper feed roller.
Detects paper presence
for duplex.
Detects paper full in the
No. 2 paper exit unit.
Detects paper full in the
right paper exit unit.
Controls the paper exit
gate.
Detects paper entry.
Detects paper exit of the
right paper exit unit.
the paper exit cover.
Cools the fusing unit.
Detects lock of the paper
exit cooling fan.
Detects paper pass.
MCU
MCU
Standard
tray I/F
Option tray
I/F
Option tray
I/F
SPF
interface
MCU
OPEN
CLOSE
CN21
10
MCU
OFF
Rotation
ON
Lock
CN504
CN504
3,6
2,5
MCU
MCU
YES
NO
CN8
POUTFANOUT
POUTFANRDY
PPD2
OP I/F PWB
Standard
tray I/F
Option tray
I/F
Option tray
I/F
MCU
Standard
tray I/F
NOTE
PPD3
Detects paper pass.
Connector level
L
H
YES
NO
PPD4
Detects paper pass.
YES
NO
CN4
PREMSOL
Paper separation solenoid
ON
OFF
CN11
PSFANOUT
PSFANRDY
PS fan
PS fan lock detection
OFF
Rotation
ON
Lock
CN29
CN29
3,6
2,5
MCU
MCU
PSOL
PS solenoid
ON
OFF
CN5
11
PSRSOL
RSOL
Resist roller solenoid

Reverse solenoid
Controls the paper

separation solenoid.
Drives the PS fan.
Detects lock of the PS
fan.
PS roller.
Controls the resist roller.
Reverses the paper exit
gate in ON operation.
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
CN15
CN5
4
15
RTH1
Thermister 1
CN19
SPF
interface
MCU
SPF
interface
PWB
MCU
RTH2
Thermister 2
CN19
MCU
SFTD
SFTHP
Shifter motor
Shifter home position sensor
Home
position
CN2
CN32
3,4,5,6
4
MCU
MCU
SPFOPEN
SPF cover open/close

sensor
SPF paper exit sensor
Other
than
home
position.
OPEN
CLOSE
CN5
24
YES
NO
CN3
CN2
OFF
Rotation
ON
Lock
CN32
CN32
10,12
14,16
CN3
CN502
1,2
6
ON
OFF
CN2
ON
OFF
CN2
YES
NO
CN5
Signal name
SPFOUT
SPFWS
Name
TFANOUT
TFANRDY
SPF document width

detection
Fusing fan
Fusing fan lock detection
TMD
TONER
Toner motor
Toner sensor
TRCL2
Vertical transport clutch
TRCL3
Vertical transport clutch
W0
Paper empty sensor
Function/Operation
Detects the fusing

temperature.
Detects the fusing
temperature.
Offsets paper.
Detects the home
position of the shifter.
the SPF cover.
SPF.
Detects SFP documents.
Drives the fusing fan.
Detects lock of the fusing
fan.
Controls the toner motor.
Detects the toner
density.
vertical transport roller.
vertical transport clutch.
Detects paper empty.
Connector
No.
CN8
Pin No.
2
PWB name
NOTE
Option tray
I/F
Option tray
I/F
MCU
SPF
interface
SPF
interface
SPF
interface
MCU
MCU
MCU
MCU
Standard
tray I/F
Option tray
I/F
SPF
interface
Analog
detection
Analog
detection
PARTS GUIDE
CODE:00ZMXM310P002
Digital Multifunction System
Revised Edition
MX-M260/N/FG/FP
MX-M310/N/FG/FP
AR-5726/5731
MX-VR10
MX-RP10
MX-TR11
(Except North America,

Japan,Argentina)
(North America, Japan,
Argentina is standard)
MODEL
(Japan is standard)
CONTENTS
1 1(Exteriors 1)
2 2(Exteriors 2)
3 (Operation panel unit)
4 (Frame section)
5 (Lamp unit)
6 1(Optical frame 1)
8 (Middle frame section)
9 550 (550 cassette unit)
F (Paper feed section)
G (Paper transfer section)
H (Side door unit)
I
(Multi manual paper feed tray unit)
J (Multi manual paper feed unit)

K DV (DV unit)
L (Process unit)
M 1(Fusing unit 1)
N 2(Fusing unit 2)
O (Drive unit)
P 1(1st delivery paper unit 1)
Q 2(1st delivery paper unit 2)
R (PWB section)
S (Rear frame section)
T 2nd (2nd exteriors)

U 2nd 550 (2nd 550 cassette unit)
V 2nd (2nd paper feed section)
W 2nd (2nd paper transfer section)
X 2nd (2nd drive section)
Y (Lift up unit)
Z MX-RP10 1(MX-RP10 RSPF Exteriors 1)
[ MX-RP10 2 (MX-RP10 RSPF Exteriors 2)
\ MX-RP10
(MX-RP10 RSPF Paper feeding section)
] MX-RP10 1
(MX-RP10 RSPF Transport section 1)
^ MX-RP10 2
(MX-RP10 RSPF Transport section 2)
_ MX-TR11
(MX-TR11 2nd delivery paper unit)
` MX-TR11
(MX-TR11 Job-separater unit)
a
(Packing material & accessories)
b MX-VR10
(MX-VR10 Packing material & accessories
MX-RP10
(MX-RP10 Packing material & accessories)
d MX-TR11
(MX-TR11 Packing material & accessories)
SHARP CORPORATION
This document has been published to be used for

after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
< >
No1 6
< >
1
(a,b,c)
(a,b,c)

< >
R/C
< >
R/ C
<Note for use of the revised Parts Guide>

Interchangeability of parts is expressed by No1~6 as shown in the table below.
<Interchangeability>
1
Interchangeable.
Current type can be used in place of new type.

New type cannot be used in place of current type.
Current type cannot be used in place of new type.

New type can be used in place of current type.
Not interchangeable.
Interchangeable if replaced with same types of releted parts in use.
Others.
New & Addition, Change, Abolition, and Quantity change are expressed with the marks shown in the
table below.
<Change of Division>
New & Addition
Change
Abolition
Q'uantity (increase) /Others
Q'uantity (decrease)
Correction
Running Change of Effective Time is expressed as R/C.

<Effective Time>
R/ C
Running Change
1
Update : 2009/11/16
A :
B :
E :
D :
C :
DEFINITION
Rank
Rank
Rank
Rank
Rank
A
B
E
D
C
:
:
:
:
:
Maintenance parts, and consumable parts which are not included in but closely related to maintenance parts
Performance/function parts (sensors, clutches, and other electrical parts), consumable parts
Unit parts including PWB
Preparation parts (External fitting, packing, parts packed together)
Parts other than the above (excluding sub components of PWB)
Because parts marked with "!" is indispensable for the machine safety maintenance and operation, it must be replaced with
the parts specific to the product specification.
F
F
F
F
( )
Other than this Parts Guide, please refer to documents Service Manual (including Circuit Diagram)of this model.
Please use the 13 digit code described in the right hand corner of front cover of the document, when you place an order.
For U.S. only-Use order codes provided in advertising literature. Do not order from parts department.
Maintenance parts for which the periodic replacement is necessary.
1 1(Exteriors 1)
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
PARTS CODE
Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
GCAB-0081QST1
GCAB-0080QST1
CFIX-0013QS11
CFIX-0013QS12
PSHEZ0220QSZ1
LX-BZ0082QSPZ
GCAB-0084QST1
CGIDM0116QS05
CGIDM0116QS04
AL
AM
AM
AL
AK
AA
AS
AK
AH
EB
EG
EG
EB
DX
DD
EQ
DX
DX
D
D
D
D
C
C
D
C
C
LFIX-0011QSAC
AK
DX
11
PGLSP0003QSZZ
BA
FX
17
LFIX-0012QSAC
AH
DX
18
PSHEZ0221QSZZ
AC
DJ
19
PGLSP0004QSZZ
AX
FG
20
PSHEZ0207QSZZ
AC
DJ
21
PSHEZ0222QSZZ
AC
DJ
22
PCUSS0011QSZZ
AB
DJ
23
PSHEZ0208QSZZ
AC
DJ
24
PCUSS0027QSZZ
AA
DJ
25
26
PSHEZ0088QSZ2
PMLT-0093QSZZ
AD
AB
DJ
DJ
C
C
27
PSHEZ0474QSZZ
AD
DJ
501
CFIX-0012RS54
AU
EZ
TR No.
DESCRIPTION
Optical left cabinet
Optical right cabinet
Glass fixing plate
(Except Japan)
Glass fixing plate
(Japan)
Shading sheet
Screw(38)
Rear cabinet upper
OR guide unit
(Except Japan)
OR guide unit
(Japan)
OC fixing glass
(Except North America,Japan,Argentina)
Table glass
SPF fixing glass
[MX-RP10,North America,Japan,Argentina]
White revise sheet LPD
SPF slit glass
SPF glass sheet F
Glass fixing sheet
Glass cushion
Glass sheet R
Glass cushion C
Table glass sheet
[Missing parts code]
Rear cabinet upper cushion
Glass fixing sheet
SPF Glass fixing unit
Effective
time
OR
OR
OC
SPF
LPD
SPF
SPF F
R
C
SPF
1st lot
1st lot
Update : 2009/11/16
1 1(Exteriors 1)
5
1
5
3
7
5
6
5
5
25
5
11
26
5
8
Original cover only
501
23
17
18
27
19
20
22
24
SPF only
PRP03901
21
22
3
Update : 2009/11/16
2 2(Exteriors 2)
NO.
PARTS CODE

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
3
4
GCAB-0042QSTF
GCAB-0042QSTG
XHBS730P08000
GCAB-0145QSZZ
AP
AP
AB
AU
EQ
EQ
DD
EZ
D
D
C
C
GCOV-0056QST1
AG
DS
24
GCAB-0043QSTC
GCAB-0152QSZZ
XEBS740P10000
GCAB-0085QST5
GCAB-0085QST6
GCAB-0085QST6
GCOV-0034QSTC
PCOVP0130QSZZ
MSPRD0189QSZZ
MLEVP0069QSTZ
GDOR-0003QST7
NROLP1060FCZZ
MSPRT0229GCAZ
GCAB-0039QSTC
GCOV-0043QST2
PFILZ0016QSZZ
GCOV-0086QSZZ
GCAB-0149QSZZ
GCAB-0149QSZ1
GCAB-0142QSZZ
GCAB-0148QSZZ
GCAB-0148QSZ1
AM
AM
AA
AY
AY
AY
AK
AM
AB
AD
AP
AF
AC
AS
AX
AS
AN
AV
AV
AL
AW
AW
EG
EG
DD
FQ
FG
FG
DX
EG
DJ
DJ
EQ
DS
DJ
EZ
FG
EQ
EG
FG
FG
EB
FG
FG
D
D
C
D
D
D
C
D
C
C
D
C
C
D
D
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
25
LBNDZ0007QSZZ
AC
DJ
26
GCAB-0141QSZZ
AT
EZ
27
TLABZ5148FCZZ
AC
DJ
37
39
44
49
50
52
LX-BZ0082QSPZ
TCAUA1069FCZZ
TLABZ0793QSZZ
TLABG5005FCZZ
TLABH0483QSZZ
MARMP0050QSZZ
GCOVH0024QST2
TLABH5200FCZZ
AA
AC
AC
AC
AC
AF
AE
AB
DD
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DS
DS
DJ
C
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
53
TCAUH1071FCZZ
BC
GD
54
TLABZ5048FCZZ
AB
DJ
63
PSHEZ0568QSZZ
PSHEZ0568QSZZ
PCOVP0142QSZZ
AD
AD
AE
DJ
DJ
DS
C
C
C
65
GCAB-0144QSZZ
AK
DX
66
67
69
70
71
PCOVP0144QSZZ
HBDGD0058FCZZ
CBDGD0062FC35
CBDGD0062FC34
CBDGD0062FC39
CBDGD0062FC38
CBDGD0062FC42
CBDGD0062FC40
CBDGD0062FC43
CBDGD0062FC41
CBDGD0004QS01
CBDGD0004QS02
PBOX-0006QSZ1
XEBS730P10000
VHPGP1S73P+-18
AD
AT
AH
AH
AG
AG
AG
AG
AG
AG
AN
AN
AE
AC
AF
DJ
EQ
DX
DX
DX
DX
DX
DX
DX
DX
EQ
EQ
DS
DD
DS
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
D
C
B
72
MLEVP0068QSTZ
AC
DJ
73
DHAI-0370QSPZ
AF
DS
74
GCAB-0143QSZZ
BA
FX
75
PSHEZ0392QSZ1
AB
DJ
79
TLABZ5059FCZZ
AB
DJ
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
23
40
61
68
DESCRIPTION
(Except Japan)
(Japan)
Rear cabinet lower

(100V Series)
Rear cabinet lower
(200V Series)
Screw(410)
Rear cabinet right

(Except Japan)
Rear cabinet right
(Except Japan)
Rear cabinet right
(Japan)
Rear cabinet memory cover
Delivery dummy cover

(Except Japan)
Right cabinet spring
Right cabinet lever

Right cabinet door
U-turn roller
U
FU spring R
FU R
Right cabinet
Option PWB cover
Ozone filter
Delivery cover
Left cabinet
(Japan)
Left cabinet
[Missing parts code](Except Japan)
Front cabinet right
Right cabinet front
Right cabinet front

[Improve reliability]
Front cabinet band A2R
A2R
Front cabinet
Energy star label

[MX-M260(Except Argentina)
/M260FG/M260FP/M310(Except Argentina)
/M310FG/M310FP,AR-5726/5731(East Europe)]
Screw(38)
Service caution label

(Except Japan)
Class 1 label NEW
(Except North America,Japan) 1 NEW
Class 1 label JPN
(Japan) 1 JPN
Warm heater label
(Japan)
Paper fixing arm
FAX connector cover

(Japan) FAX
Plug caution label
(Japan) J
Service caution label PO
(Germany,Switzerland,East Europe) PO
WEEE mark label [Germany,Switzerland,East Europe,
Europe,U.kingdom,AR-5726/5731] WEEE
R cabinet sheet
R cabinet sheet
Fan cover
Delivery tray joint cabinet
R cabinet lever cover

(Except Japan)
Front cabinet badge
[MX-M Series]
Model name plate
[MX-M260]
Model name plate
[MX-M310]
Model name plate
[MX-M260N]
Model name plate
[MX-M310N]
Model name plate
[MX-M260FP]
Model name plate
[MX-M310FP]
Model name plate
[MX-M260FG]
Model name plate
[MX-M310FG]
Model name plate
[AR-5726]
Model name plate
[AR-5731]
Delivery sensor BOX
Screw(310)
Photo sensor(GP1S73P)
Delivery tray actuator
Delivery paper detect sensor harness
Delivery tray cabinet
Paper feed solenoid sound proof B
B
BM link label
[MX-M260FP/M310FP] BM
TR No.
Effective
time
Rear cabinet left

Rear cabinet left
Screw(38)
Delivery tray cabinet rear
Rear cabinet maintenance cover
09/10 R/C
1st lot
1st lot
1st lot
1st lot
09/08 Mid
09/11
Update : 2009/11/16
2 2(Exteriors 2)
54
37 52
50
9 7
3
37
53
40
3
37
19
39
17
3
3
21
75
12
11
44
18
7
63
7
74
14
15
14
73
66
7
71
72
24
69
61
70
3
7
16
65
79
13
15
49
23
67
68
26
25
10
7
27
PRP03902
5
Update : 2009/11/16

NO.
1
2
3
PARTS CODE

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
PSHEZ0646QSPZ
XEBS730P08000
DHAI-0503QSPZ
AE
AC
AE
DJ
DD
DS
C
C
C
CPWBX0211QSF2
BR
LX
CPWBX0211QSF4
CPWBX0211QSF5
BR
BR
LX
LX
E
E
CPWBX0211QSF7
BR
LX
CPWBX0211QSF3
MSPRP3009FCZZ
LHLDZ0119QSZZ
VVL81HB1T03-A
LHLDZ0118QSZZ
PSHEZ5764FCZZ
HPNLH0264FCZZ
BR
AD
AK
BV
AL
AC
BF
LX
DJ
EB
RB
EB
DJ
GN
E
C
C
B
C
C
B
CPNLC0072QS05
AX
FG
AX
FG
DESCRIPTION
TR No.
KEY
11
CPNLC0072QS03
14
CPNLC0072QS04
PLNS-0016QSZZ
AX
AD
FG
DJ
C
B
CPNLC0070QS02
AR
EQ
PWB protect sheet

Screw(38)
KEY PWB harness
OPU PWB
(North America,Philippines,Thailand,
Indonesia,India,Special country,Malaysia,
Singapore,Argentina)
OPU PWB
(Europe,U.kingdom)
OPU PWB
(Germany,Switzerland,East Europe)
OPU PWB
(Algeria,Iran,Egypt,Syria,Tunisa,Nigeria,
West Africa,Morocco,Jordan,Lebanon,UAE,
Yemen,Oman,Qutar,Kuwait,Bahrain,Saudi Arabia)
OPU PWB
(Japan)
LCD earth plate
LCD holder B
LCD module
LCD holder
Touch panel sheet
Touch panel 8.1
Operation panel B EX (Except Germany,Switzerland,
East Europe,Japan)
Operation panel AS
(Germany,Switzerland,East Europe)
Operation panel B J
(Japan)
FAX Lens
(Japan)
Operation panel 8.1 EX
(Except Japan)
CPNLC0070QS01
JBTN-0071QSA1
CBTN-0290FC01
CBTN-0292FC03
PFILW0319FCZZ
PLNS-0105FCZZ
CBTN-0291FC02
CBTN-0291FC01
JBTN-0284FCAZ
CPWBF0234QSE2
CPWBF0234QSE1
CPWBF0234QSE3
LDAIU0037QSZZ
QCNW-0249FCPZ
LDAIU0038QSZZ
LDAIU0038QSZ1
XEBS740P10000
LPLTP0499QSZZ
LPLTP0498QSZZ
CPNLH0073QS01
CPNLH0073QS02
CPNLH0073QS03
CPNLH0073QS04
CPNLH0073QS22
CPNLH0073QS23
CHLDZ0118RS51
(Unit)
AT
AR
AK
AR
AK
AC
AG
AG
AR
AX
AZ
AY
AS
AZ
AQ
AQ
AA
AD
AE
AZ
AP
AP
AS
AN
AZ
BX
EZ
EQ
DX
EQ
EB
DJ
DX
DX
EQ
FG
FX
FQ
EZ
FQ
EQ
EQ
DD
DJ
DJ
FQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
FX
RR
C
C
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
E
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
E
Operation panel 8.1 J

(Japan)
Mode key
Ten key
Interrupt key
Copy key ring
Power supply key lens
CA key EX
(Except Japan)
CA key J
(Japan)
Copy key
Key PWB
(MX-M Series except Japan)
Key PWB
(Japan)
Key PWB
(AR-57 Series)
Operation base plate A
LCD-FFC P2
Operation base plate B
Operation base plate B
Screw(410)
Operation panel side plate left
Operation panel side plate right
Key sheet
[English for FAX(MX-M Series)]
Key sheet
[English no FAX(MX-M Series)]
Key sheet
[French for FAX(MX-M Series)]
Key sheet
[French no FAX(MX-M Series)]
Key sheet
[English(AR-57 Series)]
Key sheet
[French(AR-57 Series)]
LCD unit
AS
B J
FAX
A8.1EX
A8.1J
CA EX
CA J
KEY
KEY
KEY
A
LCD-FFC P2
B
B
LCD
CPNLC0070RS51
CC
UB
CPNLC0070RS53
CPNLC0070RS52
CPNLC0070RS54
CC
CC
CC
UB
UB
UB
E
E
E
Operation panel unit

[MX-M Series(North America,
Australia,New Zealand,Philippines,Thailand,
Indonesia,India,Special country)]
Operation panel unit [MX-M Series(Europe,U.kingdom)]
[MX-M260FP/M310FP]
[MX-M260FG/M310FG]
5
6
7
8
9
10
15
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
501
901
Effective
time
OPU
OPU
OPU
OPU
OPU
LCD
LCD B
LCD
LCD
8.1
B EX
1st lot
09/08 mid
1st lot
Update : 2009/11/16
901
28
2
2
3
29
2
2
2
29
25
6
2
24
20
22
23
7
2
27
30
19
21
18
2
2
2
9
10
15
14
26
2
31
11
32
PRP03903
501
7
Update : 2009/10/16
4 (Frame section)
NO.
PARTS CODE
1
2
3
4
5
LPLTM0163QSZZ
XHBS730P08000
LPLTM0232QSZ2
CFRM-0043QS03
XEBS740P10000
CPLTM0529QS01

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
DESCRIPTION
TR No.
AK
AB
AU
AX
AA
EB
DD
EQ
FQ
DD
C
C
C
D
C
AG
DS
Left reinforce plate lower

Screw(38)
Frame reinforce plate R
Corner frame RL
Screw(310)
DUP drive idle plate And2 Ref
PSHEZ0507QSZZ
AA
DJ
Pulley flange sheet N
NPLYZ0036QSZZ
AD
DJ
DUP idle pulley TLPD
11
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
40
41
LDAI-0023QSTE
LHLDW1757FCPZ
XHBS740P10000
LPLTM0333QSZ2
XRESP40-06000
NBLTT0026QSZZ
LPLTM0165QSZ3
PCOVP0110QSZ1
LPLTM0166QSZZ
CFRM-0044QS03
LPLTM0251QSZ1
NSFTZ0048QSPZ
NKOM-0005QSZZ
XBPS730P08KS0
XHBS730P06000
LANGF0012QSZZ
XBBS740P06000
PSHEZ0333QSZZ
PSHEZ0325QSZZ
BG
AC
AA
AX
AA
AF
AS
AE
AC
BB
AE
AF
AC
AB
AC
AF
AA
AC
AB
GT
DJ
DD
FG
DD
DS
EZ
DJ
DJ
FX
DS
DS
DJ
DD
DD
DS
DD
DJ
DJ
D
C
C
C
C
B
C
D
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
42
CPLTM0342QS01
AH
DX
Base plate
Wire saddle(HL-18-0)
Screw(410)
Frame reinforce plate F
E type ring(E4)
DUP drive belt
Front reinforce plate
Interlock cover
Front support adjusting plate
Right frame unit
PS earth plate
Cassette collar shaft
Cassette guide collar
Screw(38KS)
Screw(36)
Right reinforce angle
Screw(46)
PS front sheet
Frame lower sheet
DU motor fixing plate ASSY
43
NGERH0174QSZ1
AD
DJ
DUP drive gear TLPD
44
RMOTS0056QSP1
BD
GJ
45
NBLTT0038QSZZ
AF
DS
DUP reverse motor

DUP drive belt TL
46
LPLTM0332QSZZ
AE
DJ
47
LPLTM0495QSZZ
AE
DJ
48
55
56
61
XEBS740P12000
PMLT-0091QSZ1
PGSK-0044QSPZ
NPLYZ0015QSZZ
AA
AD
AH
AC
DD
DJ
DX
DJ
C
C
C
C
62
MSPRC1315FCZ1
AD
DJ
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
NGERH0066QSZZ
PSHEZ0432QSZZ
LBSHC0009QSPZ
LHLDW1009ACZZ
PSHEZ0448QSZZ
NFANP0020QSPZ
XBPS730P30KS0
AD
AA
AC
AA
AA
AP
AC
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD
DJ
EQ
DD
C
C
C
C
C
B
C
70
CPLTM0530QS01
AF
DS
1 way gear(17T)
PS front sheet 2
Edge bush(CE-012 L15)
Clamp(UAMS-05S-2)
Optical bottom sheet And
Fan motor ANR2
Screw(330KS)
DUP drive rotation plate And2 Ref [Missing parts code]
(Japan)
(Japan)
Fusing unit earth plate

Power supply switch fixing plate And2 Ref
Screw(412)
Right frame cushion A
OP holder cushion
[Except MX-M310FG]
Pulley(S2M20T)
Manual paper feed clutch spring A
71
MSPRT0147QSZZ
AC
DJ
Stopper arm spring
72
LX-BZ0852FCZZ
AC
DD
Step screw
R
RL
DUP
And2 Ref
N
DUP
TLPD
F
E
DUP
PS
PS
DU
DUP
TLPD
DUP
DUP
TL
And2 Ref
A
OP
A
1
PS 2
And
ANR2
DUP
And2 Ref
Effective
time
1st lot
1st lot
Update : 2009/10/16
4 (Frame section)
15
56
3
1
2
5
68
15
2
42 44
5
15
14
67
20
69 16
5
67
15
47
15 29
46
5
5
26
25
15
15
48
18
45
64
22
27
40
23
28
65
11
66
24
15
43
55
30
2
5
6
64
5
71
21
2
41
7 9
19
7
72
18
70
7 72
61
18
63
62
PRP03904
9
Update : 2009/11/16
5 (Lamp unit)
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
901
PARTS CODE
PREFL0004QSZZ
RLMPU0012QSZZ
LHLDZ0047QSZ3
MSLI-0138FCZZ
PCUSU0203FCZZ
MSPRP0145QSZZ
PMIR-0009QSZZ
DUNTK0034QSP3
DHAI-0200QSZZ
LFIX-0009QSZZ
PCUSS0033QSZZ
XEBS830P06000
LPLTM4715FCZ1
TCAUH0933FCZZ
XEPS830P06K00
XEPS830P08K00
(Unit)
CREFL0004QS38

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
DESCRIPTION
TR No.
Effective
time
AP
BG
AW
AC
AE
AF
AS
BK
AS
AF
AC
AB
AF
AB
AC
AC
EQ
GT
FG
DJ
DS
DS
EQ
HC
EZ
DS
DJ
DD
DS
DD
DD
DD
B
B
C
C
C
C
B
E
C
D
C
C
C
D
C
C
Reflector
Lamp
Base
Slider
Protection cushion
Mirror spring
1st mirror
Inverter unit
CL harness
Harness fixing
Mirror cushion
Screw(36)
Wire fixing plate F
High temperature caution label
Screw(36K)
Screw(38K)
1st
CL
[Missing parts code] (36K)

[Missing parts code] (38K)
1st lot
1st lot
BR
MJ
Copy lamp unit
1st lot
Update : 2009/11/16
5 (Lamp unit)
16
1
16
4
2
3
17
5
4
14
6
7
12
12
9
15
8
12
10
12
11
5
6
4
14
12
12
PRP03905
12
10
11
Update : 2009/11/16
NO.
PARTS CODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
PWIR-0006QSPZ
CDAIU0012QS15
NPLYZ0016QSZZ
NPLYZ0006QSZ1
XRESP40-05000
PWIR-0005QSP1
CMIR-0008QS36
CREFL0004QS38
XBPS740P06K00
LHLDZ0056QSZZ
LX-BZ0004QSPZ
LRALM0007QSZ1
LRALM0006QSZZ
XBPS730P05K00
RMOTP0027QSZZ
MSPRC0040QSZZ
CPLTM0084QS02
PGUMS0002QSPZ
XBPS740P16KS0
PGUMS0004QSZZ
XRESP50-06000
NBRGP0012QSZZ
23
24
25
26
27
28
29

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
DESCRIPTION
AZ
BG
AF
AD
AA
AZ
BB
BR
AA
AC
AB
AG
AG
AA
BG
AB
AK
AL
AB
AA
AA
AC
FQ
GT
DS
DJ
DD
FQ
GD
MJ
DD
DJ
DD
DS
DS
DD
GT
DJ
DX
EB
DD
DJ
DD
DJ
C
C
C
C
C
C
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
NPLYZ0004QSZZ
AG
DX
NPLYZ0031QSZZ
LX-BZ0049FCPZ
XPSSJ30-12000
NSFTZ0028QSZ1
LX-BZ0324FCPZ
NBLTT0002QSZZ
AL
AB
AB
AS
AA
AH
EB
DD
DD
EQ
DD
DX
C
C
C
C
C
B
30
NGERH0027QSZZ
AH
DX
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
LX-WZ0119FCP1
XRESP70-08000
NBRGP0011QSZZ
LX-BZ0082QSPZ
PGIDM0108QST1
XHBS730P08000
PGIDM0109QST1
LPLTM0497QSZZ
AC
AA
AC
AA
AG
AB
AG
AG
DD
DD
DJ
DD
DX
DD
DX
DS
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
39
LANGF0021QSZZ
AF
DS
Washer
E type ring(E7)
Winder bearing F
Screw(38)
Hinge guide L
Screw(38)
Hinge guide R
Panel support plate LN
Panel reinforce angle R
40
XHBS740P10000
AA
DD
Screw(410)
MB wire F
Optical base plate
Pulley
L pulley
E type ring(E4)
MB wire R
2/3 mirror unit
Copy lamp unit
Screw(46K)
Wire holder
Screw
MB-B rail R
MB-B rail F
Screw(35K)
Mirror motor
MB drive spring
Mirror motor fixing plate
Protection rubber
Screw(416KS)
Table glass cushion
E type ring(E5)
Winder bearing R
Winder drive shaft pulley
Winder pulley
Screw
Spring pin(3-12)
Winder drive shaft
Screw
Winder drive belt
Mirror motor idle gear
11
MB F
L
E
MB R
2/3
MB-B R
MB-B F
MB
E
R
E
F
R
LN
TR No.
Effective
time
1st lot
Update : 2009/11/16
3
4
36
34
5
7
5
3 4
34
9
10
36
35
37
16
19
11
8
9
14
2
10
18
15
11
20
17
36
13
18
12
1
38
32
11
31
30 29
28
23
24
26
11
36
25
32
40
19
21
22
40
33
39
28
24
25
12
27
PRP03906
13
Update : 2009/11/16
NO.
PARTS CODE

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
DESCRIPTION
19
20
PCOVP0075QSZZ
XNES730-24000
VHPGP2D03//-18
VHPGP2D07//-18
DHAI-0347QSPZ
DHAI-0346QSPZ
LHLDW1009ACZZ
XBBS830P08000
CPWBF0083QSE5
CDAIU0012QS15
PGUMS0004QSZZ
XHBS730P06000
VHPGP2D032/-18
RSNSZ0001QSPZ
XBPS730P08X00
LPLTP0230QSZZ
VHPGP1S73P+-18
MSPRD0232QSZZ
MLEVP0077QSZZ
LCRA-0002QSZZ
TLABH0461QSZZ
TLABH0267QSZZ
LHLDZ0104QSZZ
PSHEZ0218QSZZ
AE
AA
AZ
BA
AN
AP
AA
AA
AU
BG
AA
AC
BA
BA
AA
AF
AF
AB
AC
AC
AG
AD
AD
AC
DS
DD
FX
FX
EQ
EQ
DD
DD
EZ
GT
DJ
DD
FX
FX
DD
DS
DS
DJ
DJ
DJ
DS
DJ
DJ
DJ
D
C
B
B
C
C
C
C
E
C
C
C
B
B
C
C
B
C
C
C
D
D
C
C
21
PSHEZ0217QSZZ
AC
DJ
22
24
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
PSHEZ0448QSZZ
PCASZ0010QSZZ
RCORF0002QSZZ
CLNS-0003RS55
LX-BZ0004QSPZ
DHAI-0345QSZZ
PSHEZ0108QSZZ
PSHEZ0219QSZZ
LX-BZ0031GCPZ
PSHEZ0254QSZZ
AA
AL
AE
BP
AB
AG
AC
AC
AB
AC
DJ
EB
DS
LE
DD
DX
DJ
DJ
DD
DJ
C
C
C
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
38
PSHEZ0273QSZZ
AB
DJ
39
40
41
PGSK-0008QSPZ
XWHS740-08100
PMLT-0094QSZZ
AF
AA
AC
DS
DD
DJ
C
C
C
42
PSHEZ0443QSZZ
AC
DJ
43
PSHEZ0420QSZZ
AC
DJ
44
PTPE-0051QSZZ
AC
DJ
OP harness protect sheet

OP harness fixing tape
45
PSHEZ0426QSZZ
AB
DJ
OP harness protect sheet B
46
PTPE-0063QSZZ
AD
DJ
OP harness fixing tape A2
48
49
50
DHAI-0610QSP1
PTPE-0050QSZZ
PSHEZ0665QSZZ
BF
AA
AC
GN
DJ
DJ
C
C
C
Operation PWB FFC

Core fixing tape
Optical frame sheet
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Harness cover
Nut(M3)
Photo sensor(GP2D03)
Optical sensor harness
Clamp(UAMS-05S-2)
Screw(38)
Sensor PWB
Optical base plate
Table glass cushion
Screw(36)
Screw(38X)
Open/close sensor fixing plate
Return spring
Open/Close actuator
Mini clamp
Clean caution label
Clean caution label
CL lead holder
Edge protect sheet A
CCD harness protect sheet B
(Inch
(AB
(Inch
(AB
TR No.
Series)
Series)
Series)
Series)
(Inch Series)
(AB Series)
(U.S.A,Canada)
(Japan)
Optical bottom sheet And

Dark box
Core(HF57SH35*1)
Lens unit
Screw
CCD harness
Optical base plate bottom sheet A
Edge protect sheet B
Screw
Optical bottom sheet
CCD harness protect sheet A
Gasket
Washer
Cushion ORG
OP harness protect sheet F
13
(AB Series)
(Japan)
CL
A
CCD
B
And
CCD
A
B
C
CCD
A
ORG
OP
F
OP
OP
OP
B
OP
A2
FFC
Effective
time
1st lot
Update : 2009/11/16
10 AB
Series
11
4
Inch
Series
6
7
Inch
Series
10
15
12
11
12
43
20
3
9
34
41
31
32
21
19
5
9
39
17
39
45
10
24
10
3
9
48
13
2
AB
Series
16
14
18
50
33
40 9
33
26
29
30
49
22
42
46
22
22
38
22
48
14
28
44
PRP03907
15
Update : 2009/11/16

NO.
PARTS CODE

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
DESCRIPTION
1
2
5
6
7
DUNTK0616RSZZ
XEPS730P14X00
MARMP0025QSZZ
XEBS730P10000
CHAI-0356RS51
BV
AB
AD
AC
AL
NU
DD
DJ
DD
EB
E
C
C
C
C
CHAI-0603RS51
AN
EQ
9
10
LHLDZ0057QSZ1
DHAI-0506QSPZ
AH
AQ
DX
EQ
C
C
11
MSPRD0190QSZ2
AD
DJ
High voltage terminal holder B

LSU interface harness
High voltage terminal holder spring saw teeth L
12
MSPRD0191QSZ2
AD
DJ
High voltage terminal holder spring grid L
13
MSPRD0192QSZ2
AD
DJ
High voltage terminal holder spring case L
14
DHAI-0606QSPZ
BT
MW
AN2R ILSW interface harness
15
LX-BZ0020QSPZ
AB
DD
16
LPLTM0424QSZZ
AD
DJ
Step screw
CRUM connector fixing plate
18
19
XRESP50-06000
PCLC-0030QSZZ
AA
AQ
DD
EQ
C
B
20
DHAI-0590QSPZ
BT
NE
27
28
29
XBBS730P05000
LHLDZ0085QSZZ
LPLTM0248QSZ1
NROLR0089QSZ3
NROLR0135QSZ2
NBRGC0018QSZZ
PCOVP0062QSZZ
LSTPP0010QSZZ
MSPRC0220QSZZ
MLEVP0071QSZZ
CSW-M0007RS56
LHLDZ0065QSZ1
MSPRT0221QSZZ
JKNBZ0006QSZZ
XBPS730P08KS0
XBPSC30P06ES0
LFRM-0037QSZ6
XRESP60-08000
RMOTD0023QSZZ
MSPRC0024QSZ1
NCPL-0011QSZZ
RPLU-0024QSZZ
RPLU-0024QSPZ
MSPRC1318FCZ1
LPINS0025QSZZ
LPINS0026QSZZ
LPINS0028QSZZ
XEBS740P10000
XEBS730P06000
DHAI-0354QSPZ
DHAI-0605QSPZ
MSPRC0271QSZZ
XEPS723P12000
PSHEZ0394QSZ1
QSW-B0017QSZZ
AA
AE
AD
AY
AZ
AD
AD
AD
AB
AD
AP
AF
AB
AD
AB
AA
BA
AA
AZ
AC
AC
AM
AM
AA
AC
AC
AD
AA
AA
AG
BS
AC
AA
AB
AF
DD
DJ
DJ
FQ
FQ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
EQ
DS
DJ
DJ
DD
DD
GD
DD
FX
DJ
DJ
EG
EG
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD
DD
DS
MW
DJ
DD
DJ
DS
C
C
C
C
C
C
D
C
C
C
B
C
C
D
C
C
D
C
B
C
C
B
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
CPLTM0160RS59
BH
HC
CPLTM0160RS60
BH
HC
70
PSPAZ0041QSZZ
AA
DJ
74
PMLT-0120QSZ1
AL
EB
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
PMLT-0116QSZZ
PMLT-0117QSZZ
PCOVP0108QSZ1
XHBS730P08000
XHBS730P20000
NFANP0081FCZZ
LPLTM0392QSZZ
QCNCM1000FCPZ
LBNDJ0071FCZZ
PTPE-0062QSZZ
XEBS740P12000
XEPS730P14X00
PCOVP0109QSZZ
PMLT-0118QSZ1
PMLT-0148QSZZ
AE
AD
AK
AB
AB
BA
AK
AC
AC
AD
AA
AB
AN
AC
AB
DJ
DJ
DX
DD
DD
FX
DX
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD
DD
EG
DJ
DJ
C
C
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
63
64
65
66
67
LSU unit(Include No.101)

Screw(314X)
Separator pawl arm
Screw(310)
MC harness
GRID-MCFB harness
E type ring(E5)
PS clutch
AN2R DV interface harness TW
Screw(35)
TR terminal holder
TR terminal plate
PS transport roller Ref
(Except Japan)
PS transport roller Ref
(Japan)
Bearing
ILSW cover
Right door stopper
Stopper spring
ILSW lever
Interlock switch
ILSW holder
ILSW spring
PS knob
Screw(38KS)
Screw(36ES)
Middle frame
E type ring(E6)
Toner motor
Hopper spring
Hopper coupling
Pawl solenoid
Pawl solenoid
Manual paper feed spring B
TN guide pin A
(Inch series,AB Series agency)
TN guide pin B (Except Inch series,AB Series agency)
TN guide pin C
(Japan)
Screw(410)
Screw(36)
TC harness
DHV harness
Earth spring
Screw(312)
Solenoid sound proof sheet
Tray detect switch
Drive unit
[MX-M260/M260N/M260FG/M260FP,AR-5726]
Drive unit
[MX-M310/M310N/M310FG/M310FP,AR-5731]
Solenoid spacer
Fusing cushion A
[MX-M310/M310N/M310FG/M310FP,AR-5731]
Fan cover cushion L
Fan cover cushion R
Fan cover
Screw
LSU cooling fan screw(320)
LSU cooling fan
Fan plate
Interface connector(BU03P-TR-PH)
Cable band(RSG-100)
Fan plate tape
Screw(412)
Screw(314X)
LSU cover
LSU cover cushion L
LSU cover cushion R
15
TR No.
LSU
MC
GRID-MCFB
B
LSU
L
AN2R ILSW
CRUM
E
PS
AN2R DV
TW
TR
TR
PS Ref
PS Ref
ILSW
ILSW
ILSW
ILSW
PS
B
TN A
TN B
TN C
TC
DHV
A
L
R
LSU
LSU
FAN
LSU
LSU L
LSU R
Effective
time
1st lot
1st lot
09/09
1st lot
Update : 2009/11/16

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
PARTS CODE
NO.
DESCRIPTION
91
PCOVP0143QSZZ
AH
DX
Process air intake duct cover
92
PDUC-0010QSZZ
AH
DX
93
DHAI-0609QSPZ
AK
DX
Process air intake duct

AN2R PS fan harness
101
RMOTN0055QSPZ
BL
HG
Polygon motor(for LSU)
Effective
time
TR No.
AN2R PS

89
86
88
83
87
86
85
82
79
82
80
81
76
79
75
80
MX-M310,MX-M310N
MX-M310FG/FP
AR-5731
84
2
101
91
78
84
2
10
78
77
47
20
48
49
16
92
52 53
70 5
11
42
20
53 15
93
53
13
63
50
51
19
12
18
65
53
28
37
67
66
74
35
44
31
55
29
54
28
31
27
36
6
64
39
41
40
43
44
56
32
6
30
34
16
29
54
33
14
PRP03908
17
Update : 2009/10/16

NO.
PARTS CODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
LPLTP0159QSZZ
LHLDW1226FCZZ
LPLTM0179QSZ1
PSHEZ0274QSZZ
GCASP0006QSZZ
PGIDM0070QSZ1
PTPE-0021QSZ1
LPLTM0181QSZ1
PGIDM0071QSZZ
LX-BZ1144FCPZ
NGERH0193FCZZ
12

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
DESCRIPTION
AD
AB
AR
AC
BA
AM
AA
AB
AL
AA
AB
DJ
DJ
EQ
DJ
FX
EG
DJ
DJ
EB
DD
DD
C
C
C
C
D
D
C
C
D
C
C
MSPRC2631FCZZ
AC
DJ
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
MLEVP0755FCZ1
LX-BZ0833FCPZ
PSHEZ0244QSZ2
XRESP70-08000
NGERH0108QSZZ
MSPRC0354QSZZ
NSFTZ0047QSZ1
LPLTM0180QSZ1
NBRGP0041GCZZ
XEBS740P10000
AE
AC
AC
AA
AD
AC
AK
AE
AD
AA
DJ
DD
DJ
DD
DJ
DJ
EB
DS
DJ
DD
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
23
GCOV-0282FCZZ
AH
DX
24
25
27
28
29
31
XBPS740P08KS0
PSHEZ5948FCZZ
LPLTM0277QSZZ
JHNDP0013QSZZ
XEBS730P08000
TCADZ0549QSZZ
TCADZ0550QSZZ
TCADZ0551QSZZ
TLABZ0335QSZZ
AB
AD
AC
AT
AC
AE
AE
AE
AD
DD
DJ
DJ
EZ
DD
DS
DS
DS
DJ
C
C
C
C
C
D
D
D
D
501
CCASP0006RS79
BF
GN
Screw(48KS)
Cassette handle sheet P2
Side plate guide R
Cassette panel AN2R
Screw(38)
Size display card
[Missing parts code](Inch Series)
Size display label
(AB Series except Japan)
Size display label
(Japan)
Paper seal label
(Japan)
2nd 550 cassette unit[Missing parts code]
BH
GX
550 cassette unit(Without No.30)
30
Cassette rear edge plate

Turn fastener
Rotation plate
Rotation plate sheet
550 cassette
Guide F
GID tape
Side plate guide F
Guide R
Screw
UC manual paper feed gear
Fusing pressure spring
Side plate F lever

Screw
Cassette sheet
E type ring(E7)
Lift gear(22T)
Lift gear spring
Lift shaft
Lift plate
Bearing
Screw(410)
Cassette handle cover P2
TR No.
550
F
GID
F
R
UC
P2
P2
R
AN2R
J
2nd 550
(Unit)
901
CCASP0006RS59
17
550
(No.30 )
Effective
time
1st lot
1st lot
1st lot
Update : 2009/10/16

2
501
8
6
7
9
10
4
11
11
13
12
22
7
27
14
31
22
15
17
18
22
22
23
21
19
30
20
29
25
28
PRP03909
18
24
16
19
Update : 2009/10/16

NO.

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
XEBS730P10000
CPWBF0081QSE2
MLEVP0064QSZZ
AC
AP
AD
DD
EQ
DJ
C
E
C
MLEVP0063QSZ1
AD
DJ
MLEVP0056QSZZ
AC
DJ
MSPRD0201QSZZ
AC
DJ
9
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
PCOVP0064QSZZ
RPLU-0026QSZ1
RPLU-0026QSP1
MARMP0026QSZZ
NROLR0133QSZZ
MARMP0019QSZZ
NGERH0990FCZZ
NROLR0132QSZ1
MARMP0021QSZZ
LPIN-0026MCZZ
NGERH0107QSZZ
AD
AR
AR
AD
AM
AD
AB
AR
AD
AA
AD
DJ
EQ
EQ
DJ
EG
DJ
DJ
EQ
DJ
DD
DJ
D
B
B
C
A
C
C
C
C
C
C
18
MSPRD0389QSZZ
AC
DJ
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
NBRGC0100FCZ1
NGERH0097QSZZ
DHAI-0350QSPZ
QSW-B0017QSZZ
NGERH0156QSZZ
MSPRC0209QSZ1
XRESP40-06000
XRESP50-06000
PCLC-0024QSZZ
NSFTZ0080QSZ1
VHPSG2481++-1
AC
AF
AG
AF
AD
AC
AA
AA
AX
AG
AE
DJ
DS
DX
DS
DJ
DJ
DD
DD
FG
DS
DS
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
C
B
C
B
31
DHAI-0399QSPZ
AF
DS
33
34
35
XEBS730P08000
LPLTP0192QSZZ
RHET-0006QSZZ
AC
AK
AQ
DD
DX
EQ
C
C
B
36
PSHEZ0391QSZ1
AC
DJ
Screw(38)
Dehumidify heater fixing plate
Dehumidify heater
Paper feed solenoid sound proof A
37
PSHEZ0392QSZ1
AB
DJ
Paper feed solenoid sound proof B
38
PSHEZ0393QSZ1
AA
DJ
Paper feed solenoid sound proof C
PARTS CODE
Screw(310)
Cassette sensor PWB
Paper detect actuator
Upper limit detect actuator
P-IN actuator
Paper feed in actuator spring
Solenoid cover
Paper feed solenoid
Paper feed solenoid
Solenoid arm
Pick up roller
Pick up arm F
Gear(16T)
Paper feed roller AND2
Pick up arm R
Spring pin(2-8)
Paper feed gear(20T)
Pick up roller pressure spring
Bearing 6
2nd joint gear
Cassette sensor harness
Tray detect switch
Paper feed clutch gear(42T)
Solenoid spring
E type ring(E4)
E type ring(E5)
Paper feed clutch(42T)
Paper feed roller shaft
Photo sensor(SG2481)
Manual paper feed empty harness
19
TR No.
P-IN
AND2
R
6
2nd
E
E
(Japan)
(Japan)
Effective
time
09/09
Update : 2009/10/16

15
10
19
18
13
2
8
38
21
16
17
14
9
11
36
24
20
29
5
6
25
22
27 23
28
19
37
30
31
PRP03910
20
21
Update : 2009/11/16

NO.
PARTS CODE

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
1
2
XEBS740P12000
PCOVP0053QSZ6
AA
AK
DD
EB
C
D
MSPRD0194QSZ1
AD
DJ
4
5
6
7
8
9
MSPRC0291QSZZ
NSFTZ0065QSZ1
NKOM-0006QSZZ
PSHEZ0133QSZZ
XEBS740P10000
PGIDM0067QST1
AC
AD
AC
AD
AA
AP
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD
EQ
C
C
C
C
C
C
10
MSPRD0233QSZ1
AC
DJ
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
MLEVP0023QSZZ
MLEVP0044QSZZ
LPLTP0348QSZZ
MSPRC0301QSZZ
PFTA-0019QSZZ
XEBS730P10000
PSHEZ0242QSZ1
LRALP0008QSZ2
VHPGP1S73P+-18
DHAI-0398QSPZ
AE
AE
AC
AD
AE
AC
AH
AN
AF
AE
DS
DS
DJ
DJ
DS
DD
DX
EG
DS
DS
C
C
C
C
D
C
C
C
B
C
21
MSPRD0202QSZZ
AB
DJ
22
MLEVP0057QSZZ
AC
DJ
23
24
25
PSHEZ0515QSZZ
LPLTP0409QSZZ
PCOVP0088QSZ1
AG
AC
AD
DX
DJ
DJ
A
C
D
26
MSPRC0270QSZZ
AB
DJ
27
28
29
33
34
36
37
38
NKOM-0005QSZZ
NSFTZ0048QSPZ
XBPS730P08KS0
PSHEZ0301QSZZ
PSHEZ0302QSZZ
PSHEZ0463QSZZ
PSPO-0026QSZZ
LHLDZ0094QSZZ
AC
AF
AB
AC
AC
AD
AA
AC
DJ
DS
DD
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
39
MSPRC0292QSZZ
AC
DJ
40
MSPRD0287QSZZ
AC
DJ
41
42
NROLP0087QSZZ
NSFTZ0101QSZZ
AD
AC
DJ
DJ
C
C
43
PSHEZ0314QSZ2
AF
DS
44
LBRC-0012QSZZ
AD
DJ
45
46
NKOM-0011QSZZ
NSFTZ0101QSZZ
AC
AC
DJ
DJ
C
C
47
MSPRD0340QSZZ
AC
DJ
48
51
52
53
54
XEBS730P08000
LPLTM0396QSZ1
LX-WZ0064FCZZ
PGIDM0186QSZZ
LPLTM6022FCZZ
AC
AD
AA
AK
AC
DD
DJ
DD
DX
DJ
C
C
C
D
C
501
CGIDM0067RS56
AX
FG
502
CCOVP0053RS55
AS
EZ
503
504
CCOVP0088RS56
CPLTP0409RS51
AN
AN
EQ
EG
E
E
DESCRIPTION
PS
LP
PS pressure spring
PS
PS sub shaft
PS
PS collar(13.5)
PS
Paper feed sheet
Screw(410)
Base plate paper feed guide
MF actuator spring
MF
MF actuator
MF
MF actuator 2
MF 2
Separator plate
Pressure plate spring
Pressure plate cover
Screw(310)
Pressure plate sheet
Base plate rail R

R
Manual paper feed P-IN harness

P-IN
Manual paper feed P-IN actuator spring
P-IN
Manual paper feed P-IN actuator

P-IN
Separator sheet
Separator plate AND2

AND2
Plate cover
Separator plate spring
Screw(38KS)
Rail R side sheet F

R F
Rail R side sheet R
R R
Front separator sheet
MF ACT cushion
MF ACT
PS pressure holder
PS
PS follower connect spring
PS
Paper feed sub roller spring
Paper feed sub roller
Paper feed sub roller shaft
Toner protect sheet N
N
Manual paper feed sub collar bracket
Manual paper feed sub collar
Manual paper feed sub roller spring
SP
Screw(38)
Separator guide plate
Push nut(M3)
Cover guide
M4 plate N
M4 N
Base plate paper feed guide unit [Missing parts code]
Middle frame cover unit

Plate cover unit

Separation plate unit
TR No.
Effective
time
Screw(412)
Middle frame cover
PS earth spring LP
21
1st lot
1st lot
1st lot
Update : 2009/11/16

48
48 53
48
1
43
54
36
502
501
1
5
11
4
4 39
38
10
48 17
44
14
38
46
15
45
47
12
37
13
20
19
16
34
33
21
22
18
41
42
40
28
23
27
29
51 24
52
26
25
504
40
503
16
PRP03911
22
23
Update : 2009/11/16
H (Side door unit)

NO.
PARTS CODE
1
2
3
4
MLEVP0058QSTZ
GDOR-0002QSTD
XRESP40-06000
LBSHZ0303FCZZ

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
DESCRIPTION
AD
AV
AA
AC
DJ
FG
DD
DJ
C
D
C
C
NGERH0074QSZZ
AD
DJ
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
LPINS0133FCZZ
PTME-0020QSZ1
MSPRD0222QSZZ
MARMP0043QSZZ
NSFTZ0055QSZ3
XRESP30-06000
NROLP0036QSZZ
XPSSJ20-07000
AA
AC
AC
AC
AH
AA
AP
AA
DD
DJ
DJ
DJ
DX
DD
EQ
DD
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
14
MSPRT0279QSZ1
AC
DJ
15
17
18
19
NROLP1122FCZZ
LFRM-0040QSZ3
LFRM-0040QSZ4
MSPRC0349QSZZ
MSPRC0348QSZZ
LPLTM0102QSZZ
AF
AS
AS
AD
AD
AD
DS
EQ
EQ
DJ
DJ
DJ
C
D
D
C
C
C
20
LHLDZ0084QSZ1
AE
DS
21
XEBS730P06000
AA
DD
22
MSPRC0296QSZZ
AF
DS
Screw(36)
TR pressure spring R
23
MSPRC0295QSZZ
AF
DS
TR pressure spring F
24
25
27
28
29
XHBS730P10000
XHBS730P16000
XEBS730P10000
LPLTM0090QSZ1
LPLTM0091QSZ1
AD
AA
AC
AE
AE
DD
DD
DD
DJ
DJ
C
C
C
C
C
30
MSPRD0205QSZZ
AE
DS
Screw(310)
Screw(316)
Screw(310)
Inner reinforce plate F
Inner reinforce plate R
TC ground spring
31
32
34
36
38
39
40
LRALP0004QSZ3
LPLTM0363QSZZ
CHLDZ0150RS52
CHLDZ0150RS51
PSHEZ0307QSZ1
PSHEZ0431QSZ1
LX-BZ0084QSPZ
NGERH0243QSZZ
XEBS730P08000
AH
AF
BE
BE
AB
AF
AB
AD
AC
DX
DS
GN
GN
DJ
DS
DD
DJ
DD
C
C
A
A
C
C
C
C
C
41
MSPRC0289QSZZ
AB
DJ
Right door rail

Rail reinforce plate
TC unit
TC unit
Right door sheet
Right door DUP sheet
Screw
TC gear(20T)
Screw(38)
TC roller spring R REF
42
MSPRC0280QSZZ
AC
DJ
TC roller spring F
43
44
LSUPP0003QSZ1
PCLR-0014QSZ1
AD
AD
DJ
DJ
C
C
46
PGIDH0093QSZ3
AN
EG
Right door roller rib

TC roller collar A2R
TR front paper guide
49
LHLDZ0150QSZ1
AK
DX
Transfer holder And2 Ref
50
51
52
54
55
56
57
59
LPLTM0365QSZZ
NROLR0159QSZ1
NBRGP0023QSZZ
LPLTM0245QSZ2
LX-BZ1181FCZZ
LPLTM0512QSZZ
LPLTM0247QSZZ
PMLT-0044QSZZ
PMLT-0044QSZZ
PSEL-0163QSZ1
AD
AY
AD
AG
AB
AG
AC
AA
AA
AH
DJ
FQ
DJ
DX
DD
DX
DJ
DJ
DJ
DX
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
60
LHLDZ0151QSZZ
AF
DS
TR electrode plate
Transfer roller AN3
Roller bearing
TR reinforce plate
Screw(36K)
Separate discharge sheet
Separate electrode plate
TR cushion
TR cushion
Transfer cleaner pad
Separate holder And2 Ref
61
PRNGF0107FCZ1
(Unit)
AC
DJ
Star ring
CDOR-0002RS62
BF
GN
Side door unit(Without No.33)
CDOR-0002RS63
BF
GN
Side door unit(Without No.33)
16
33
58
901
Lock lever
Right door
E type ring(E4)
M bushing C
DUP roller drive gear
Pin(210)
Lock pawl
Lock pawl spring
Lock pawl arm
Lock pawl shaft
E type ring(E3)
Spring pin(2-7)
DUP follower spring
PS upper roller
Right door inner
Right door inner
High voltage spring B
High voltage spring A
DUP roller earth plate
TR terminal interface holder
23

E
M C
DUP
E
DUP
DUP
PS
(Except Japan)
(Japan)
B
A
DUP
TR
TR
R
TR
F
F
R
TC
(Except Japan) TC
(Japan) TC
DUP
TC
R REF
TC A2R
TR
And2 Ref
TR
AN3
TR
[MX-M Series] TR
[MX-M Series] TR
And2 Ref
(Except Japan)
(No.33 )
(Japan)
(No.33 )
TR No.
Effective
time
1st lot
09/11 mid
Update : 2009/11/16
H (Side door unit)

2
1
12
3
4
27
43
15
4
13
3
15
25
38
16
14
23
14
30
28
27
5
38
25
11
40
24
36
24
31
34
34
11
9
8
10
22
36
19
24
17
34
34
29
20
31
32
40
42
24
52
51
32
21
61
18
52
39
21
44
55
21
44
54
61
61
58
41
61
61
A
61
60 61
56
21
A
57 58
55
46
21
50
24
49 59
33
PRP03912
25
Update : 2009/10/16
I (Multi manual paper feed tray unit)

NO.
PARTS CODE

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
PGIDM0075QSTZ
PGIDM0076QSTZ
XEBS730P08000
LSOU-0024QSTE
PTME-0271FCZZ
MSPRC0250QSZZ
NGERR0140QSZZ
XEPS730P06X00
NGERP1385FCZZ
LHLDZ0066QSZZ
LSOU-0026QSTC
QSW-B0017QSZZ
DHAI-0359QSZZ
14
MSPRP2830FCZZ
AA
DJ
15
LPLTP0234QSZZ
AE
DS
16
MLEVP0035QSE2
AC
DJ
Width detect plate

Original detect actuator
17
18
19
20
22
CPWBF0106QSE4
LSOU-0025QSTC
VHPGP1S73P+-18
LSOU-0027QSTC
XEBS730P06000
(Unit)
CSOU-0024RS65
CSOU-0024RS66
AP
AS
AF
AP
AA
EQ
EQ
DS
EQ
DD
E
D
B
D
C
Manual paper feed VR PWB

Manual paper feed tray 1 lower
Manual paper feed tray 2 lower
Screw(36)
BF
BF
GN
GN
E
E
Manual paper feed tray unit

Manual paper feed tray unit
901
AE
AE
AC
AS
AD
AC
AD
AA
AF
AD
AP
AF
AP
DJ
DJ
DD
EQ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD
DS
DJ
EQ
DS
EQ
C
C
C
D
C
C
C
C
C
C
D
B
C
MB side guide F
MB side guide R
Screw(38)
Manual paper feed tray 1 upper
Tray lock pawl
Tray lock spring
Width detect rack
Screw(36X)
Width detect pinion
Harness holder
Manual paper feed tray 2 upper
Tray detect switch
Manual paper feed unit harness
Width detect plate spring
25
[Missing parts code] MB F

[Missing parts code] MB R
VR
[Missing parts code] 1
[Missing parts code] 2
(Except Japan)
(Japan)
TR No.
Effective
time
1st lot
1st lot
1st lot
1st lot
Update : 2009/10/16
I (Multi manual paper feed tray unit)

3
4
1
10
11
12
12
5
9
3
14
7
A
16
A
15
13
17
19
16
22
19
3
20
3
18
22
22
26
22
PRP03913
27
Update : 2009/10/16

NO.
PARTS CODE

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
PCOVP0107QSTF
XEBS730P10000
PSHEZ0099QSZZ
NROLR0922FCZ2
NGERH0223QSZZ
XPSSJ20-07000
NGERH0061QSZZ
MARMP0009QSZ1
MSPRT0351QSZZ
NROLR1267FCZ1
NSFTZ0096QSZ1
XRESP40-06000
LBSHZ0303FCZZ
LBOSZ0150QSZZ
AL
AC
AC
AR
AC
AA
AD
AF
AC
AH
AF
AA
AC
AE
EB
DD
DJ
ZZ
DJ
DD
DJ
DS
DJ
DX
DS
DD
DJ
DS
D
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
15
MSPRC1315FCZ1
AD
DJ
Multi frame cover N1

Screw(310)
Protect sheet S
Manual paper feed roller
Gear(20T)
Spring pin(2-7)
Gear(24T)
Roller arm
Roller arm spring
Pick up roller
Roller shaft F N
E type ring(E4)
M bushing C
Cam boss A2 N
Manual paper feed clutch spring A
16
PPIPP0109FCZ1
AC
DJ
Manual paper feed clutch sleeve A pipe
17
18
19
LBOSZ0199QSZZ
MARMP0041QSZZ
MARMP0006QSZZ
AE
AE
AD
DS
DS
DJ
C
C
C
20
MSPRD0347QSZZ
AD
DJ
Cam boss A1
Cam transmission arm
Fulcrum arm
Stopper arm spring
21
MCAMP0003QSZZ
AD
DJ
22
MSPRC1316FCZ1
AE
DS
23
25
26
PPIPP0014QSZZ
NSFTZ0017QSP1
NGERH0972FCZZ
AC
AD
AB
DJ
DJ
DJ
C
C
C
27
CPLTM0345QS01
AG
DX
29
30
31
XEBS730P08000
PTME-0178FCZ1
MSPRC2175FCZZ
AC
AC
AA
DD
DJ
DJ
C
C
C
RPLU-0028QSZZ
AM
EG
Screw(38)
Manual paper feed pawl A
Pawl A spring
Multi field solenoid
AM
EG
Multi field solenoid
32
RPLU-0028QSPZ
Drive cam
Manual paper feed clutch spring B
Cam clutch sleeve
Manual paper feed cum shaft
Gear(27T)
Paper feed connect plate TLPD
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
MSPRC1318FCZ1
PTME-0179FCZZ
XBBS730P10000
MARMP0027QSZ1
LFRM-0048QSTH
MARMP0008QSZZ
LPLTP0056QSZ3
XEPS730P06X00
XEBS730P10000
PSHEZ0241QSZZ
LBNDJ0013FCZ1
NSFTZ0090QSZZ
AA
AC
AA
AE
AS
AH
AD
AA
AC
AB
AE
AG
DJ
DD
DD
DJ
EQ
DX
DJ
DD
DD
DJ
DJ
DX
C
C
C
C
D
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
45
MSPRD0302QSZZ
AC
DJ
Manual paper
Manual paper
Screw(310)
Manual paper
Multi frame
Stopper arm
Stopper plate
Screw(36X)
Screw(310)
Manual paper
Band
Roller shaft R
Manual paper
46
MSPRD0329QSZZ
AC
DJ
Revers ACT spring
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
NCPL-0012QSZZ
CPWBF0083QSE5
DHAI-0360QSPZ
MLEVP0104QSZZ
LBSHZ0006QSZZ
LSTPP0011QSZZ
LX-WZ0011QSZZ
(Unit)
AD
AU
AE
AD
AC
AC
AB
DJ
EZ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD
C
E
C
C
C
C
C
Manual paper feed coupling

Sensor PWB
DUP 2 sensor harness
Revers lever
M bushing 2
Resin E type ring
Poly slider(5-12-0.5)
901
CFRM-0048RS55
BE
GN
feed spring B
feed pawl B
feed tray arm
feed protection sheet

N
feed coupling spring
Multi manual paper feed unit(Without No.36,40,41,43)
27
TR No.
N1
F N
E
M C
A2 N
A
A1
TLPD
A
A
B
B
R N
ACT
DUP2
M 2
E
(No.36,40,41,43
)
Effective
time
09/09
Update : 2009/10/16

901
52
2
11
17
51
14 6
12
12
43
15
29 13
13
16
44
52
29
29
53
45
9
46
18
48
23
25
17
12
32
30
42
6
27
22
20
26
21
29
50
19
47
33
31
5
41
10
49
34
7
40
35
37
41
36
40
36
38
39
PRP03914
28
29
Update : 2009/11/16
K DV (DV unit)
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
501
901
PARTS CODE
LHLDZ0142QSZZ
PFILD0313FCZZ
XEBS730P08000
PGIDM0158QSZZ
PSEL-0162QSZZ
LX-BZ1066FCZZ
PGIDM0159QSZZ
PMLT-0137QSZZ
PMLT-0142QSZZ
PSEL-0964FCZ1
PMLT-0141QSZZ
PMLT-0147QSZZ
LDAIU0033QSZZ
NROLP0150QSZZ
NROLP0149QSZZ
PMLT-0146QSZZ
XEBS730P06000
LHLDZ0132QSZ1
PBOX-0025QSZZ
DHAI-0566QSPZ
XRESP40-06000
NBRGY0769FCZ2
NPLYZ0041QSZZ
LPLTM0194QSZZ
XBPS730P06KS0
NPLYZ0040QSZZ
NBLTH0494FCZZ
PSHEZ0652QSZZ
XBBS730P04000
PSHEZ0651QSZZ
XRESP50-06000
XEBS730P10000
NBRGC0020QSZZ
NGERH1653FCZZ
LX-BZ1143FCPZ
LHLDZ0128QSZZ
MSPRD0395QSZZ
LHLDZ0129QSZZ
PCOVP0122QSZZ
NROLM0151QSZ2
PMLT-0002YSZ1
PSHEP0632QSZZ
LPLTM0002YSZ4
LPLTM0477QSZZ
XBPBZ30P03000
PCOVP0121QSZZ
PCOVP0121QSZ1
XBBBZ30P06000
RDTCM0021QSZZ
XUBUZ30P08000
CHLDZ0142RS51
(Unit)
DUNT-0777RSZZ

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
DESCRIPTION
AD
AG
AC
AH
AE
AC
AM
AD
AC
AA
AC
AB
AC
AS
AS
AB
AA
AC
AM
AQ
AA
AQ
AC
AC
AB
AC
AD
AA
AA
AA
AA
AC
AH
AC
AD
AC
AC
AC
AF
BT
AC
AB
AR
AK
AB
AE
AE
AC
AY
AA
AN
DJ
DX
DD
DX
DJ
DD
EG
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
EQ
EQ
DJ
DD
DJ
EG
EQ
DD
EB
DJ
DJ
DD
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD
DJ
DD
DD
DX
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DS
NE
DJ
DJ
EQ
EB
DD
DJ
DJ
DD
FQ
DD
EG
C
A
C
C
A
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
A
C
A
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
D
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
C
E
Filter holder
TN filter
Screw(38)
Cartridge guide top
DV blade
Blue screw(36)
Cartridge guide bottom
Pipe cushion N
Pipe cover cushion N
Cover upper seal
DV guide cushion N
DV side cushion R
DV block R
MX roller L
MX roller R
DV side cushion F
Screw(36)
Scraper holder
DV BOX
Toner sensor harness
E ring(E4)
MG bearing
MX pulley
DV box fixing plate
Screw(36KS)
MG pulley
DV belt
DV side sheet F
Screw(34)
DV side sheet R
E ring(E5)
Screw(310)
DMX bearing(F6/14)
DMX gear(24T)
Screw
DV holder F
Bias spring
MG holder
DV cover F
MG roller
DV TH cushion
Doctor cover seal
Doctor reinforce plate
DV doctor
Screw(33)
Doctor cover
Doctor cover
Screw(36)
ATC sensor
Screw(38)
Filter holder unit
BN
HZ
DV unit
29
TR No.
TN
DV
[Missing parts code] N

N
DV N
DV R
DV R
MX L
MX R
DV F
DV
E
MG
MX
MG
DV
DV F
DV R
E
DMX
DMX
DV F
MG
DV F
[Missing parts code] MG
DVTH
DV
ATC

DV
Effective
time
1st lot
1st lot
09/10 R/C
1st lot
Update : 2009/11/16
K DV (DV unit)
501
1
2
3
3
6
8
7
9
6
10
12
11
13
22
23
21
26
24
3
15
27
16
22
19
17
28
18
A
29
31
24
32
33
40
36
42
41
34
44
30
34
32
45
35
37
43
33
45
38
32
32
46
45
47
48
39
3
49
PRP03915
30
21 C
22
14
20
901
25
31
Update : 2009/11/16
L (Process unit)
NO.
PARTS CODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
XEBS730P08000
PCAPH0022QSZZ
NSRW-0002QSZZ
LPLTM0241QSZZ
MLEVP0065QSZZ
CFRM-0049RS76
NCPL-0003QSZ1
PSEL-0071QSZZ
PSEL-0070QSZZ
PSHT-0014QSZZ
PPIPP0017QSZZ
14

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
AC
AC
AE
AF
AE
AZ
AC
AF
AF
AC
AE
DD
DJ
DS
DS
DS
FQ
DJ
DS
DS
DJ
DS
C
D
C
C
C
A
C
A
A
C
C
MSPRC0045QSZ1
AC
DJ
15
PSPAZ0696FCZZ
AC
DJ
16
17
18
NGERH0036QSZZ
PCOVP0132QSZZ
NGERH0039QSZZ
LFIX-0015QSZZ
AC
AF
AE
AE
DJ
DS
DS
DJ
C
D
C
C
LFIX-0014QSZZ
AE
DJ
NGERH0037QSZZ
NGERH0038QSZZ
NSFTZ0020QSZ1
NBRGP0299FCPZ
PMLT-0018QSZ1
PTME-0021QSZZ
LX-WZ0329FCPZ
LX-RZ0001QSZZ
MSPRT0214QSZZ
LX-BZ0064QSZZ
MSPRC0213QSZZ
CHLDZ0035RS58
CCLEZ0011QS32
UCLEZ0011QSZ1
XEBS730P10000
PSHEZ0329QSZZ
PTPE-0026QSZ1
LHLDZ0090QSZZ
LX-BZ0406FCPZ
PRNGF0106FCZ2
PRNGP0081FCZ1
PSHEZ0557QSZZ
XBBS730P06000
CPIPP0017RS51
CTME-0021RS51
(Unit)
AC
AC
AL
AD
AC
AK
AB
AB
AB
AA
AB
AW
BD
BR
AC
AC
AA
AC
AA
AC
AB
AC
AC
AN
AK
DJ
DJ
DS
DJ
DJ
DX
DD
DD
DJ
DD
DJ
FG
GN
MJ
DD
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD
EG
EB
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
A
A
A
C
C
C
C
C
A
C
C
C
E
A
BG
GT
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
44
46
501
502
DESCRIPTION
R
F
Pipe cap spacer
Transport screw gear(30T)
Drum cover
Transport pipe gear(14T)
Drum fixing plate B

(Inch series,AB Series agency) B
Drum fixing plate A
(Except Inch series,AB Series agency) A
Idle gear(26T)
Transport pipe gear(15T)
Transport screw
DV bearing
DV
Transport screw cushion
Separator pawl
Washer
Star ring
Lever spring
Screw(38)
Separator pawl spring
MC holder unit
[Missing parts code] MC
Cleaning brade
Cleaning blade
Screw(310)
Toner stir sheet
Screw tape
Star ring holder
Screw(34)
Star ring N2
N2
Resin E ring(E4)
E
DR brake sheet
DR
Screw(36)
Toner pipe unit

Separator pawl unit
Screw(38)
Toner pipe cap
Transport pipe screw
Process reinforce plate
Separator pawl lever
Process frame unit
Screw coupling
Seal R
Seal F
Toner pipe shutter
Toner pipe
Toner pipe spring
Process unit(Without No.19,44)

901
CFRM-0049RS5N
TR No.
31
(No.19,44
)
Effective
time
1st lot
1st lot
1st lot
1st lot
Update : 2009/11/16
L (Process unit)
29
29
32
31
29
6
28
7
5
46
36
36
38
12
3
15
501
36
13
36
38
37
38
14
33
17
16
39
30
37
30
26
27
26
27
502
25
23
22
35
44
25
35
34
11
18
21
19
38
10
37
502
33
901
37
20
24
PRP03916
32
33
Update : 2009/10/16
M 1(Fusing unit 1)
NO.

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
DESCRIPTION
22
23
MARMP0048QSZ2
MLEVP0100QSZZ
MLEVP0101QSZZ
RTHM-0050FCZZ
DHAI-0367QSPZ
LHLDW0086QSZZ
RH-HX0001QSLB
LPLTM0338QSZ1
VHPGP1SQ73P-18
XEBS730P06000
XEBS730P06000
LSTPF0172FCZZ
RLMPU0040QSPZ
RLMPU0041QSPZ
RLMPU0039QSPZ
LHLDZ0139QSZZ
LFRM-0098QSZZ
24
MSPRC0323QSZZ
AC
DJ
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
LPLTM0337QSZ1
NROLM0129QSZZ
NGERH0171QSZZ
NBRGP0025QSZZ
LPLTM0343QSZZ
CPLTM0336QS02
MSPRT0257QSZ1
AC
BB
AR
AN
AB
AR
AC
DJ
FX
EQ
EQ
DJ
EQ
DJ
C
A
A
A
C
A
C
33
MSPRD0322QSZZ
AC
DJ
Fusing earth plate UF

Heat roller(TL)
Fusing gear(TL)(38T)
Upper HR bearing(TL)
Gear key plate(TL)
Fusing cleaner plate
Upper pawl spring
Fusing ACT return spring
34
MLEVP0099QSZ1
AF
DS
Fusing rear paper detect lever
35
36
37
38
PGIDM0113QSZZ
PTME-0282FCZ2
LX-WZ0006QSZZ
PTME-0024QSZ2
AT
AH
AC
AN
EZ
DX
DD
EQ
C
A
C
A
39
LX-BZ0086QSPZ
AD
DJ
Fusing rear upper guide

Upper separate pawl
Washer
Upper separate pawl
Fusing unit fixing screw
40
CPLTM0513QS01
AF
DS
Thermistor felt fixing plate
41
LX-BZ1195FCZZ
AC
DD
42
LSTYM0004QSZZ
AK
DX
Screw(M3)
Fusing upper frame stay And3
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
LPLTM0510QSZZ
LX-BZ1181FCZZ
LPLTM0473QSZZ
LX-BZ1126FCPZ
XHPS730P04000
XWHS730-05080
LX-BZ0093QSZZ
PCOVP0148QSZZ
XBBS730P06000
(Unit)
AD
AB
AE
AB
AB
AA
AC
AK
AC
DJ
DD
DJ
DD
DD
DD
DD
DX
DD
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
Earth joint plate

Screw(36)
Fusing earth plate And3
Thermister screw
Screw(34)
Washer
Screw
Thermostat cover
Screw(34)
DUNTW0782RSZZ
BW
RJ
Fusing unit(Include Block 18)
DUNTW0782RS12
BW
RJ
DUNTW0782RS11
BW
RJ
1
2
3
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
18
!
!
!
PARTS CODE
19
901
AF
AE
AE
AN
AE
AB
AT
AC
AF
AA
AA
AA
BA
BA
BA
AD
AV
DS
DS
DS
EG
DJ
DJ
EZ
DJ
DS
DD
DD
DD
FX
FX
FX
DJ
FG
C
C
C
B
C
C
B
C
B
C
C
C
B
B
B
C
D
Pressure release fulcrum arm

Pressure release lever F TL
Pressure release lever R TL
Thermostat TL
DUP sensor harness
Harness ring
Thermistor TL
Fusing earth plate UR
Photo sensor(GP1SQ73P)
Screw(36)
Screw(36)
Roller stopper
Heater lamp
Heater lamp
Heater lamp
Lamp fixing plate
Fusing upper frame(TL)
Fusing unit earth spring
33
TR No.

F TL
R TL
TL
DUP
TL
UR
[To No,51] (36)
(120V)
(230V)
(100V)
UF
HR
ACT
PG
LPD
And3
And3
[From No,15] (34)

(120V)
( 18 )
(230V)
( 18 )
(100V)
( 18 )
Effective
time
1st lot
09/07 mid
1st lot
1st lot
Update : 2009/10/16
M 1(Fusing unit 1)
1
44
44
1
43
44
3
10
22
45
2
50
15
41
15
44
44
47
47 47
48
8
13
41
B
11
40
47
14
15
15
15
48
51
40
8
48
15
48
42
41
A
23
12
46
24
25
28
46
29
15
30
19
49
27
31
29
32
34
32
33
35
39
32
37
18
37
38
36
PRP03917
34
39
36
38
901
35
Update : 2009/11/16
N 2(Fusing unit 2)
NO.
PARTS CODE

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
DESCRIPTION
1
2
NBRGY0022QSZZ
NROLR0156QSZZ
AL
BF
EB
GN
A
A
MSPRC0324QSZZ
AC
DJ
LPLTM0341QSZ1
AC
DJ
LPLTM0531QSZZ
AC
DJ
8
9
11
12
14
15
16
PGIDH0140QSZZ
LPLTM0340QSZZ
MSPRD0328QSZ1
PTME-0041QSZZ
TCAUH0017QSZ1
TLABH0381QSZZ
XBPSN30P08KS0
MSPRD0327QSZ1
LFRM-0072QSZ5
AY
AC
AC
AG
AC
AE
AA
AC
AT
FQ
DJ
DJ
DS
DJ
DJ
DD
DJ
EQ
A
C
C
A
D
D
C
C
D
17
MSPRD0326QSZZ
AC
DJ
Fusing front guide

Fusing earth plate(DF)
Lower pawl spring R(TL)
Lower separate pawl
Screw(38KS)
Lower pawl spring F(TL)
Fusing lower frame
Fusing rear lower guide spring
18
19
20
21
PGIDM0115QSZZ
TLABH0289QSZZ
MLEVF0111QSZZ
MLEVF0112QSZZ
TLABH0685QSZZ
TLABH0683QSZZ
VRH-ST2HB507K
XWHS740-08090
(Unit)
AS
AA
AD
AD
AD
AE
AD
AA
EQ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD
C
D
C
C
D
D
C
C
Fusing rear lower guide

Fusing green label
Pressure lever F(AND2)
Pressure lever R(AND2)
Resistor(500M)
Washer
DUNTW0782RSZZ
BW
RJ
DUNTW0782RS12
BW
RJ
DUNTW0782RS11
BW
RJ
13
22
23
24
901
Fusing pressure bearing

Fusing roller
Fusing pressure spring(TL)
Fusing earth plate(DR)
High resistor eatrh plate And3
35
(Except Japan)
(Japan)
(Except Japan)
(Japan)
TR No.
FU
And3
F
R
(500M)
(120V)
( 17 )
(230V)
( 17 )
(100V)
( 17 )
Effective
time
1st lot
1st lot
09/07 mid
Update : 2009/11/16
N 2(Fusing unit 2)
1
21
3
5
2
1
8
24
3
23
20
14 12
11
9
12 11
13
24
16
12
17
12
15
14
18
15
19
36
22
PRP03918
37
Update : 2009/11/16
O (Drive unit)
NO.
PARTS CODE

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
DESCRIPTION
XBPS740P08ES0
RMOTP0069QSPZ
CPLTM0160QS02
MSPRC0200QSZ1
NGERH0234QSZZ
NGERH0090QSZ1
NGERH0084QSZZ
XRESP70-08000
NGERH0192QSZZ
AB
BA
AU
AB
AF
AF
AK
AA
AD
DD
FX
FG
DJ
DS
DS
DX
DD
DJ
C
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
NGERH0086QSZZ
AD
DJ
NGERH0190QSZZ
AC
DJ
NGERH0087QSZZ
AE
DJ
NGERH0189QSZZ
AD
DJ
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
NGERH0010QSZZ
NGERH0092QSZZ
NGERH0093QSZZ
XBPS730P06KS0
NGERH0095QSZZ
NGERH0191QSZZ
NGERH0186QSZZ
NGERH0096QSZZ
CPLTM0161QS02
MSPRC0262QSZ1
NCPL-0009QSZZ
NGERH0091QSZZ
CGERH0204RS51
AD
AD
AD
AB
AE
AC
AH
AE
AP
AC
AC
AE
AX
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD
DJ
DJ
DX
DJ
EQ
DJ
DJ
DJ
FQ
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
25
DHAI-0602QSPZ
AE
DS
Screw(48ES)
Main motor
Main drive plate
Ratchet spring
Ratchet gear(49T)
Fusing drive gear(19T)
Gear(94/21T)
E type ring(E7)
Gear(46/19T)
Gear(39/21T)
[MX-M260/M260N/M260FP/M260FG,
AR-5726]
Gear(39/19T)
[MX-M310/M310N/M310FP/M310FG,
AR-5731]
Gear(30/21T)
[MX-M260/M260N/M260FP/M260FG,
AR-5726]
Gear(30/21T)
[MX-M310/M310N/M310FP/M310FG,
AR-5731]
Gear(28T)
Gear(30/16T)
Gear(28/16T)
Screw(36KS)
Gear
MG gear
N gear(58/21T)
Gear(37/25T)
Sub drive plate
MG spring
MG coupling
Coupling gear(34T)
Drum coup gear
AN2R main motor harness
26
27
28
29
LX-WZ0012QSZZ
XRESP50-06000
LX-WZ0476FCZZ
LX-WZ0407FCZZ
(Unit)
AB
AA
AC
AB
DD
DD
DD
DD
C
C
C
C
Poly slider AND2

E type ring(E5)
Poly slider
Poly slider
CPLTM0160RS59
BH
HC
CPLTM0160RS60
BH
HC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
901
Drive unit
Drive unit
37
TR No.
MG
N
MG
MG
AN2R
AND2
E
[MX-M260/M260N/M260FP/M260FG,
AR-5726]
[MX-M310/M310N/M310FP/M310FG,
AR-5731]
Effective
time
Update : 2009/11/16
O (Drive unit)
7
28
4
25
1
6
29
8
9
10
13
15
11
15
12
14
17
21
12
18
22
20
23
27
26
24
16
12
15
19
38
PRP03919
39
Update : 2009/10/16

NO.
PARTS CODE

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
1
3
NSFTZ0042QSZ1
NROLP0049QSZZ
AE
AC
NROLP0111QSZZ
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
PBRSR0019QSZZ
NROLR0114QSZZ
NBRGY2122SCZZ
LPLTM0195QSZ2
NBRGM0501FCZZ
XRESP50-06000
LHLDZ0058QSZ3
LPLTP0185QSZ2
14
DESCRIPTION
DS
DJ
C
C
AD
DJ
AK
AR
AB
AC
AB
AA
AQ
AL
DX
EZ
DD
DJ
DJ
DD
EQ
EB
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
MSPRD0224QSZZ
AB
DJ
15
MLEVP0055QSZ1
AC
DJ
16
MSPRT0197QSZ1
AC
DJ
17
18
22
23
24
25
XEBS730P08000
CPWBF0222QSE3
CSFTZ0023QS04
CSFTZ0023QS01
XRESP40-06000
LFRM-0038QSZ5
NROLR0051QSZ1
LBSHZ0303FCZZ
AC
AK
AE
AH
AA
AZ
AL
AC
DD
EB
DS
DX
DD
FX
EB
DJ
C
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
26
PGIDM0165QSZ1
AR
EQ
Screw(38)
Sensor PWB
Shifter shaft
Shifter shaft
E type ring(E4)
Delivery frame
DUP delivery roller
M bushing C
Delivery upper paper guide
27
28
29
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
NROLP1122FCZZ
MSPRT0229GCAZ
XHBS740P10000
LX-BZ0780FCPZ
PSHEZ0650QSZZ
PSHEZ0649QSZZ
PSHEZ0655QSZZ
PFILZ0017QSZ1
LX-BZ0099QSZZ
LPLTM0509QSZZ
NFANP0020QSPZ
(Unit)
AF
AC
AA
AC
AB
AA
AD
AP
AB
AC
AP
DS
DJ
DD
DD
DJ
DJ
DJ
EQ
DD
DJ
EQ
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
A
C
C
B
PS upper roller
FU spring R
Screw(410)
Screw
Delivery hole sheet B
Delivery hole sheet A
Delivery fan connector sheet
Ozone filter
Screw
OF fixing plate
Fan motor ANR2
CFRM-0038RS74
BP
LP
CFRM-0038RS75
BQ
LP
BQ
LP
21
901
CFRM-0038RS76
Delivery sub roller shaft

Delivery sub roller
Delivery sub roller(Large)
Discharger brush LP
Delivery roller C
Transport roller bearing
Delivery earth plate A
Bearing
E type ring(E5)
Delivery roller holder
Delivery change gate
Delivery actuator spring
Delivery actuator
Delivery sub spring
(North America)
TR No.
()
LP
C
DUP
M C
PS
FU R
B
A
OF
ANR2
1st delivery unit(Without No.29,35 Include Block 21)

1st
(North America) (No.29,35
21
)
1st
(Japan) (No.29,35
21
)
1st
[Missing parts code](Except North America,Japan) (No.29,35
21
)
39
Effective
time
1st lot
1st lot
Update : 2009/10/16

6
1
3
3
13
3
11
10
36
12
9
11
8 16
10
37
14
16
15
23
17
18
29
38
39
17
42
41
26
36
22
21
37
40
24
39
17
25
22
17
35
28
PRP03920
17
40
28
27
27
42
41
40
41
Update : 2009/11/16

NO.
PARTS CODE

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
DESCRIPTION

(Except North America) E
(Except North America) E
M C
240
DUP
B
B
C
DUP
DUP
[Missing parts code] (2.63)

[Missing parts code] DUP
1
2
3
4
XHBS730P08000
RMOTS0071QSPZ
CPLTM0184QS03
XEBS730P08000
AB
BD
AH
AC
DD
GJ
DX
DD
C
B
C
C
MSPRD0225QSZZ
AC
DJ
6
7
8
9
11
12
13
LSTPP0003QSZ1
NGERH0068QSZ1
NGERH0067QSZZ
VHPGP1A71L3-18
XRESP30-06000
XRESP40-06000
MSPRD0216QSZZ
AC
AD
AD
AG
AA
AA
AD
DJ
DJ
DJ
DS
DD
DD
DJ
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
14
MSPRT0217QSZ1
AC
DJ
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
LBRC-0002QSZ1
LBSHZ0303FCZZ
NBRGY2122SCZZ
NBRGC0019QSZZ
XPSSJ30-08000
NBLTT0024QSZZ
NGERH0080QSZZ
NGERH0082QSZZ
AC
AC
AB
AD
AA
AG
AE
AD
DJ
DJ
DD
DJ
DD
DS
DJ
DJ
C
C
C
C
C
B
C
C
23
MSPRD0198QSZZ
AC
DJ
24
25
NGERH0113QSZZ
NGERH0114QSZZ
AC
AC
DJ
DJ
C
C
26
MSPRD0196QSZZ
AC
DJ
27
28
NGERH0155QSZZ
RPLU-0027QSZZ
RPLU-0027QSPZ
AD
AU
AU
DJ
EZ
EZ
C
B
B
29
CBRC-0004QS03
AF
DS
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
501
RMOTS0070QSPZ
XHBS730P08000
XBBS726P03000
XWHS730-05070
LHLDW1334FCZZ
PSHEZ0316QSZZ
PRDAZ0002QSZZ
PSHEZ0341QSZZ
CPLTM0184RS54
BD
AB
AA
AA
AA
AD
AD
AA
AX
GJ
DD
DD
DD
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
FG
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
E
502
CBRC-0004RS54
BA
FX
DUP motor
Screw(38)
Screw(2.63)
Washer
Wire holder
Delivery motor sheet
Delivery motor radiation plate
Shifter stop mylar
Shifter unit
DUP motor fixing bracket unit
BP
LP
1st delivery unit(Include Block 20)
BQ
LP
Screw(38)
Shifter motor
Shifter drive plate
Screw(38)
Stopper return spring
Shifter stopper
Shifter gear(50T)
Shifter gear(24T)
Photo sensor(GP1A71L3)
E type ring(E3)
E type ring(E4)
Shifter earth spring
Gate return spring
Gate bracket
M bushing C
Bearing(6)
Spring pin(3-8)
Drive belt 240
Delivery drive gear(25/31T)
DUP delivery gear(20/31T)
Delivery earth spring B
Idle gear B(29T)
Idle gear C(29T)
Delivery earth spring A
Gear(31/39T)
Change gate solenoid
Change gate solenoid
DUP motor fixing bracket
TR No.
Effective
time
09/09
1st lot
1st lot
1st lot
(Unit)
CFRM-0038RS74
901
CFRM-0038RS76
(North America) 1st

( 20 )
1st delivery unit(Include Block 20) [Missing parts code] 1st
(Except North America,Japan) ( 20 )
41
1st lot
Update : 2009/11/16
501
24
2
25
4
4
13
3
7
502
16
15
37 6
11
17
20
12
19
28
18
26
22
21
33
23
27
35 32
30
36
31
14
34
29
PRP03921
42
43
Update : 2009/11/16
R (PWB section)
NO.
PARTS CODE

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
CPWBX0136QS3L
CB
TX
1
CPWBX0136QS3M
CB
TX
2
3
4
5
XBBS730P08000
PSPAB0039QSZZ
CPWBF0235QSE1
XBBS830P08000
AA
AG
BB
AA
DD
DJ
GD
DD
C
C
E
C
DHAI-0611QSPZ
AV
FG
LHLDZ0062QSZ2
AT
EZ
8
9
LX-BZ0090QSPZ
LHLDW0086QSZZ
CPWBX0233QS31
CPWBX0233QS32
AE
AB
CD
CD
DD
DJ
UD
UD
C
C
E
E
CPWBX0233QS33
CD
UD
CPWBX0233QS34
CD
UD
30
CPWBX0233QS35
CPWBX0233QS36
XBPS730P06KS0
LHLDZ0071QSZZ
CPWBN0137QSE1
XHBS730P08000
LX-BZ0082QSPZ
LHLDZ0070QSZ3
XHBS730P08000
XEBS740P10000
XBPS730P08KS0
PSHEZ0269QSZZ
DHAI-0345QSZZ
CPWBX0140QS3K
CPWBN0174QS31
RSPA00001QSPZ
XEPS730P06X00
LSUPP0001QSZZ
DHAI-0606QSPZ
CPWBX0202RS55
CPWBX0202RS54
PCAPH0018QSZZ
CC
CC
AB
AG
AZ
AB
AA
AW
AB
AA
AB
AC
AG
CM
BV
AH
AA
AC
BT
BZ
CA
AD
UB
UB
DD
DX
FX
DD
DD
FG
DD
DD
DD
DJ
DX
UW
MW
DX
DD
DJ
MW
TR
TR
DJ
E
E
C
C
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
E
E
B
C
C
C
E
E
D
31
PCAPH0019QSZZ
AE
DJ
32
PCAPH0017QSZZ
AC
DJ
33
CPWBN0135QS34
BS
MW
DHAI-0591QSP1
BE
GN
BE
AS
AN
AP
AQ
GN
EZ
EQ
EQ
EQ
C
C
C
C
C
BF
GN
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
35
39
DHAI-0601QSP1
DHAI-0200QSZZ
DHAI-0347QSPZ
DHAI-0346QSPZ
DHAI-0506QSPZ
40
DHAI-0593QSPZ
41
DHAI-0350QSPZ
AG
DX
42
43
44
55
56
70
DHAI-0610QSP1
DHAI-0381QSPZ
DHAI-0594QSPZ
TLABH0533QSZZ
TLABH0534QSZZ
RDTCH0161FCP1
BF
AH
BG
AB
AB
AV
GN
DX
GT
DJ
DJ
FG
C
C
C
D
D
B
72
DHAI-0595QSPZ
AE
DS
73
LSUPM0002QSZZ
RCORF0046FCZZ
RCORF0046FCZZ
DHAI-0597QSP1
DHAI-0590QSPZ
VHI29L1607DQS
VHI29L1607EQS
VHI29L1607QQS
VHI29L1607PQS
VHI29L1607TQS
VHI29L1607UQS
VHI29L1608MQS
VHI29L12856QS
VHI29L12858QS
VHI29L12854QS
AE
AH
AH
BF
BT
BB
BB
BA
BA
BA
BA
BA
BH
BH
BH
DJ
DX
DX
GN
NE
GD
GD
FX
FX
FX
FX
FX
HC
HC
HC
C
C
C
C
C
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
37
38
74
75
80
82
83
DESCRIPTION
[MX-M260/M260N/M260FP/M260FG,
AR-5726] IMC
IMC PWB
[MX-M310/M310N/M310FP/M310FG,
AR-5731] IMC
Screw(38)
Spacer
Option interface PWB
Screw(38)
AN2R MCU-OP interface harness [Missing parts code] AN2R MCU-OP
MCU PWB fixing plate

MCU
Hexagon screw
6
Harness ring LPD
LPD
MCU PWB
[MX-M260 North America] MCU
MCU PWB
[MX-M310 North America] MCU
MCU PWB
[MX-M260/M260N/M260FP
/M260FG Except North America] MCU
MCU PWB
[MX-M310/M310N/M310FP
/M310FG Except North America] MCU
MCU PWB
[AR-5726] MCU
MCU PWB
[AR-5731] MCU
Screw(36KS)
Mother board holder
Mother board
Screw(38)
Screw(38)
OP PWB holder
OP
Screw(38)
Screw(410)
Screw(38KS)
CCD harness sheet

CCD
CCD harness
CCD
FAX main PWB
(Japan) FAX
LIU PWB
(Japan) LIU
Speaker
(Japan)
Screw(36)
(Japan)
Spacer(WLS18-0)
ILSW interface harness 2

[Missing parts code] ILSW 2
PCL PWB
[MX-M260N/M310N] PCL
PCL PWB
[MX-M260FP/M310FP] PCL
15P protect cap
15P
25P protect cap
(Except North America,Japan,Argentina) 25P
9P protect cap
9P
SPLC PWB
[MX-M260/M310/M260FG/M310FG,AR-5726/5731] SPLC
1st delivery harness
(North America) 1st
1st delivery harness
(Except North America) 1st
CL harness
CL
(Inch Series)
(AB Series)
LSU interface harness
LSU
Drive/Manual paper feed interface harness
/
Cassette sensor PWB harness
Operation PWB FFC

FFC
Fusing interface harness
AN2R power supply harness

[Missing parts code] AN2R
USB label AND
USB AND
NIC label AND
[Except MX-M260FG/M310FG] NIC AND
Temperature humidity sensor
Temperature humidity sensor harness
Support post
[MX-M260N/M310N/M260FP/M310FP]
Core
Core
MCU-casette harness
[Missing parts code] MCU-
DV interface harness
[Missing parts code] DV
MCU ROM
[MX-M260 North America] MCU ROM
MCU ROM
[MX-M310 North America] MCU ROM
MCU ROM [MX-M260/M260N Except North America] MCU ROM
MCU ROM [MX-M310/M310N Except North America] MCU ROM
MCU ROM
[MX-M260FG/M260FP] MCU ROM
MCU ROM
[MX-M310FG/M310FP] MCU ROM
MCU ROM
[AR-5726] MCU ROM
PCL PRGDIMM
[MX-M260N/M310N Philippines] PCL PRGDIMM
PCL PRGDIMM[MX-M260N/M310N Except Philippines] PCL PRGDIMM
PCL PRGDIMM
[MX-M260FP/M310FP] PCL PRGDIMM
TR No.
Effective
time
IMC PWB
43
1st lot
1st lot
1st lot
1st lot
1st lot
1st lot
1st lot
1st lot
1st lot
Update : 2009/11/16
R (PWB section)
change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
PARTS CODE
NO.
VHI29L32077QS
AZ
FQ
84
VHI29L32079QS
AZ
FX
VHI29L64012QS
BD
GN
85
86
87
LBNDJ0013FCZ1
PSPAN0025QSZZ
LX-BZ0024QSZZ
AE
AE
AA
DJ
DS
DD
C
C
C
DESCRIPTION
TR No.
Effective
time
PCL BOTDIMMJ
[MX-M260N/M310N Philippines] PCL

BOTDIMMJ
PCL BOTDIMMJ
PCL
[MX-M260N/M310N Except Philippines] BOTDIMMJ
PCL BOTDIMMJ
[MX-M260FP/M310FP] PCL
BOTDIMMJ
Band
Spacer
Screw
R (PWB section)
30
3
87
14
2
86
4
42
22
3
43 37
87
87
23
27
35
28
74 75
19
2 14
13
14
2
15
11
73
29
12
73
11
14
2
10
41 72
11
83
82
40 70
2
17
17
16
17
11
14
38 14
20
24
85
19
27 19
32
19
31
18
44
26
55
56
MX-M260N
MX-M310N
14
25
84
39
33
29
80
19
19
MX-M260FP
MX-M310FP
MX-M260/M310
MX-M260FG/M310FG
AR-5726/5731
44
PRP03922
45
Update : 2009/11/16

NO.
PARTS CODE
XBPSN40P06K00
DHAI-0596QSPZ
3
4
5
6
TLABZ4868FCZ1
XHBS730P06000
LPLTM0162QSZ1
LPLTM0252QSZZ
DHAI-0593QSPZ
8
9
10
11
12
13
15
DHAI-0378QSPZ
XHBS730P08000
XEBS740P30000
PGIDM0184QSZ1
XEBS740P30000
CDAIU0024RS57
LPLTM0249QSZZ
QACCD7713QCPZ
QACCB7623QCPZ
!
!

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
AA
DD
BT
MW
AB
AC
AC
AD
DJ
DD
DJ
DJ
D
C
C
C
BF
GN
AC
AB
AC
AH
AC
AZ
AC
AT
DJ
DD
DD
DX
DD
FQ
DJ
EZ
C
C
C
C
C
E
C
B
BB
GD
QACCVR621QCPZ
AQ
FQ
QACCZR626QCPZ
QACCZR941QCPZ
QACCB9521QCZZ
QACCJ6413QCPA
QACCLR624QCPZ
QACCR7621QCZZ
QPLGA4171CCPZ
QPLGA0001QCZZ
QPLGA0009QCPZ
PHOG-1023CCZZ
BB
BB
AW
AY
BA
AZ
AR
AN
AR
AB
GD
FX
FG
FQ
FX
FQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
DD
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
19
TCAUS0009QSZZ
AF
DS
20
21
QSW-C9295QCPZ
QSW-C9294QCZZ
AL
AF
EB
DS
B
B
22
DHAI-0589QSPZ
BS
MW
23
DHAI-0545QSPZ
AH
DX
27
RCILZ0016QSZZ
RDENC0052QSPZ
RDENC0053QSPZ
RDENC0051QSPZ
RDENU0058QSPZ
LHLDW1057FCZZ
DHAI-0588QSPZ
LFIX-0016FCZZ
XEBS740P30000
XEBS740P12000
XWHS740-08100
XWSS740-10000
LPLTM0349QSZZ
NFANP0020QSPZ
XBPS730P30KS0
XBPS730P08KS0
LPLTM0369QSZZ
XHBS740P10000
LSUPP0133FCPZ
RCORF0031QSPZ
LBNDJ0013FCZ1
LHLDW1154FCZZ
LBNDJ0037FCZ1
PTUBP0012QSZZ
RCORF0004QSZZ
LBSHC0008QSPZ
LPLTM0478QSZZ
XHSS730P06000
XEBS730P12000
XEBS730P10000
BE
BZ
BZ
BZ
BN
AB
BF
AD
AC
AA
AA
AA
AS
AP
AC
AB
AG
AA
AC
AK
AE
AC
AA
AC
AF
AC
AF
AB
AC
AC
GN
TF
TF
TF
LE
DD
GN
DJ
DD
DD
DD
DD
EQ
EQ
DD
DD
DS
DD
DJ
DX
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DS
DJ
DS
DD
DD
DD
C
E
E
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
42
45
46
47
49
50
53
56
57
59
60
61
62
63
64
DESCRIPTION
[Missing parts code] AN2R HL
Earth label
(200V Series)
Screw(36)
Drive earth plate
Paper feed earth plate LP

LP
Drive/Manual paper feed interface harness
/
Cassette earth harness
Screw(38)
Screw(430)
Harness guide
Screw(430)
1st lift up unit

1st
2nd earth plate
2nd
AC cord
(North America) AC
AC cord
(U.kingdom,UAE,Yemen,Oman,Qutar,
Kuwait,Bahrain) AC
AC cord
(Germany,Switzerland,Europe,East Europe,
Algeria,Iran,Egypt,Syria,Tunisa,Nigeria,
West Africa,Morocco,Jordan,Lebanon) AC
AC cord
(Philippines) AC
AC cord
(Thailand,Indonesia) AC
AC cord
(India,Special country,Malaysia,Singapore) AC
AC cord
(Japan) AC
AC cord
(Australia,New Zealand) AC
AC cord
(Argentina) AC
Plug
(India)
Plug
(Special country)
Plug
(Malaysia,Singapore)
Plug protector
(India,Malaysia,Singapore)
LAG Plug caution label
(Argentina) LAG
Power supply switch(AJ8W200BF)
Dehumidify heater switch

(Japan)
Dehumidify heater switch harness
(Japan)
Dehumidify heater separate harness

(Japan)
Reactle
(200V)
Low voltage power supply unit
(120V)
(230V)
(100V)
High voltage power supply unit
Wire saddle(LWS-3S)
AC switch harness
[Missing parts code] AC
AC cord fixing
(100V Series) AC
Screw(430)
Screw(412)
Washer
Washer
Power supply fixing plate
P/S fan motor

PS
Screw(330KS)
Screw(38KS)
Delivery support angle
Screw(410)
PWB supporter
Core
Band
Wire saddle(LWS5S2W)
Band
(200V Series)
Tube(F520)
(200V Series)
Core
(200V Series)
Edging(L=32)
(200V Series)
AC Inlet fixing plate
(200V Series) AC
Screw(36)
(200V Series)
Screw(312)
Screw(310)
(200V Series)
Screw(46K)
AN2R HL interface harness
45
TR No.
Effective
time
1st lot
1st lot
1st lot
1st lot
Update : 2009/11/16

45
50
46
49 North America
only
1
27
46
5
3
2
4
15
8
9
10
42
11
63
34
39
38
50 49
42
42
31
47
42 29
42
42
47
60
12
13
20
28
42
42
34
64
2
34
33
36
35
32
59
61
56
62
57
200V
SERIES
53
37
36 35
100V
SERIES
53
30
9
PRP03923
19
46
53
Update : 2009/11/16

NO.
PARTS CODE
1
2
3
MSPRC0378QSZ1
MLOKZ0001QSZZ
XEPS730P08X00
4
5

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
AB
AC
AA
DJ
DJ
DD
C
C
C
PGIDM0068QSZ1
AP
EG
MARMP0015QSZZ
AD
DJ
NSFTZ0054QSZ1
AD
DJ
NROLP1060FCZZ
AF
DS
MSPRP0345QSZ1
AD
DJ
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
XEBS730P08000
GCOVA0026QSTC
XEBS730P10000
PCOVP0089QSZZ
LPLTP0409QSZZ
PSHEZ0515QSZZ
NROLR0130QSZZ
AC
AP
AC
AD
AC
AG
AL
DD
EQ
DD
DJ
DJ
DX
EB
C
D
C
D
C
A
C
16
MSPRC0270QSZZ
AB
DJ
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
NBRGZ0503FCZZ
LSTPP0011QSZZ
LRALP0009QSZ2
XBPS730P08KS0
NKOM-0005QSZZ
NSFTZ0048QSPZ
PGIDM0074QSZZ
XEBS740P12000
PSHEZ0301QSZZ
PSHEZ0302QSZZ
AC
AC
AP
AB
AC
AF
AK
AA
AC
AC
DJ
DJ
EQ
DD
DJ
DS
DX
DD
DJ
DJ
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
27
MSPRD0287QSZZ
AC
DJ
28
29
30
31
33
NROLP0087QSZZ
NSFTZ0101QSZZ
PSHEZ0356QSZ1
PSHEZ0347QSZ1
LPLTM0396QSZ1
AD
AC
AE
AC
AD
DJ
DJ
DS
DJ
DJ
C
C
C
C
C
34
PSPAZ0055QSZZ
AA
DJ
35
501
LX-WZ0064FCZZ
CCOVP0089RS55
AA
AP
DD
EQ
C
E
502
CGIDM0068RS55
AU
EZ
503
CPLTP0409RS51
AN
EG
DESCRIPTION
Lock spring
Paper guide lock
Screw(38X)
Transport paper guide
2nd door arm
Transport paper guide shaft
U-turn roller
Transport paper guide spring
Screw(38)
Right cover
Screw(310)
Plate cover
Separator sheet
Transport roller
Bearing
Resin E type ring
Cassette rail R
Screw(38KS)
2nd U-turn guide
Screw(412)
Rail R side sheet F
Rail R side sheet R
Plate cover sheet
2nd rail R sheet
Plate cover spacer
Push nut(M3)
Plate cover unit
Transport paper guide unit
53
2nd
AND2
E
R
2ndU
R F
R R
2nd R

TR No.
Effective
time
1st lot
1st lot
1st lot
Update : 2009/11/16

3
2
2
1
4
a
a
b
8
6
8
26
23
25
502
9
31
19
10
28
29
27
24
15
22
21
18
24
17
14
20
33 13
35
503
27
30
16
34
12
34
501
54
11
PRP03927
49
Update : 2009/10/16

NO.
PARTS CODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
LPLTP0159QSZZ
LHLDW1226FCZZ
LPLTM0179QSZ1
PSHEZ0274QSZZ
GCASP0005QSZ4
PGIDM0070QSZ1
PTPE-0021QSZ1
LPLTM0181QSZ1
PGIDM0071QSZZ
LX-BZ1144FCPZ
NGERH0193FCZZ
12

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
AD
AB
AR
AC
BA
AM
AA
AB
AL
AA
AB
DJ
DJ
EQ
DJ
GD
EG
DJ
DJ
EB
DD
DD
C
C
C
C
D
C
C
C
C
C
C
MSPRC2631FCZZ
AC
DJ
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
MLEVP0755FCZ1
LX-BZ0833FCPZ
CSHEZ0244QS02
XRESP70-08000
NGERH0108QSZZ
MSPRC0354QSZZ
NSFTZ0047QSZ1
LPLTM0180QSZ1
NBRGP0041GCZZ
XEBS740P10000
AE
AC
AE
AA
AD
AC
AK
AE
AD
AA
DJ
DD
DJ
DD
DJ
DJ
EB
DS
DJ
DD
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
23
JHNDP0012QSZZ
AU
EZ
24
XBPS740P08KS0
AB
DD
25
GCOV-0282FCZZ
AH
DX
26
27
28
PSHEZ5948FCZZ
LPLTM0277QSZZ
XEBS730P08000
TCADZ0549QSZZ
TCADZ0550QSZZ
TCADZ0551QSZZ
AD
AC
AC
AE
AE
AE
DJ
DJ
DD
DS
DS
DS
C
C
C
D
C
C
BF
GN
BK
HC
29
501
CCASP0005RS79
DESCRIPTION
Cassette rear edge plate
Turn fastener
Rotation plate
Rotation plate sheet
550 cassette
Guide F
GID tape
Side plate guide F
Guide R
Screw
UC manual paper feed gear
Fusing pressure spring
Side plate F lever

Screw
2nd cassette sheet ASSY
E type ring(E7)
Lift gear(22T)
Lift gear spring
Lift shaft
Lift plate
Bearing
Screw(410)
2nd cassette panel AN2R
Screw(48KS)
Cassette handle cover P2
Cassette handle sheet P2
Side plate guide R
Screw(38)
Size display card
[Missing parts code](Inch Series)
Size display label
(AB Series except Japan)
Size display label
(Japan)
2nd 550 cassette unit
TR No.
550
F
GID
F
R
UC
2nd
E
2nd
AN2R
P2
P2
R
2nd 550
(Unit)
2nd 550 cassette unit(Without No.30)
901
CCASP0005RS59
49
2nd 550
(No.30 )
Effective
time
1st lot
1st lot
1st lot
Update : 2009/10/16

2
501
8
6
7
9
10
4
11
11
13
12
14
22
22
27
5
15
17
18
22
23
22
21
19
29
20
28
26
PRP03925
25
50
24
16
51
Update : 2009/10/16

NO.
PARTS CODE

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
DESCRIPTION
PCOVP0070QSZZ
AD
DJ
CPWBF0095QSE3
AP
EQ
Sensor cover
2nd cassette sensor PWB
MLEVP0063QSZ1
AD
DJ
Upper limit detect actuator
MLEVP0064QSZZ
AD
DJ
MLEVP0062QSZZ
AC
DJ
Paper detect actuator

P-IN detect actuator
10
11
13
14
PCOVP0064QSZZ
RPLU-0026QSZ1
RPLU-0026QSP1
MARMP0026QSZZ
MSPRC0209QSZ1
NSFTZ0102QSZZ
QSW-B0017QSZZ
AD
AR
AR
AD
AC
AH
AF
DJ
EQ
EQ
DJ
DJ
DX
DS
D
B
B
C
C
C
B
17
DHAI-0397QSPZ
AD
DJ
18
NBRGC0100FCZ1
AC
DJ
19
MSPRD0389QSZZ
AC
DJ
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
MARMP0021QSZZ
NGERH0107QSZZ
LPIN-0026MCZZ
NROLR0132QSZ1
MARMP0019QSZZ
NGERH0990FCZZ
NROLR0133QSZZ
AD
AD
AA
AR
AD
AB
AM
DJ
DJ
DD
EQ
DJ
DJ
EG
C
C
C
C
C
C
A
29
DHAI-0394QSPZ
AD
DJ
30
MSPRD0204QSZZ
AC
DJ
31
DHAI-0473QSP1
AG
DX
Solenoid cover
Paper feed solenoid
Paper feed solenoid
Solenoid arm
Solenoid spring
2nd paper feed roller shaft
Tray detect switch
Cassette detect interface harness
Bearing 6
Pick up roller pressure spring
Pick up arm R
Paper feed gear(20T)
Spring pin(2-8)
Paper feed roller AND2
Pick up arm F
Gear(16T)
Pick up roller
Door open/close detect harness
Paper feed in detect actuator spring
Cassette sensor PWB harness
51
TR No.
2nd
2nd
AND2
F
Effective
time
09/09
Update : 2009/10/16

8
14
2
17
10
28 2
4
13
5 11
31
30
6
19
27
14
18
20
26
21
22
23
29
24
52
PRP03926
53
Update : 2009/11/16

NO.
PARTS CODE
1
2
3
MSPRC0378QSZ1
MLOKZ0001QSZZ
XEPS730P08X00
4
5

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
AB
AC
AA
DJ
DJ
DD
C
C
C
PGIDM0068QSZ1
AP
EG
MARMP0015QSZZ
AD
DJ
NSFTZ0054QSZ1
AD
DJ
NROLP1060FCZZ
AF
DS
MSPRP0345QSZ1
AD
DJ
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
XEBS730P08000
GCOVA0026QSTC
XEBS730P10000
PCOVP0089QSZZ
LPLTP0409QSZZ
PSHEZ0515QSZZ
NROLR0130QSZZ
AC
AP
AC
AD
AC
AG
AL
DD
EQ
DD
DJ
DJ
DX
EB
C
D
C
D
C
A
C
16
MSPRC0270QSZZ
AB
DJ
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
NBRGZ0503FCZZ
LSTPP0011QSZZ
LRALP0009QSZ2
XBPS730P08KS0
NKOM-0005QSZZ
NSFTZ0048QSPZ
PGIDM0074QSZZ
XEBS740P12000
PSHEZ0301QSZZ
PSHEZ0302QSZZ
AC
AC
AP
AB
AC
AF
AK
AA
AC
AC
DJ
DJ
EQ
DD
DJ
DS
DX
DD
DJ
DJ
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
27
MSPRD0287QSZZ
AC
DJ
28
29
30
31
33
NROLP0087QSZZ
NSFTZ0101QSZZ
PSHEZ0356QSZ1
PSHEZ0347QSZ1
LPLTM0396QSZ1
AD
AC
AE
AC
AD
DJ
DJ
DS
DJ
DJ
C
C
C
C
C
34
PSPAZ0055QSZZ
AA
DJ
35
501
LX-WZ0064FCZZ
CCOVP0089RS55
AA
AP
DD
EQ
C
E
502
CGIDM0068RS55
AU
EZ
503
CPLTP0409RS51
AN
EG
DESCRIPTION
Lock spring
Paper guide lock
Screw(38X)
Transport paper guide
2nd door arm
Transport paper guide shaft
U-turn roller
Transport paper guide spring
Screw(38)
Right cover
Screw(310)
Plate cover
Separator sheet
Transport roller
Bearing
Resin E type ring
Cassette rail R
Screw(38KS)
2nd U-turn guide
Screw(412)
Rail R side sheet F
Rail R side sheet R
Plate cover sheet
2nd rail R sheet
Plate cover spacer
Push nut(M3)
Plate cover unit
Transport paper guide unit
53
2nd
AND2
E
R
2ndU
R F
R R
2nd R

TR No.
Effective
time
1st lot
1st lot
1st lot
Update : 2009/11/16

3
2
2
1
4
a
a
b
8
6
8
26
23
25
502
9
31
19
10
28
29
27
24
15
22
21
18
24
17
14
20
33 13
35
503
27
30
16
34
12
34
501
54
11
PRP03927
55
Update : 2009/10/16

NO.

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
PARTS CODE
DESCRIPTION
PCOVP0084QSZZ
AE
DJ
CPWBF0228QSE1
AX
FG
3
4
5
6
XEBS730P08000
DHAI-0597QSP1
NBRGC0100FCZ1
MARMP0018QSZZ
AC
BF
AC
AD
DD
GN
DJ
DJ
C
C
C
C
PCLC-0031QSZZ
AQ
EQ
Screw(38)
2nd multi step harness
Bearing 6
Body joint arm
2nd paper feed clutch(42T)
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
20
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
XRESP40-06000
XRESP50-06000
MSPRT0203QSZZ
NGERH0119QSZZ
NGERH1207FCZZ
CDAIU0024RS58
XEBS740P30000
XEBS740P12000
DHAI-0474QSP1
LPLTM0203QSZ1
NGERH0121QSZZ
NBLTT0029QSZZ
PCLC-0020QSZZ
NPLYZ0027QSZZ
PSHEZ0250QSZZ
NROLP0008QSZZ
PSHEZ0249QSZZ
NBRGC0529FCZZ
LPLTM0176QSZ1
PSHEZ0556QSZZ
AA
AA
AC
AD
AF
AZ
AC
AA
BS
AF
AE
AG
AX
AD
AB
AD
AB
AD
AH
AC
DD
DD
DJ
DJ
DS
FQ
DD
DD
MW
DS
DJ
DX
FG
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
EB
DJ
C
C
C
C
C
E
C
C
C
C
C
B
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
E type ring(E4)
E type ring(E5)
Joint spring
Gear(36T)
Joint gear(40T)
2nd lift up unit
Screw(430)
Screw(412)
LUM harness
Multi step drive plate
Gear(20T/45T/26P)
Vertical transport belt
Transport clutch
Vertical transport pulley
Flange sheet
Pulley
Flange sheet
Bearing
Clutch earth plate
Harness holder sheet
TR No.
2nd
2nd
[Missing parts code] 2nd

6

(42T)
E
E
2nd
[Missing parts code] LUM
2nd bottom cover

2nd cassette interface PWB
Effective
time
1st lot
1st lot
1st lot
2
3
11
29
30
17
3
25
b
13
32
33
24
31
28
10
12
14
15
8
26
14
20
15
34 15
15
5
6
9
7
PRP03928
55
56
Update : 2009/10/16
Y (Lift up unit)
NO.
PARTS CODE

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
DESCRIPTION
MSPRD0251QSZZ
AD
DJ
2nd cassette earth spring
MSPRC0263QSZZ
(Unit)
CDAIU0024RS57
CDAIU0024RS58
AC
DJ
Lift up spring
1st
2nd
AZ
AZ
FQ
FQ
E
E
1st lift up unit

2nd lift up unit
1st
2nd
CMOTV0778FCE3
AU
EZ
Lift up motor unit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
NGERH0158QSZ1
LDAIU0024QSZ2
NGERH0102QSZZ
NSFTZ0045QSZZ
NGERH0103QSZZ
NSFTZ0044QSZZ
NSFTZ0060QSZZ
NGERH0104QSZZ
NGERH0105QSZZ
PCOVP0061QSZ2
AE
AF
AD
AC
AE
AC
AC
AE
AD
AH
DJ
DS
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DS
C
D
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
D
MSPRD0208QSZZ
AC
DJ
Gear(29T/11T)
Lift up base
Gear(53T/14T)
Shaft
Gear(54T/13T)
Shaft
Shaft
Gear(13T/42T)
Gear(19T)
Lift up cover
1st cassette earth spring
12
13
901
TR No.
Y (Lift up unit)
3
FOR 1st LIFT UP
FOR 2nd LIFT UP
1
13
12
2
5
7
8
4
6
9
11
10
56
PRP03929
12
Effective
time
57
Update : 2009/11/16
Z MX-RP10 1(MX-RP10 Exteriors 1)

NO.
PARTS CODE

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
GCAB-0075QST1
XEBS740P12000
XHBS730P08000
LSTPP0016QSZZ
PCLC-0023QSZZ
NPLYZ0033QSZZ
CGIDM0106RS53
XHBS730P10000
GCAB-0074QST1
MHNG-0021QSZZ
MHNG-0022QSZZ
XWVS740-05000
NBRGC0018QSZZ
LSOU-0037QST1
PCUSS0022QSZ3
PSHEZ0413QSZZ
PSHEZ0077QSZ1
XEBS730P08000
19
LPLTP0321QSZZ
20
GCAB-0078QST1
AV
FG
21
LSOU-0039QSZ1
AN
EQ
22
MLEVP0098QSZZ
AC
DJ
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
VHPGP1S73P+-18
CPWBF0160QSE1
NGERP0168QSZZ
NGERR0169QSZZ
MSPRC0250QSZZ
PTME-0271FCZZ
XEPS730P08X00
MSPRP0315QSZZ
LSOU-0038QST2
LSOU-0041QST1
LPLTP0319QSN1
LPLTP0320QSN1
DHAI-0468QSZZ
CCLEZ0020QS01
AF
AS
AD
AE
AC
AD
AA
AD
AW
AP
AG
AG
AH
AK
DS
EQ
DJ
DS
DJ
DJ
DD
DJ
FG
EQ
DX
DX
DX
EB
B
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
501
CSOU-0037RS53
CD
UD
502
CSOU-0038RS53
CE
UH
AR
AA
AB
AC
AS
AD
BX
AD
AH
AX
AX
AA
AD
BD
AW
AD
AE
AC
EQ
DD
DD
DJ
EQ
DJ
TF
DD
DX
FG
FG
DD
DJ
GJ
EQ
DJ
DJ
DD
D
C
C
C
B
C
E
C
D
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
AE
DS
DESCRIPTION
SPF
[Missing parts code] RSPF
SPF L
SPF R
OC
OC R
OC F
Original tray lower cabinet TLPD
TLPD
Original tray S
S
SPF VR PWB
SPF VR
Pinion gear(36T)
Width detect rack gear TLPD

TLPD
Tray lock spring
Tray lock pawl
Screw(38X)
Regulation plate spring
Original tray TLPD

TLPD
Middle tray TLPD
TLPD
Regulation plate F TLPD
F TLPD
Regulation plate R TLPD
R TLPD
Original tray harness
SPF glass cleaner

SFP
Base tray unit(Include Block 31-501)
( 31-501
)
Original tray unit
Rear cabinet
Screw(412)
Screw(38)
Stopper
SPF paper feed clutch
Coupling pulley(39P)
SPF Transport unit
Screw(310)
Front cabinet
SPF hinge L
SPF hinge R
Washer
Bearing
Base tray
OC mat
OC mat sheet R
OC mat sheet F
Screw(38)
Width detect sensor fixing plate
57
TR No.
Effective
time
1st lot
Update : 2009/11/16
Z MX-RP10 1(MX-RP10 Exteriors 1)

2
1
3
8
5 4
13
7
2
33
32
34
501
10
22
23
22
35
9
35
12
11
23
31
12
12
2
26
29
21
30
25
12
37
27
28
26
29
19
24
16
18
14
17
20
18
18
18
502
15
18
58
PRP03930
59
Update : 2009/11/16
[ MX-RP10 2(MX-RP10 Exteriors 2)

NO.
PARTS CODE

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
1
2
3
4
5
6
CPWBF0139QSE1
XHBS730P08000
DHAI-0448QSZZ
LPLTM0111QSZZ
RPLU-0011QSZ2
PSPO-0023QSZZ
PSPO-0004QSZZ
AB
DJ
RCORF0026FCZZ
AL
EB
BA
AB
AV
AC
BA
AB
FX
DD
FG
DJ
FX
DJ
E
C
C
C
B
C
MSPRD0342QSZZ
AD
DJ
10
11
12
13
MLEVP0036QSZZ
MLEVF0093QSZZ
XBBS730P05000
DHAI-0388QSPZ
AD
AE
AA
AE
DJ
DJ
DD
DS
C
C
C
C
14
MSPRD0211QSZZ
AC
DJ
15
VHPSG2481++-1
AE
DS
16
MLEVP0092QSZZ
AC
DJ
17
18
XRESP20-04000
NROLP0011QSZZ
AA
AD
DD
DJ
C
C
19
PSPO-0020QSZZ
AB
DJ
20
PSHEZ0285QSZZ
AB
DJ
21
22
23
NSFTZ0013QSP1
PSPO-0003QSZZ
LHLDZ0101QSZZ
LHLDZ0101QSZ1
AF
AC
AE
AE
DJ
DJ
DS
DJ
C
C
C
C
24
MSPRD0305QSZZ
AC
DJ
25
26
27
28
29
30
LPINS0327FCZZ
NSFTZ0072QSZ2
XRESP50-06000
NBRGM0501FCZZ
NSFTZ0009QSP1
NROLP1517FCZZ
AC
AN
AA
AB
AE
AA
DJ
EQ
DD
DJ
DJ
DJ
C
C
C
C
C
B
31
MSPRP0306QSZZ
AC
DJ
32
33
LPLTM0316QSZZ
XEBS730P08000
AH
AC
DX
DD
C
C
34
MSPRC0307QSZ1
AC
DJ
35
MSPRP0123QSZZ
AD
DJ
36
MSPRT0308QSZZ
AC
DJ
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
PSHEZ0436QSZZ
PSHEZ0069QSZZ
PSHEZ0439QSZ1
LPLTP0117QSZZ
NBRGP0041GCZZ
PRNGP0090FCZ1
LSOU-0037QST1
PSHEZ0459QSZZ
AD
AE
AD
AM
AD
AB
BD
AC
DJ
DJ
DJ
EG
DJ
DJ
GJ
DJ
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
501
CSOU-0037RS53
CD
UD
DESCRIPTION
SPF interface PWB
SPF
Screw(38)
SPF interface harness

SPF
Reinforce plate earth plate
Gate solenoid
Sound proof sponge
Delivery gate sound proof sponge
Core(TRC-16813)
Delivery gate spring
Delivery gate lever
Pressure release lever
Screw(35)
Delivery sensor harness
Delivery sensor ACT spring
ACT
Delivery sensor ACT lever TLPD
ACT TLPD
E type ring(E2)
E
Delivery follower roller
Delivery sponge LPD
LPD
Delivery follower sound proof sheet
Delivery sub shaft
Sound proof sponge
Pressure release holder
Pressure release holder
Delivery sub spring
SP pin(210)
SP
Pressure release shaft TLPD
[Missing parts code] TLPD
E type ring(E5)
E
Bearing
Transport sub shaft
Transport sub roller
Read front sub spring
Base tray reinforce plate
Screw(38)
Read front follower earth spring
Transport sub spring
Delivery sub earth spring
Read front sheet
Base tray sheet
Delivery gate sheet
Delivery gate
Bearing
Resin E ring(E5)
E
Base tray TLPD
TLPD
Delivery gate sheet lower
Base tray unit(Include Block 30-501)
( 30-501
)
59
TR No.
Effective
time
1st lot
09/12
1st lot
Update : 2009/11/16
[ MX-RP10 2(MX-RP10 Exteriors 2)

2
2
5
4
1
12
6
12
43
11
9 10
41
42
13
14
15
29
16
40
18
20
44 39
17
38
501
18
19
27
31
34
26
24
29
22
20
30
28
19
21
37
17
33
30
25
32
36
23
24
28 27
PRP03931
60
30
35
33
33
33
61
Update : 2009/11/16
\ MX-RP10 (MX-RP10 Paper feeding section)

NO.
PARTS CODE

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
1
2
3
4
GCAB-0076QST1
NGERH0166QSZZ
PCLC-0316FCP1
MLNKP0001QSZZ
AN
AC
AP
AD
EG
DJ
EQ
DJ
D
C
B
C
MSPRD0309QSZZ
AC
DJ
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
NGERH0167QSZZ
NBRGM0096FCZ1
XRESP50-06000
NSFTB0075QSZ1
XPSSP20-07000
LPLTM0318QSZZ
XEBS730P08000
AD
AC
AA
AF
AA
AC
AC
DJ
DJ
DD
EG
DD
DJ
DD
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
14
MSPRD0314QSZZ
15
17
18
19
NSFTZ0074QSZ2
NBRGC0018QSZZ
NPLYZ0033QSZZ
PCLC-0023QSZZ
20
AD
DJ
AM
AD
AD
AS
EB
DJ
DJ
EQ
C
C
C
B
MARMM0047QSZZ
AE
DJ
21
22
LSTPP0016QSZZ
DHAI-0390QSZZ
AC
AC
DJ
DJ
C
C
23
PGIDM0105QSZ1
AQ
EQ
24
GCAB-0077QST1
AP
EQ
26
MSPRP0311QSZZ
AC
DJ
27
PTME-0029QST1
AE
DJ
28
MSPRD0310QSZZ
AC
DJ
29
30
NROLP1517FCZZ
NSFTZ0009QSP1
AA
AE
DJ
DJ
B
C
31
MARMP0046QSZZ
AD
DJ
32
PCOVP0094QSZZ
PCOVP0094QSZ1
AD
AD
DJ
DJ
C
C
34
CSFTB0073QS01
AF
DS
35
37
38
39
40
MARMP0044QSZ1
LFRM-0069QSZ1
LFRM-0069QSZ2
NCPL-0049FCBZ
NPLYZ0035QSZZ
NROLR0166QSZZ
NROLR1542FCZZ
AF
AQ
AQ
AT
AD
AX
AH
DS
EQ
EQ
EZ
DJ
FG
DX
C
C
C
C
C
B
B
41
NPLYZ0034QSZZ
AD
DJ
42
43
44
45
NBLTT0033QSZZ
VHPGP1S73P+-18
DHAI-0469QSZZ
PSHEZ0444QSZZ
AF
AF
AG
AE
DS
DS
DX
DS
B
B
C
C
46
MLEVP0097QSZZ
AC
DJ
47
48
49
LSTPP0015QSZZ
MLEVP0096QSZZ
MARMP0045QSZZ
AC
AC
AC
DJ
DJ
DJ
C
C
C
50
MSPRD0313QSZZ
AC
DJ
51
52
PSHEZ0407QSZZ
VHPSG2481++-1
AB
AE
DJ
DS
C
B
53
LHLDZ0153QSZZ
AC
DJ
54
PMLT-0095QSZZ
AB
DJ
501
CCAB-0077RS53
BP
LP
36
DESCRIPTION
TLPD
Paper feed drive gear(32T)
Bearing
E type ring(E5)
E
Paper feed roller shaft
Spring pin(2-7)
Paper feed earth plate
Screw(38)
JAM release spring R TLPD

JAM
R TLPD
Paper feed shaft
Bearing(8)
Coupling pulley(39P)
SPF paper feed clutch

SPF
U-turn paper guide arm R
U
R
Resin E ring(E5)
E
U-turn earth harness
U
U-turn paper guide TLPD
U
TLPD
U-turn paper guide cabinet
U
PS sub tension spring

PS
U-turn paper guide lock pawl TLPD

U
TLPD
U-turn paper guide lock spring TLPD
U
TLPD
Transport sub roller
Transport sub shaft
U-turn paper guide arm F

U
F
Maintenance cover
Maintenance cover
Pick up roller shaft ASSY
Pick up arm
Paper feed frame TLPD

TLPD
Paper feed frame TLPD
TLPD
1way coupling
1way
Paper feed roller pulley(16P)
Paper feed roller

Pick up roller
Pick up roller pulley(16P)
Drive belt
Paper feed unit harness
Pick up sheet
Stopper
Stopper release lever
Stopper arm
JAM release spring F

JAM
F
PS guide sheet
PS
SPF pick up sub holder

SPF
Pick up arm cushion
U-turn paper guide unit

U
TR No.
Effective
time
Open/close cabinet
Paper feed shaft gear(20T)
Torque limiter
Pick up link TLPD
Pick up arm spring
61
1st lot
1st lot
09/12
09/12
1st lot
Update : 2009/11/16
\ MX-RP10 (MX-RP10 Paper feeding section)

1
2
3
4
11
9
7
21
10
54
19
18
49
7
48
47
20
13
17
14
15
49
48
13
46
47
13
52
12
51
13
13
23
22
51
13
29
24
13
44
26
13
31
36
45
50
44
34
26
13
13
29
27
43
35
28
32
13
40
13
30
42
41
37
53
13
38
501
39
PRP03932
62
63
Update : 2009/11/16
] MX-RP10 1(MX-RP10 Transport section 1)

NO.
PARTS CODE

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
1
2
4
5
6
7
9
11
12
13
14
15
16
PGIDM0107QSZ1
PSHEZ0452QSZZ
PSHEZ0423QSZZ
LPLTP0328QSZZ
MSPRC0321QSZ1
PSHEZ0451QSZZ
LPLTM0327QSZZ
XHBS730P08000
NROLR0096QSZZ
NROLR0131QSZZ
NROLR0095QSZZ
PSHEP0647QSZZ
LPLTM0325QSZZ
AQ
AF
AP
AC
AB
AC
AD
AB
AR
AP
AR
AD
AH
17
MSPRC0360QSZZ
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
DHAI-0467QSZZ
RDTCT0006QSPZ
PTME-0030QSZZ
MSPRC3356FCZZ
NBRGM0501FCZZ
XRESP50-06000
XPSSP20-09000
NPLYZ0019QSZZ
PSHEP3029FCZZ
LHLDZ0102QSZ1
XEBS730P08000
NKOM-0007QSZZ
30
MLEVP0095QSZZ
32
33
VHPSG2481++-1
XEBS740P14000
34
MSPRC0153QSZZ
35
XWVS740-05000
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
EQ
DS
EQ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD
EQ
EQ
EQ
DJ
DX
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
B
B
C
C
AC
DJ
AP
AX
AC
AA
AB
AA
AA
AE
AA
AC
AC
AC
EQ
FG
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD
DD
DJ
DD
DJ
DD
DJ
C
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
AD
DJ
AE
AB
DS
DD
B
C
AB
DJ
AA
DD
LPLTP0434QSZZ
AC
DJ
JKNBZ0009QSZZ
NBLTT0036QSZZ
NBRGC0017QSZZ
MSPRD0316QSZZ
LPLTP0324QSZZ
NROLR0097QSZZ
AE
AF
AC
AC
AH
AR
DJ
DS
DJ
DJ
DX
EQ
D
B
C
C
C
B
43
LPLTM0326QSZZ
AM
EG
44
PBRSS0008QSZ1
AH
DX
45
PGIDM0106QSZ1
AU
EZ
46
PSHEZ0454QSZZ
AB
DJ
47
PSHEZ0455QSZZ
AD
DJ
48
MSPRC0063QSZZ
AB
DJ
49
LX-WZ5002BCZZ
AA
DD
501
CGIDM0106RS53
BX
TF
DESCRIPTION
SPF
PS SPF
AN2R
R
RSPF harness
RSPF
Paper feed in detect sensor
Open/close lock pawl TLPD

TLPD
Lock spring
Bearing
E type ring(E5)
E
Spring pin(2-9)
PS pulley
PS
Flange sheet DUP2
DUP2
Tension holder F
F
Screw(38)
Tension roller
Book sensor actuator TLPD
TLPD
Screw(414)
Book sensor spring
Washer
Book sensor fixing plate B1A
B1A
JAM release knob(24P)
JAM
Belt(B79MXL4.0)
Bearing
Tension spring F
F
Revers gate plate
Delivery paper roller
Paper feed paper guide reinforce plate
Discharge brush
Transport R paper guide

R
Paper feed paper guide cushion R
R
Paper feed paper guide sound proof cushion
Delivery paper guide spring
Poly slider(6.2-12-0.5)
SPF Transport unit

[Missing parts code] RSPF
(Include Block 34-501,Without No.18)
( 34-501
No.18 )
TR No.
Effective
time
Paper feed guide

Front separator sheet
Separator sheet
SPF separator plate
Pressure spring
Sound proof sheet
Sound proof plate
Screw(38)
Transport roller
PS roller SPF
Read front roller
White sheet AN2R
Transport plate
Delivery paper guide spring R
63
1st lot
Update : 2009/11/16
] MX-RP10 1(MX-RP10 Transport section 1)

4
5
46
47
44
42
43
45
21
28
11
21
47
20
28
18
22
41
48
23
36
35
37
12
40
24
38
28
24
25
17
34
32
26
30
19
22
23
33
18
13
39
27
23
49
22
14
23
29
28
16
15
PRP03933
501
64
65
Update : 2009/11/16
^ MX-RP10 2(MX-RP10 Transport section 2)

NO.
PARTS CODE

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
RMOTS0043QSPZ
DHAI-0467QSZZ
PTPE-0018QSZZ
XEBS730P08000
RPLU-0015QSP1
PSPO-0022QSZZ
XRESP40-06000
PSHEZ0414QSZZ
NBLTT0034QSZZ
NGERH0170QSZZ
NBRGM0501FCZZ
NGERH0116QSZ1
XEPS730P08X00
NGERH0117QSZZ
XPSSP20-09000
NPLYZ0019QSZZ
NBLTT0035QSZZ
PSHEP3029FCZZ
XRESP50-06000
BG
AP
AC
AC
AR
AB
AA
AB
AF
AD
AB
AD
AA
AK
AA
AE
AE
AA
AA
21
MSPRP0312QSZZ
22
23
XHBS730P08000
NBRGC0017QSZZ
24
NPLYZ0018QSZZ
25
26
27
28
29
31
32
PCLC-0032QSZZ
NKOM-0007QSZZ
MSPRT0317QSZZ
LHLDZ0103QSZZ
LPLTM0322QSZZ
LPLTM0323QSZ1
XBBS730P05000
34
MSPRC0418QSZZ
35
37
GT
EQ
DJ
DD
EQ
DJ
DD
DJ
DS
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD
DX
DD
DJ
DS
DD
DD
B
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
C
C
AD
DJ
AB
AC
DD
DJ
C
C
AE
DJ
AX
AC
AC
AC
AF
AG
AA
FG
DJ
DJ
DJ
DS
DX
DD
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
AC
DJ
XWHS760-08115
AA
DD
PTPE-0069QSZZ
AC
DJ
38
LX-WZ5002BCZZ
AA
DD
501
CGIDM0106RS53
BX
TF
DESCRIPTION
SPF TLPD
RSPF
PS
E
U
Screw(38)
Bearing
PS coupling pulley
PS
PS clutch SPF
PS SPF
Tension roller
Tension spring R
R
Tension holder R
R
Transport earth plate
Motor fixing plate
Screw(35)
PS Brake spring AN2R

PS
AN2R
Washer(M6)
SPF motor cooling sheet

SPF
Poly slider(6.2-12-0.5)
SPF Transport unit(Include Block 33-501)

RSPF
[Missing parts code] ( 33-501
)
TR No.
Effective
time
SPF motor TLPD

RSPF harness
Motor earth tape
Screw(38)
Pressure release solenoid
Sound proof sponge
E type ring(E4)
Flange sheet
Belt(48S2M244)
Gear(48T/43P)
Bearing
Gear(48T/25P)
Screw(38X)
Gear(48T)
Spring pin(2-9)
PS pulley
Belt(B86MXL4.0)
Flange sheet(DUP2)
E type ring(E5)
U-turn earth spring
65
1st lot
Update : 2009/11/16
^ MX-RP10 2(MX-RP10 Transport section 2)

2
4
4
3
31
37
8
9
10
11
32
32
20
12
19
14
18
17
13
15
4
4
21
16
25
22
12
38
34
19
35
23
20
12
24
20
26
28
14
29
27
PRP03934
66
501
67
Update : 2009/10/16
_ MX-TR11 (MX-TR11 2nd delivery paper unit)

NO.

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
PARTS CODE
XHBS740P10000
AA
DD
CPLTM0216QS01
AH
DX
Screw(410)
DID rail sub plate
AH
DX
DID rail sub plate
PBRSR0021QSZ1
PBRSR0020QSZ1
LFRM-0047QSZZ
LFRM-0058QSZ1
MSPRT0229GCAZ
NROLP1122FCZZ
NROLR0056QSZ1
DHAI-0592QSPZ
MSPRD0218QSZ1
VHPGP1SQ44S-18
VHPGP1SQ73P-18
QSW-B0017QSZZ
NBRGM0501FCZZ
NGERH0111QSZZ
NGERH0110QSZZ
NGERH0112QSZZ
NBRGY2122SCZZ
AG
AH
AG
AG
AC
AF
AN
AH
AE
AK
AF
AF
AB
AC
AE
AC
AB
DS
DX
DX
DX
DJ
DS
EQ
DX
DS
EB
DS
DS
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD
B
B
D
D
C
C
C
C
C
B
B
B
C
C
C
C
C
2
CPLTM0216QS02
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
DESCRIPTION
21
PGIDM0164QSZZ
AQ
EQ
Discharger brush S
Discharger brush L
Delivery frame
Delivery frame R
FU spring R
PS upper roller
Delivery roller
2nd delivery harness
Delivery earth spring
Photo sensor(GP1SQ44S)
Photo sensor(GP1SQ73P)
Tray detect switch
Bearing
Drive gear A(25T)
Idle gear A(29T)
Drive gear B(25T)
Delivery lower paper guide
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
NROLR0051QSZ1
LBSHZ0303FCZZ
XRESP40-06000
MLEVP0067QSZ2
XRESP50-06000
XHBS730P08000
XHBS740P10000
NSFTZ0117QSZZ
PCLR-0015QSZZ
NGERH0230QSZZ
XBPS740P08KS0
PSHEP0660QSZZ
(Unit)
AL
AC
AA
AD
AA
AB
AA
AE
AC
AC
AB
AB
EB
DJ
DD
DJ
DD
DD
DD
DS
DJ
DJ
DD
DJ
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
DUP delivery roller

M bushing C
E type ring(E4)
Delivery actuator
E type ring(E5)
Screw(38)
Screw(410)
Joint idle shaft
21 collar
Gear(21T)
Screw(48KS)
Harness protect sheet
901
CGIDM0164RS51
BC
GJ
2nd delivery unit(Without No.28)
Effective
time
TR No.
DID
DID
S
L
R
FU R
PS
2nd
A
A
B
DUP
M C
E
21
09/08 Mid
1st lot

(No.28 )
1st lot
_ MX-TR11 (MX-TR11 2nd delivery paper unit)

1
33
28
32
4
3
30
10
11
29
8
31
18
17
26
16
5
8
8
19
12
20
15
27
13
21
25
22
28
26 16
24
PRP03935
27
67
23
68
Update : 2009/10/16
. MX-TR11 (MX-TR11 Job-separater unit)

NO.
1
2
3
4
PARTS CODE
LSOU-0034QST3
GCOV-0042QST1
MLEVP0066QSZZ
XEBS730P08000

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
AY
AK
AD
AC
FQ
DX
DJ
DD
D
D
C
C
DESCRIPTION
TR No.
2nd delivery tray

Rail dummy cover
Actuator
Screw(38)
Effective
time
1st lot
. MX-TR11 (MX-TR11 Job-separater unit)
68
PRP03936
69
Update : 2009/11/16
a (Packing material & accessories)

NO.
PARTS CODE
TINSE2026QSZZ
AY
FQ
TINSE2078QSZZ
BD
GN
TINSE2090QSZZ
BG
GX
TINSG2088QSZZ
BD
GN
TINSJ2031QSZZ
TINSE2027QSZZ
AY
AK
FQ
DX
D
D
TINSE2083QSZZ
AY
FQ
AR
EQ
TINSG2089QSZZ

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
TINSJ2032QSZZ
AK
EB
TINSJ2033QSZZ
AN
EQ
TINSJ2034QSZZ
CDSKA0261QS31
AW
AH
FG
DX
D
D
CDSKA0264QS31
AL
EB
CDSKA0265QS31
CDSKA0266QS31
CDSKA0267QS31
CDSKA0268QS31
AL
AL
AL
AL
EB
EB
EB
EB
D
D
D
D
TCADZ0049QSZZ
AH
DX
TCADS1693FCZZ
TCADZ0098QSZZ
AA
AF
DS
DS
D
D
CCADZ1518FC01
AB
DJ
CCADZ1561FC01
AK
DX
TGANE1001QCZB
QCNWG0013QSZZ
TKEIA0001QSZZ
SPAKA0484QSZZ
LX-BZ0015QSPZ
AC
AF
AE
BE
AF
DJ
DS
DJ
GN
DS
D
C
D
D
C
TCADZ0010QSZZ
AC
DJ
10
11
LHLDW1226FCZZ
TCADZ1275FCZZ
SSAKA3001CCZZ
SSAKA5003CCZZ
SSAKA2343QCZZ
SPAKA0134RSZZ
AB
AB
AA
AA
AA
AL
DJ
DJ
DD
DD
DD
EB
C
D
D
D
D
D
LBNDC0075FCZZ
AB
DJ
UBNDA0001FCZZ
AA
DD
SPAKA3914FCZZ
TLABZ0106RSZZ
AC
AF
DJ
DS
D
D
7
8
12
13
14
15
17
19
DESCRIPTION
Operation manual
[MX-M260/M310 English(North America)]
Operation manual
[English(Except North America,U.Kingdom)]
Operation manual
[MX-M Series English(U.kingdom)]
Operation manual
[German(Germany,Switzerland)]
Operation manual
[Japanese]
Operation manual(Copy/SPLC install guide) [English]
Operation manual(Copy/PCL install guide)
[English MX-M260N/M310N]
Operation manual(Copy/SPLC install guide)
[German(Germany,Switzerland)]
Operation manual(Copy/SPLC install guide)
[Japanese MX-M260FG/M310FG]
Operation manual(Copy/SPDL install guide)
[Japanese MX-M260FP/M310FP]
Operation manual(FAX)
[Japanese]
CD-ROM
[MX-M260 North America]
CD-ROM
[MX-M Series(Except North America)]
CD-ROM(PDL DISK1)
[MX-M260N/M310N]
CD-ROM(PDL DISK2)
[MX-M260N/M310N]
CD-ROM
[MX-M260FG/M310FG]
CD-ROM
[MX-M260FP/M310FP]
Installation report card
(Germany,Switzerland,Europe,East Europe)
Installation report card
(Japan)
Warranty card SUK
(U.kingdom)
Maintenance card EX
[MX-M260/M260N/M310/M310N,AR-5726/5731]
Maintenance card J
[MX-M260FG/M260FP/M310FG/M310FP]
SCA warranty
(Australia,New Zealand)
Line cable
(Japan)
Counter contract card
(Japan)
Bottom packing case
(Japan)
2/3 fixing screw
Fixing screw caution card
TR No.
1st lot
1st lot
1st lot
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
SUK
EX
J
SCA
2/3
Turn fastener
Cassette rotation tag
Vinyl bag(140360) (North America,Japan,Argentina)

Vinyl bag(140260)
(Except North America,Japan)
Vinyl bag(260380)
OC protect sheet
OC
AC cord band
(Except North America,Japan,India,
Special country,Philippines,,Malaysia,Singapore) AC
AC cord band
(India,Special country,,Malaysia,
Singapore,Argentina) AC
DV sleeve
(Japan) DV
LAG 4 label
(Argentina) LAG4
69
Effective
time
1st lot
Update : 2009/11/16
a (Packing material & accessories)
Japan
Except Japan
17
MX-M260(North America)
MX-M310(North America)
MX-M260FG,MX-M310FG
MX-M260FP,MX-M310FP
8
13
9
MX-M260(Except North America)

MX-M310(Except North America)
MX-M260N,MX-M310N
AR-5726,AR-5731
15
10
11
12
14
PRP03937
70
70
Update : 2009/10/16
b MX-VR10 (MX-VR10 Packing material & accessories)

NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
14
901
PARTS CODE
GCOV-0075QSZ1
GCOV-0247FCZZ
PCUSS0032QSZZ
MHNG-0025QSTZ
XWVS740-05000
XEBS740P12000
MHNG-0026QSTZ
SSAKH3012KCZZ
(Unit)
CCOV-0075RS53

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
DESCRIPTION
TR No.
BB
AS
AW
BC
AA
AA
BC
AD
GD
EQ
FG
GD
DD
DD
GD
DJ
D
D
C
C
C
C
C
D
OC cover
OC stocker
OC mat
OC hinge R
Washer
Screw(412)
OC hinge L
Vinyl bag
OC
OC
OC
OC R
OC L
BK
HC
OC cover unit
OC
Effective
time
b MX-VR10 (MX-VR10 Packing material & accessories)
1
6
7
5
6
4
6
5
6
901
14
PRP03938
70
71
Update : 2009/10/16
c MX-RP10 (MX-RP10 Packing material & accessories)

NO.
1
2
3
6
7
9
10
11
12
14
15
16

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
PARTS CODE
SPAKA0088QSZZ
CFIX-0012RS54
SSAKZ0004QSZZ
SSAKH3012KCZZ
SPAKA0488QSZZ
SPAKA0487QSZZ
LSOU-0041QST1
SSAKA1341QCZZ
SPAK-545ECCZZ
SPAKA0622QSZZ
CCLEZ0020QS01
TLABS3760FCZZ
AE
AU
AA
AD
BK
BF
AP
AA
AA
AG
AK
AC
DS
EZ
DD
DJ
HG
GN
EQ
DD
DD
DX
EB
DJ
D
E
D
D
D
D
C
D
D
D
D
D
DESCRIPTION
TR No.
SPF
R
L
OC
SPF
CE
Protect packing sheet

SPF glass fixing plate unit
Vinyl bag(80450)
Vinyl bag
Add R
Add L
Middle tray
Vinyl bag(180380)
Vinyl bag
OC mat fixing add
SPF glass cleaner
CE label
c MX-RP10 (MX-RP10 Packing material & accessories)

11
10
2
1
3
12
7
14
PRP03939
71
Effective
time
72
Update : 2009/10/16
d MX-TR11 (MX-TR11 Packing material & accessories)

NO.
1
2
3
4
7
9
10

change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK
PARTS CODE
XEBS740P10000
XHBS740P10000
SSAKA0006UCZZ
LHLDZ0149QSZZ
SSAK-4271CCZZ
SSAKA2540QCZZ
PSHEZ0665QSZZ
AA
AA
AA
AH
AD
AB
AC
DD
DD
DD
DX
DJ
DD
DJ
C
C
D
C
D
D
C
DESCRIPTION
Screw(410)
Screw(410)
Vinyl bag(5060)
2nd delivery holder
Vinyl bag(420690)
Vinyl bag(260560)
Optical frame sheet
TR No.
d MX-TR11 (MX-TR11 Packing material & accessories)

1
2
3
4
7
PRP03940
72
Effective
time
09/08 Mid
COPYRIGHT 2009 BY SHARP CORPORATION

All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted.
In any form or by any means,
electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without prior written permission of the publisher.
SHARP CORPORATION
Business Solutions Group
CS PROMOTION CENTER
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2009 November Printed in Japan t

Sharp AR-5726 AR-5731 SM PC PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Sharp AR-5726 AR-5731 SM PC PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

SERVICE MANUAL

NOTE FOR SERVICING

This document has been published to be used

NOTE FOR SERVICING

1. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i

1. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1

2. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i

3. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i

3. Developer/Drum life end definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3

4. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3

3. Other related items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 31

[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE

[9] FIRMWARE UPDATE

NOTE FOR SERVICING

2. Precautions for servicing

1. Warning for servicing

3) There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may

3. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU

AR-5726/5731 NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE

Reversing single pass feeder

Job separator tray

Copier/Printer (SPLC) model

Exit tray unit

Paper feed unit

FAX expantion kit

Expantion memory board

FAX memory (8MB)

AR-5726/5731 PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 - 1

Paper feed unit

(8) Engine speed (ppm)

(2) Engine composition

OPC drum (Drum dia. 30mm)

Electronic photo (Laser)

Dry, 2-component magnetic brush

Transfer roller system

Contact blade system

Toner supply method

Toner supply by front cover open

Waste toner disposal

Toner cartridge collection

(3) Dimensions / Weight

OC model: 623 x 628 x 668mm

(9) Power source

Power source code

(10) Power consumption

23 sec or less (26-sheet model)

Jam recovery time

About 10sec, excluding fusing warmup, toner

Conditions: Leaving for 60 sec after door open, standard conditions,

Shift time to sleep

(5) First copy time

9.3 sec or less

Measuring conditions: When paper of A4 or 8.5 x 11 is fed from the

machine tray, with the polygon rotating.

USB 2.0 Device

(6) Engine resolution

Full Speed 1slot

1200dpi (equivalent) x 600dpi

Memory expansion slot

(7) Printable range

Void area image loss

Dot matrix LCD, touch panel